US20110157257A1 - Backlighting array supporting adaptable parallax barrier - Google Patents
Backlighting array supporting adaptable parallax barrier Download PDFInfo
- Publication number
- US20110157257A1 US20110157257A1 US12/982,020 US98202010A US2011157257A1 US 20110157257 A1 US20110157257 A1 US 20110157257A1 US 98202010 A US98202010 A US 98202010A US 2011157257 A1 US2011157257 A1 US 2011157257A1
- Authority
- US
- United States
- Prior art keywords
- display
- region
- light
- array
- pixels
- Prior art date
- Legal status (The legal status is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the status listed.)
- Abandoned
Links
Images
Classifications
-
- H—ELECTRICITY
- H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
- H04N—PICTORIAL COMMUNICATION, e.g. TELEVISION
- H04N13/00—Stereoscopic video systems; Multi-view video systems; Details thereof
- H04N13/30—Image reproducers
- H04N13/361—Reproducing mixed stereoscopic images; Reproducing mixed monoscopic and stereoscopic images, e.g. a stereoscopic image overlay window on a monoscopic image background
-
- G—PHYSICS
- G03—PHOTOGRAPHY; CINEMATOGRAPHY; ANALOGOUS TECHNIQUES USING WAVES OTHER THAN OPTICAL WAVES; ELECTROGRAPHY; HOLOGRAPHY
- G03B—APPARATUS OR ARRANGEMENTS FOR TAKING PHOTOGRAPHS OR FOR PROJECTING OR VIEWING THEM; APPARATUS OR ARRANGEMENTS EMPLOYING ANALOGOUS TECHNIQUES USING WAVES OTHER THAN OPTICAL WAVES; ACCESSORIES THEREFOR
- G03B35/00—Stereoscopic photography
- G03B35/18—Stereoscopic photography by simultaneous viewing
- G03B35/24—Stereoscopic photography by simultaneous viewing using apertured or refractive resolving means on screens or between screen and eye
-
- G—PHYSICS
- G06—COMPUTING; CALCULATING OR COUNTING
- G06F—ELECTRIC DIGITAL DATA PROCESSING
- G06F3/00—Input arrangements for transferring data to be processed into a form capable of being handled by the computer; Output arrangements for transferring data from processing unit to output unit, e.g. interface arrangements
- G06F3/14—Digital output to display device ; Cooperation and interconnection of the display device with other functional units
-
- G—PHYSICS
- G09—EDUCATION; CRYPTOGRAPHY; DISPLAY; ADVERTISING; SEALS
- G09G—ARRANGEMENTS OR CIRCUITS FOR CONTROL OF INDICATING DEVICES USING STATIC MEANS TO PRESENT VARIABLE INFORMATION
- G09G3/00—Control arrangements or circuits, of interest only in connection with visual indicators other than cathode-ray tubes
- G09G3/001—Control arrangements or circuits, of interest only in connection with visual indicators other than cathode-ray tubes using specific devices not provided for in groups G09G3/02 - G09G3/36, e.g. using an intermediate record carrier such as a film slide; Projection systems; Display of non-alphanumerical information, solely or in combination with alphanumerical information, e.g. digital display on projected diapositive as background
- G09G3/003—Control arrangements or circuits, of interest only in connection with visual indicators other than cathode-ray tubes using specific devices not provided for in groups G09G3/02 - G09G3/36, e.g. using an intermediate record carrier such as a film slide; Projection systems; Display of non-alphanumerical information, solely or in combination with alphanumerical information, e.g. digital display on projected diapositive as background to produce spatial visual effects
-
- G—PHYSICS
- G09—EDUCATION; CRYPTOGRAPHY; DISPLAY; ADVERTISING; SEALS
- G09G—ARRANGEMENTS OR CIRCUITS FOR CONTROL OF INDICATING DEVICES USING STATIC MEANS TO PRESENT VARIABLE INFORMATION
- G09G3/00—Control arrangements or circuits, of interest only in connection with visual indicators other than cathode-ray tubes
- G09G3/20—Control arrangements or circuits, of interest only in connection with visual indicators other than cathode-ray tubes for presentation of an assembly of a number of characters, e.g. a page, by composing the assembly by combination of individual elements arranged in a matrix no fixed position being assigned to or needed to be assigned to the individual characters or partial characters
-
- H—ELECTRICITY
- H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
- H04N—PICTORIAL COMMUNICATION, e.g. TELEVISION
- H04N13/00—Stereoscopic video systems; Multi-view video systems; Details thereof
-
- H—ELECTRICITY
- H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
- H04N—PICTORIAL COMMUNICATION, e.g. TELEVISION
- H04N13/00—Stereoscopic video systems; Multi-view video systems; Details thereof
- H04N13/10—Processing, recording or transmission of stereoscopic or multi-view image signals
- H04N13/106—Processing image signals
- H04N13/139—Format conversion, e.g. of frame-rate or size
-
- H—ELECTRICITY
- H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
- H04N—PICTORIAL COMMUNICATION, e.g. TELEVISION
- H04N13/00—Stereoscopic video systems; Multi-view video systems; Details thereof
- H04N13/10—Processing, recording or transmission of stereoscopic or multi-view image signals
- H04N13/106—Processing image signals
- H04N13/161—Encoding, multiplexing or demultiplexing different image signal components
-
- H—ELECTRICITY
- H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
- H04N—PICTORIAL COMMUNICATION, e.g. TELEVISION
- H04N13/00—Stereoscopic video systems; Multi-view video systems; Details thereof
- H04N13/10—Processing, recording or transmission of stereoscopic or multi-view image signals
- H04N13/189—Recording image signals; Reproducing recorded image signals
-
- H—ELECTRICITY
- H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
- H04N—PICTORIAL COMMUNICATION, e.g. TELEVISION
- H04N13/00—Stereoscopic video systems; Multi-view video systems; Details thereof
- H04N13/10—Processing, recording or transmission of stereoscopic or multi-view image signals
- H04N13/194—Transmission of image signals
-
- H—ELECTRICITY
- H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
- H04N—PICTORIAL COMMUNICATION, e.g. TELEVISION
- H04N13/00—Stereoscopic video systems; Multi-view video systems; Details thereof
- H04N13/30—Image reproducers
- H04N13/302—Image reproducers for viewing without the aid of special glasses, i.e. using autostereoscopic displays
- H04N13/305—Image reproducers for viewing without the aid of special glasses, i.e. using autostereoscopic displays using lenticular lenses, e.g. arrangements of cylindrical lenses
-
- H—ELECTRICITY
- H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
- H04N—PICTORIAL COMMUNICATION, e.g. TELEVISION
- H04N13/00—Stereoscopic video systems; Multi-view video systems; Details thereof
- H04N13/30—Image reproducers
- H04N13/302—Image reproducers for viewing without the aid of special glasses, i.e. using autostereoscopic displays
- H04N13/31—Image reproducers for viewing without the aid of special glasses, i.e. using autostereoscopic displays using parallax barriers
-
- H—ELECTRICITY
- H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
- H04N—PICTORIAL COMMUNICATION, e.g. TELEVISION
- H04N13/00—Stereoscopic video systems; Multi-view video systems; Details thereof
- H04N13/30—Image reproducers
- H04N13/302—Image reproducers for viewing without the aid of special glasses, i.e. using autostereoscopic displays
- H04N13/31—Image reproducers for viewing without the aid of special glasses, i.e. using autostereoscopic displays using parallax barriers
- H04N13/312—Image reproducers for viewing without the aid of special glasses, i.e. using autostereoscopic displays using parallax barriers the parallax barriers being placed behind the display panel, e.g. between backlight and spatial light modulator [SLM]
-
- H—ELECTRICITY
- H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
- H04N—PICTORIAL COMMUNICATION, e.g. TELEVISION
- H04N13/00—Stereoscopic video systems; Multi-view video systems; Details thereof
- H04N13/30—Image reproducers
- H04N13/302—Image reproducers for viewing without the aid of special glasses, i.e. using autostereoscopic displays
- H04N13/31—Image reproducers for viewing without the aid of special glasses, i.e. using autostereoscopic displays using parallax barriers
- H04N13/315—Image reproducers for viewing without the aid of special glasses, i.e. using autostereoscopic displays using parallax barriers the parallax barriers being time-variant
-
- H—ELECTRICITY
- H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
- H04N—PICTORIAL COMMUNICATION, e.g. TELEVISION
- H04N13/00—Stereoscopic video systems; Multi-view video systems; Details thereof
- H04N13/30—Image reproducers
- H04N13/332—Displays for viewing with the aid of special glasses or head-mounted displays [HMD]
-
- H—ELECTRICITY
- H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
- H04N—PICTORIAL COMMUNICATION, e.g. TELEVISION
- H04N13/00—Stereoscopic video systems; Multi-view video systems; Details thereof
- H04N13/30—Image reproducers
- H04N13/349—Multi-view displays for displaying three or more geometrical viewpoints without viewer tracking
- H04N13/351—Multi-view displays for displaying three or more geometrical viewpoints without viewer tracking for displaying simultaneously
-
- H—ELECTRICITY
- H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
- H04N—PICTORIAL COMMUNICATION, e.g. TELEVISION
- H04N13/00—Stereoscopic video systems; Multi-view video systems; Details thereof
- H04N13/30—Image reproducers
- H04N13/356—Image reproducers having separate monoscopic and stereoscopic modes
- H04N13/359—Switching between monoscopic and stereoscopic modes
-
- H—ELECTRICITY
- H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
- H04N—PICTORIAL COMMUNICATION, e.g. TELEVISION
- H04N13/00—Stereoscopic video systems; Multi-view video systems; Details thereof
- H04N13/30—Image reproducers
- H04N13/366—Image reproducers using viewer tracking
-
- H—ELECTRICITY
- H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
- H04N—PICTORIAL COMMUNICATION, e.g. TELEVISION
- H04N13/00—Stereoscopic video systems; Multi-view video systems; Details thereof
- H04N13/30—Image reproducers
- H04N13/366—Image reproducers using viewer tracking
- H04N13/383—Image reproducers using viewer tracking for tracking with gaze detection, i.e. detecting the lines of sight of the viewer's eyes
-
- H—ELECTRICITY
- H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
- H04N—PICTORIAL COMMUNICATION, e.g. TELEVISION
- H04N13/00—Stereoscopic video systems; Multi-view video systems; Details thereof
- H04N13/30—Image reproducers
- H04N13/398—Synchronisation thereof; Control thereof
-
- H—ELECTRICITY
- H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
- H04N—PICTORIAL COMMUNICATION, e.g. TELEVISION
- H04N21/00—Selective content distribution, e.g. interactive television or video on demand [VOD]
- H04N21/20—Servers specifically adapted for the distribution of content, e.g. VOD servers; Operations thereof
- H04N21/23—Processing of content or additional data; Elementary server operations; Server middleware
- H04N21/235—Processing of additional data, e.g. scrambling of additional data or processing content descriptors
-
- H—ELECTRICITY
- H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
- H04N—PICTORIAL COMMUNICATION, e.g. TELEVISION
- H04N21/00—Selective content distribution, e.g. interactive television or video on demand [VOD]
- H04N21/40—Client devices specifically adapted for the reception of or interaction with content, e.g. set-top-box [STB]; Operations thereof
- H04N21/41—Structure of client; Structure of client peripherals
- H04N21/4104—Peripherals receiving signals from specially adapted client devices
- H04N21/4122—Peripherals receiving signals from specially adapted client devices additional display device, e.g. video projector
-
- H—ELECTRICITY
- H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
- H04N—PICTORIAL COMMUNICATION, e.g. TELEVISION
- H04N21/00—Selective content distribution, e.g. interactive television or video on demand [VOD]
- H04N21/40—Client devices specifically adapted for the reception of or interaction with content, e.g. set-top-box [STB]; Operations thereof
- H04N21/43—Processing of content or additional data, e.g. demultiplexing additional data from a digital video stream; Elementary client operations, e.g. monitoring of home network or synchronising decoder's clock; Client middleware
- H04N21/435—Processing of additional data, e.g. decrypting of additional data, reconstructing software from modules extracted from the transport stream
-
- H—ELECTRICITY
- H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
- H04S—STEREOPHONIC SYSTEMS
- H04S7/00—Indicating arrangements; Control arrangements, e.g. balance control
- H04S7/30—Control circuits for electronic adaptation of the sound field
- H04S7/302—Electronic adaptation of stereophonic sound system to listener position or orientation
- H04S7/303—Tracking of listener position or orientation
-
- G—PHYSICS
- G02—OPTICS
- G02B—OPTICAL ELEMENTS, SYSTEMS OR APPARATUS
- G02B6/00—Light guides; Structural details of arrangements comprising light guides and other optical elements, e.g. couplings
-
- G—PHYSICS
- G06—COMPUTING; CALCULATING OR COUNTING
- G06F—ELECTRIC DIGITAL DATA PROCESSING
- G06F3/00—Input arrangements for transferring data to be processed into a form capable of being handled by the computer; Output arrangements for transferring data from processing unit to output unit, e.g. interface arrangements
- G06F3/01—Input arrangements or combined input and output arrangements for interaction between user and computer
- G06F3/03—Arrangements for converting the position or the displacement of a member into a coded form
- G06F3/033—Pointing devices displaced or positioned by the user, e.g. mice, trackballs, pens or joysticks; Accessories therefor
- G06F3/0346—Pointing devices displaced or positioned by the user, e.g. mice, trackballs, pens or joysticks; Accessories therefor with detection of the device orientation or free movement in a 3D space, e.g. 3D mice, 6-DOF [six degrees of freedom] pointers using gyroscopes, accelerometers or tilt-sensors
-
- G—PHYSICS
- G09—EDUCATION; CRYPTOGRAPHY; DISPLAY; ADVERTISING; SEALS
- G09G—ARRANGEMENTS OR CIRCUITS FOR CONTROL OF INDICATING DEVICES USING STATIC MEANS TO PRESENT VARIABLE INFORMATION
- G09G2300/00—Aspects of the constitution of display devices
- G09G2300/02—Composition of display devices
- G09G2300/023—Display panel composed of stacked panels
-
- G—PHYSICS
- G09—EDUCATION; CRYPTOGRAPHY; DISPLAY; ADVERTISING; SEALS
- G09G—ARRANGEMENTS OR CIRCUITS FOR CONTROL OF INDICATING DEVICES USING STATIC MEANS TO PRESENT VARIABLE INFORMATION
- G09G2320/00—Control of display operating conditions
- G09G2320/02—Improving the quality of display appearance
- G09G2320/028—Improving the quality of display appearance by changing the viewing angle properties, e.g. widening the viewing angle, adapting the viewing angle to the view direction
-
- G—PHYSICS
- G09—EDUCATION; CRYPTOGRAPHY; DISPLAY; ADVERTISING; SEALS
- G09G—ARRANGEMENTS OR CIRCUITS FOR CONTROL OF INDICATING DEVICES USING STATIC MEANS TO PRESENT VARIABLE INFORMATION
- G09G2370/00—Aspects of data communication
- G09G2370/04—Exchange of auxiliary data, i.e. other than image data, between monitor and graphics controller
-
- G—PHYSICS
- G09—EDUCATION; CRYPTOGRAPHY; DISPLAY; ADVERTISING; SEALS
- G09G—ARRANGEMENTS OR CIRCUITS FOR CONTROL OF INDICATING DEVICES USING STATIC MEANS TO PRESENT VARIABLE INFORMATION
- G09G5/00—Control arrangements or circuits for visual indicators common to cathode-ray tube indicators and other visual indicators
- G09G5/003—Details of a display terminal, the details relating to the control arrangement of the display terminal and to the interfaces thereto
-
- G—PHYSICS
- G09—EDUCATION; CRYPTOGRAPHY; DISPLAY; ADVERTISING; SEALS
- G09G—ARRANGEMENTS OR CIRCUITS FOR CONTROL OF INDICATING DEVICES USING STATIC MEANS TO PRESENT VARIABLE INFORMATION
- G09G5/00—Control arrangements or circuits for visual indicators common to cathode-ray tube indicators and other visual indicators
- G09G5/14—Display of multiple viewports
-
- H—ELECTRICITY
- H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
- H04N—PICTORIAL COMMUNICATION, e.g. TELEVISION
- H04N13/00—Stereoscopic video systems; Multi-view video systems; Details thereof
- H04N13/30—Image reproducers
- H04N2013/40—Privacy aspects, i.e. devices showing different images to different viewers, the images not being viewpoints of the same scene
- H04N2013/403—Privacy aspects, i.e. devices showing different images to different viewers, the images not being viewpoints of the same scene the images being monoscopic
-
- H—ELECTRICITY
- H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
- H04N—PICTORIAL COMMUNICATION, e.g. TELEVISION
- H04N13/00—Stereoscopic video systems; Multi-view video systems; Details thereof
- H04N13/30—Image reproducers
- H04N2013/40—Privacy aspects, i.e. devices showing different images to different viewers, the images not being viewpoints of the same scene
- H04N2013/405—Privacy aspects, i.e. devices showing different images to different viewers, the images not being viewpoints of the same scene the images being stereoscopic or three dimensional
Definitions
- the present invention generally relates to display systems that utilize backlighting and, in particular, to display systems that utilize backlighting and support the viewing of two-dimensional and three-dimensional images.
- Images may be generated for display in various forms.
- television is a widely used telecommunication medium for transmitting and displaying images in monochromatic (“black and white”) or color form.
- images are provided in analog form and are displayed by display devices in two-dimensions.
- images are being provided in digital form for display in two-dimensions on display devices having improved resolution (e.g., “high definition” or “HD”).
- HD high definition
- a parallax barrier is one example of a device that enables images to be displayed in three-dimensions.
- a parallax barrier includes of a layer of material with a series of precision slits. The parallax barrier is placed proximal to a display so that a viewer's eyes each see a different set of pixels to create a sense of depth through parallax.
- a disadvantage of parallax barriers is that the viewer must be positioned in a well-defined location in order to experience the three-dimensional effect. If the viewer moves his/her eyes away from this “sweet spot,” image flipping and/or exacerbation of the eyestrain, headaches and nausea that may be associated with prolonged three-dimensional image viewing may result.
- Conventional three-dimensional LCD displays that utilize parallax barriers are also constrained in that the displays must be entirely in a two-dimensional image mode or a three-dimensional image mode at any time.
- Conventional LCD displays typically include a backlight and a display panel that includes an array of LCD pixels.
- the backlight is designed to produce a sheet of light of uniform luminosity for illuminating the LCD pixels.
- the use of a conventional backlight will result in a disparity in perceived brightness between the different simultaneously-displayed regions. This is because the number of visible pixels per unit area associated with a two-dimensional region will generally exceed the number of visible pixels per unit area associated with a particular three-dimensional or multi-view three-dimensional region (in which the pixels must be partitioned among different eyes/views).
- This disparity in perceived brightness between display regions may lead to an unsatisfactory viewing experience for a viewer.
- the viewer may also cause the brightness of an image in another display region to be reduced or increased to an undesired level. Consequently, the viewer will be unable to set all of the display regions to a single desired brightness level.
- the viewer may be unable to adequately perceive images displayed in regions of reduced brightness.
- the disparity in perceived brightness between the display regions may be distracting or annoying to the viewer.
- the display systems and methods provide a backlight panel comprising an array of light sources (e.g., LEDs) that may be individually controlled to vary the backlighting luminosity provided to a proximately-positioned display panel on a region-by-region basis.
- Such control may be automatic and/or manual. This enables, for example, the brightness of each region to be controlled such that a viewer perceives roughly uniform brightness across all regions. This is particularly useful in a display system having an adaptable parallax barrier that allows for the simultaneous viewing of two-dimensional images, three-dimensional images and multi-view three-dimensional content in different display regions, since those display regions may be perceived as having a different number of pixels per unit area.
- the intensity of pixels associated with a particular display region can also be increased or reduced in order to control brightness on a region-by-region or pixel-by-pixel basis.
- a combined backlight array and pixel intensity control scheme is used to provide desired brightness on a region-by-region basis.
- the intensity of pixels near the boundary of a region may be increased or reduced to correct disparities caused by the luminosity contribution (or lack thereof) from backlight sources associated with adjacent regions.
- a grating system may be used to prevent the spilling over of light from adjacent regions.
- an embodiment of the invention may be implemented by providing control of the brightness of the regions of the OLED/PLED array that correspond to different display regions.
- FIG. 1A is a block diagram of a display system in accordance with one example embodiment.
- FIG. 1B is a block diagram of a display system in accordance with another example embodiment.
- FIG. 2 is a block diagram of one example implementation of the display system of FIG. 1A .
- FIG. 3 shows a view of a surface of a parallax barrier in accordance with an example embodiment.
- FIGS. 4 and 5 show views of a blocking region of a blocking region array that is selected to be transparent and to be opaque, respectively, according to example embodiments.
- FIG. 6 depicts a flowchart of one method for generating two-dimensional and/or three-dimensional images in accordance with an example embodiment.
- FIG. 7 shows a cross-sectional view of an example of the display system of FIG. 2 in accordance with an embodiment.
- FIGS. 8A and 8B each show a view of an example parallax barrier with non-blocking slits in accordance with an embodiment.
- FIG. 9 is a block diagram of a blocking array controller in accordance with an example embodiment.
- FIG. 10 depicts a flowchart of a method for forming a three-dimensional image in accordance with an example embodiment.
- FIG. 11 shows the display system of FIG. 7 providing a three-dimensional image to a user in accordance with an example embodiment.
- FIG. 12 depicts a flowchart of a method that may be performed to enable the display of two-dimensional and three-dimensional images in accordance with an example embodiment.
- FIG. 13 shows a display system configured to generate two-dimensional and three-dimensional images in accordance with an example embodiment.
- FIGS. 14 and 15 show views of the blocking region array of FIG. 3 configured to enable the simultaneous display of two-dimensional and three-dimensional images of various sizes in accordance with example embodiments.
- FIG. 16 is a view of a display system that implements a controllable backlight array and is configured to simultaneously display two-dimensional and three-dimensional content in accordance with an embodiment.
- FIG. 17 is a view of the display system of FIG. 16 in an alternate configuration for simultaneously displaying two-dimensional and three-dimensional content.
- FIG. 18 depicts a flowchart of method for operating a display system that utilizes a backlight panel comprising an array of individually-controllable light sources in accordance with an embodiment.
- FIG. 19 depicts a flowchart of a method for operating a display system that includes a backlight array to independently control the brightness of different display regions generated thereby to simultaneously display corresponding two-dimensional images, three-dimensional images, and multi-view three-dimensional content.
- FIG. 20 is a block diagram of a display system in accordance with an alternate embodiment that uses a conventional backlight and implements a regional brightness control scheme based on pixel intensity.
- FIG. 21 illustrates one example configuration of the display system of FIG. 20 .
- FIG. 22 depicts a flowchart of a method for operating a display system that utilizes a regional brightness control scheme based on pixel intensity in accordance with an embodiment.
- FIG. 23 is a front perspective view of the display panel of FIG. 16 .
- FIG. 24 depicts a flowchart of a method for implementing regional brightness control in a display system that combines the use of a backlight array of independently-controllable light sources with regional pixel intensity control in accordance with an embodiment.
- FIG. 25 is a view of display system that includes a grating structure in accordance with an embodiment.
- FIG. 26 provides a partial, blown-up view of the grating structure shown in FIG. 25 .
- FIG. 27 is a block diagram of a display system in accordance with an alternate embodiment that utilizes a display panel comprising an array of organic light emitting diodes (OLEDs) or polymer light emitting diodes (PLEDs) and implements a regional brightness control scheme based on controlling OLED/PLED pixel brightness.
- OLEDs organic light emitting diodes
- PLEDs polymer light emitting diodes
- FIG. 28 depicts a flowchart of a method for operating a display system that implements a regional brightness control scheme by controlling the amount of light emitted by OLED/PLED pixels in accordance with an embodiment.
- FIG. 29 is a block diagram of a display system in accordance with an alternate embodiment that uses a brightness regulation overlay to implement a regional brightness control scheme.
- FIG. 30 illustrates two exemplary configurations of an example implementation of an adaptable light manipulator that includes a parallax barrier and a brightness regulation overlay in accordance with an embodiment.
- FIG. 31 depicts a flowchart of a method for operating a display system that uses a using a brightness regulation overlay to implement a regional brightness control scheme by in accordance with an embodiment.
- FIG. 32 is a block diagram of an example practical implementation of a display system in accordance with an embodiment of the present invention.
- references in the specification to “one embodiment,” “an embodiment,” “an example embodiment,” etc., indicate that the embodiment described may include a particular feature, structure, or characteristic, but every embodiment may not necessarily include the particular feature, structure, or characteristic. Moreover, such phrases are not necessarily referring to the same embodiment. Further, when a particular feature, structure, or characteristic is described in connection with an embodiment, it is submitted that it is within the knowledge of one skilled in the art to effect such feature, structure, or characteristic in connection with other embodiments whether or not explicitly described.
- Display systems will be described herein that include a backlight panel comprising an array of light sources that can be individually controlled to vary backlighting luminosity on a region-by-region basis.
- a backlight panel is particularly useful, for example, in display systems such as those described in commonly-owned, co-pending U.S. patent application Ser. No. 12/845,440 (entitled “Adaptable Parallax Barrier Supporting Mixed 2D and Stereoscopic 3D Display Regions” and filed on Jul. 28, 2010) in which a dynamically-modifiable parallax barrier is used to support the simultaneous display of two-dimensional images, three-dimensional images and multi-view three-dimensional content in different display regions.
- the backlight panels described herein may advantageously be used in any display system in which it is desirable to simultaneously provide different levels of brightness to different display regions associated with the display system.
- Display systems will also be described herein that selectively increase or reduce the intensity of pixels associated with a particular display region in order to control brightness on a region-by-region or pixel-by-pixel basis.
- a combined backlight array and pixel intensity control scheme is used to provide desired brightness on a region-by-region basis.
- the intensity of pixels near the boundary of a region may be increased or reduced to correct disparities caused by the luminosity contribution (or lack thereof) from backlight sources associated with adjacent regions.
- a grating system is used to prevent the spilling over of light from adjacent regions.
- Display systems will also be described herein that do not use backlights but instead use organic light emitting diodes (OLEDs) or polymer light emitting diodes (PLEDs) that combine the illumination and image-generation function.
- OLEDs organic light emitting diodes
- PLEDs polymer light emitting diodes
- these display systems implement regional brightness control by providing control over the brightness of the regions of an OLED/PLED pixel array that correspond to different display regions.
- FIG. 1A is a block diagram of an example display system 100 in which embodiments of the present invention may be implemented.
- display system 100 includes a display device 116 .
- Display device 116 may comprise, for example, a television display, a computer monitor, a laptop monitor, or a display associated with a cellular telephone, smart telephone, personal media player, personal digital assistant, or the like.
- display device 116 is capable of simultaneously displaying two-dimensional images, three-dimensional images and multi-view three-dimensional content via different display regions.
- display device 116 includes a backlight panel 102 , a display panel 104 and a parallax barrier 106 .
- Backlight panel 102 emits light 110 , which passes through pixels of display panel 104 , thereby creating display-generated light 112 , which includes image information.
- image information may include one or more still images, motion (e.g., video) images, etc.
- Display-generated light 112 is received by parallax barrier 106 , which filters display-generated light 112 to pass filtered display-generated light 114 .
- parallax barrier 106 may filter display-generated light 112 with a plurality of barrier regions that are selectively opaque or transparent.
- Filtered display-generated light 114 includes a plurality of images formed from the image information included in display-generated light 112 .
- filtered display-generated light 114 may include one or more two-dimensional images and/or one or more three-dimensional images.
- Filtered display-generated light 114 is received in a viewing space 108 proximate to display device 116 .
- One or more users may be present in viewing space 108 to view the two-dimensional and/or three-dimensional images included in filtered display-generated light 114 .
- FIG. 1B is a block diagram of an alternative example display system 150 in which embodiments of the present invention may be implemented.
- display system 150 includes a display device 166 that includes a backlight panel 152 , a parallax barrier 154 and a display panel 156 .
- Backlight panel 152 emits light 160 , which is received by parallax barrier 154 , which filters light 160 to pass filtered light 162 .
- parallax barrier 154 may filter light 160 with a plurality of barrier regions that are selectively opaque or transparent. Filtered light 162 passes through pixels of display panel 156 , thereby creating filtered display-generated light 164 .
- Filtered display-generated light 164 includes a plurality of images formed by the passage of filtered light 162 through the pixels of display panel 156 .
- filtered display-generated light 164 may include one or more two-dimensional images and/or one or more three-dimensional images.
- Filtered display-generated light 114 is received in a viewing space 158 proximate to display device 166 .
- One or more users may be present in viewing space 158 to view the two-dimensional and/or three-dimensional images included in filtered display-generated light 114 .
- embodiments of the present invention described herein may likewise be implemented in display system 150 of FIG. 1B .
- embodiments described herein that utilize a backlight panel comprising an array of light sources that can be individually controlled to vary backlighting luminosity on a region-by-region basis can be implemented in either display system 100 of FIG. 1A or display system 150 of FIG. 1B to achieve similar benefits.
- embodiments described herein that selectively increase or reduce the intensity of pixels associated with a particular display region in order to control brightness on a region-by-region or pixel-by-pixel basis can be implemented in either display system 100 of FIG. 1A or display system 150 of FIG. 1B to achieve similar benefits.
- FIG. 2 is a block diagram of a display system 200 , which is one example implementation of system 100 shown in FIG. 1A .
- system 200 includes a display controller 202 and display device 116 (which includes backlight panel 102 , display panel 104 and parallax barrier 106 ).
- backlight panel 102 includes a backlight array 210
- display panel 104 includes a pixel array 212
- parallax barrier 106 includes a blocking region array 210 .
- display controller 202 includes a backlight array controller 204 , a pixel array controller 206 , and a blocking array controller 208 .
- Backlight array 210 comprises a two-dimensional array of light sources. Such light sources may be arranged, for example, in a rectangular grid. Each light source in backlight array 210 is individually addressable and controllable to select an amount of light emitted thereby. A single light source may comprise one or more light-emitting elements depending upon the implementation. In one embodiment, each light source in backlight array 210 comprises a single light-emitting diode (LED) although this example is not intended to be limiting.
- Backlight array controller 204 within display controller 202 controls the amount of light emitted by each light source in backlight array 210 by sending a control signal 216 to backlight array 210 . Control signal 216 may include one or more control signals used to control the amount of light emitted by each light source in backlight array 210 . The operation of backlight array controller 204 and backlight array 210 will be described in further detail herein.
- Pixel array 212 includes a two-dimensional array of pixels. Such pixels may be arranged, for example, in a rectangular grid.
- display panel 104 comprises a liquid crystal display (LCD) panel
- each pixel in pixel array 212 comprises an LCD pixel, although this example is not intended to be limiting.
- Each pixel in pixel array 212 is individually addressable and controllable to select an amount of light originating from backlight array 210 that will be passed thereby, thus allowing the intensity of each pixel to be varied.
- each pixel of pixel array 212 includes a plurality of sub-pixels, wherein each sub-pixel operates as a filter to pass a certain type of colored light and is individually addressable and controllable to select an amount of light that will be passed thereby.
- each pixel in pixel array 212 may include a red sub-pixel that filters light produced by backlight panel 102 to produce red light, a green sub-pixel that filters light produced by backlight panel 102 to produce green light and a blue sub-pixel that filters light produced by backlight panel 102 to produce blue light.
- Parallax barrier 106 is positioned proximate to a surface of pixel array 212 .
- Blocking region array 214 is a layer of parallax barrier 106 that includes a plurality of blocking regions arranged in an array. Each blocking region of the array is configured to be selectively opaque or transparent.
- FIG. 3 shows a parallax barrier 300 in accordance with an example embodiment.
- Parallax barrier 300 is an example of parallax barrier 106 of FIG. 2 .
- parallax barrier 300 includes a blocking region array 302 .
- Blocking region array 302 includes a plurality of blocking regions 304 arranged in a two-dimensional array (e.g., arranged in a grid), although in other embodiments blocking regions 304 may be arranged in other ways.
- Each blocking region 304 is shown in FIG. 3 as rectangular (e.g., square) in shape but, in other embodiments, blocking regions 304 may have other shapes.
- Blocking regions 304 may each comprise a pixel of an LCD, a moveable mechanical element (e.g., a hinged flap that passes light in a first position and blocks light in a second position), a magnetically-actuated element, or other suitable blocking element.
- Blocking region array 302 may include any number of blocking regions 304 .
- blocking region array 302 includes twenty-eight blocking regions 304 along an x-axis and includes twenty blocking regions 304 along a y-axis, for a total number of five hundred and sixty blocking regions 304 .
- these dimensions of blocking region array 302 and the total number of blocking regions 304 for blocking region array 302 shown in FIG. 3 are provided for illustrative purposes, and are not intended to be limiting.
- Blocking region array 302 may include any number of blocking regions 304 , and may have any array dimensions, including hundreds, thousands, or even larger numbers of blocking regions 304 along each of the x- and y-axes.
- Each blocking region 304 of blocking region array 302 is selectable to be opaque or transparent.
- FIG. 4 shows a blocking region 304 x that is selected to be transparent
- FIG. 5 shows blocking region 304 x when selected to be opaque, according to example embodiments.
- blocking region 304 x is selected to be transparent
- display-generated light 112 emanating from pixel array 212 may pass through blocking region 304 x (e.g., to viewing space 108 ).
- blocking region 304 x is selected to be opaque
- display-generated light 112 from pixel array 212 is blocked from passing through blocking region 304 x .
- display-generated light 112 received at blocking region array 302 is filtered to generate filtered display-generated light 114 .
- Display controller 202 is configured to generate control signals to enable display device 116 to display two-dimensional and three-dimensional images to users 222 in viewing space 108 .
- pixel array controller 206 is configured to generate a control signal 218 that is received by pixel array 212 .
- Control signal 218 may include one or more control signals used to cause pixels of pixel array 212 to emit display-generated light 112 of particular desired colors and/or intensity.
- Blocking array controller 208 is configured to generate a control signal 220 that is received by blocking region array 214 .
- Control signal 220 may include one or more control signals used to cause each of blocking regions 304 of blocking region array 302 to be transparent or opaque. In this manner, blocking region array 214 filters display-generated light 112 to generate filtered display-generated light 114 that includes one or more two-dimensional and/or three-dimensional images that may be viewed by users 222 in viewing space 108 .
- control signal 218 may control sets of pixels of pixel array 212 to each emit light representative of a respective image, to provide a plurality of images.
- Control signal 220 may control blocking regions 304 of blocking region array 214 to filter the light received from pixel array 212 according to the provided images such that one or more of the images are received by users 222 in two-dimensional form.
- control signal 220 may select one or more sets of blocking regions 304 of blocking region array 302 to be transparent, to transmit one or more corresponding two-dimensional images to users 222 .
- control signal 220 may control sections of blocking region array 214 to include opaque and transparent blocking regions 304 to filter the light received from pixel array 212 so that one or more pairs of images provided by pixel array 212 are each received by users 222 as a corresponding as three-dimensional image.
- control signal 220 may select parallel strips of blocking regions 304 of blocking region array 302 to be transparent to form slits that enable three-dimensional images to be received by users 222 .
- control signal 220 may be generated by blocking array controller 208 to configure one or more characteristics of blocking region array 214 .
- control signal 220 may be generated to form any number of parallel strips of blocking regions 304 of blocking region array 302 to be transparent, to modify the number and/or spacing of parallel strips of blocking regions 304 of blocking region array 302 that are transparent, to select and/or modify a width and/or a length (in blocking regions 304 ) of one or more strips of blocking regions 304 of blocking region array 302 that are transparent or opaque, to select and/or modify an orientation of one or more strips of blocking regions 304 of blocking region array 302 that are transparent, to select one or more areas of blocking region array 302 to include all transparent or all opaque blocking regions 304 , etc.
- FIG. 6 depicts a flowchart 600 of a method for generating two-dimensional and/or three-dimensional images in accordance with an example embodiment.
- the method of flowchart 600 may be performed by system 200 in FIG. 2 , for example.
- the method of flowchart 600 will be described with respect to FIG. 7 , which shows a cross-sectional view of a display system 700 .
- Display system 700 is an example embodiment of system 200 shown in FIG. 2 .
- system 700 includes a pixel array 702 and a blocking region array 704 . Further structural and operational embodiments will be apparent to persons skilled in the relevant art(s) based on the discussion regarding flowchart 600 .
- the method of flowchart 600 is described as follows.
- step 602 light is received at a parallax barrier.
- display-generated light 112 is received at parallax barrier 106 from pixel array 212 of display panel 104 .
- Each pixel of pixel array 212 may emit light that is received at parallax barrier 106 .
- parallax barrier 106 may filter display-generated light 112 from pixel array 212 to generate a two-dimensional image or a three-dimensional image viewable in viewing space 108 by users 222 .
- parallax barrier 106 may filter display-generated light 112 from pixel array 212 differently in different areas of parallax barrier 106 to simultaneously generate two-dimensional images and/or three-dimensional images corresponding to the different areas.
- each blocking region in a plurality of parallel strips of blocking regions of the blocking region array is selected to be transparent to form a plurality of parallel transparent slits, the spacing of transparent slits in the plurality of parallel transparent slits being selectable.
- blocking region array 704 includes a plurality of blocking regions that are each either transparent or opaque. Blocking regions that are opaque are indicated as blocking regions 710 a - 710 f , and blocking regions that are transparent are indicated as blocking regions 712 a - 712 e . Further blocking regions may be included in blocking region array 704 that are not visible in FIG. 7 .
- Each of blocking regions 710 a - 710 f and 712 a - 712 e may include one or more blocking regions.
- Blocking regions 710 alternate with blocking regions 712 in series in the order of blocking regions 710 a , 712 a , 710 b , 712 b , 710 c , 712 c , 710 d , 712 d , 710 e , 712 e , and 710 f .
- opaque blocking regions 710 are alternated with transparent blocking regions 712 to form a plurality of parallel transparent slits in blocking region array 704 .
- FIG. 8A shows a view of parallax barrier 300 of FIG. 3 with transparent slits, according to an example embodiment.
- parallax barrier 300 includes blocking region array 302 , which includes a plurality of blocking regions 304 arranged in a two-dimensional array.
- blocking region array 302 includes a plurality of parallel strips of blocking regions 304 that are selected to be transparent to form a plurality of parallel transparent strips (or “slits”) 802 a - 802 g .
- slits parallel transparent strips
- parallel transparent strips 802 a - 802 g are alternated with parallel opaque strips 804 a - 804 g of blocking regions 304 that are selected to be opaque.
- transparent strips 802 a - 802 g and opaque strips 804 a - 804 g each have a width (along the x-dimension) of two blocking regions 304 , and have lengths that extend along the entire y-dimension (twenty blocking regions 304 ) of blocking region array 304 , although in other embodiments, may have alternative dimensions.
- the spacing (and number) of parallel transparent strips 802 in blocking region array 704 may be selectable by choosing any number and combination of particular strips of blocking regions 304 in blocking region array 302 to be transparent, to be alternated with opaque strips 804 , as desired.
- FIG. 8B shows a parallax barrier 310 that is another example of blocking region array 704 with parallel transparent slits, according to an embodiment.
- parallax barrier 310 has includes a blocking region array 312 , which includes a plurality of blocking regions 314 arranged in a two-dimensional array (28 by 1 array).
- Blocking regions 314 have widths (along the x-dimension) similar to the widths of blocking regions 304 in FIG. 8A , but have lengths that extend along the entire vertical length (y-dimension) of blocking region array 312 . As shown in FIG.
- blocking region array 312 includes parallel transparent strips 802 a - 802 g alternated with parallel opaque strips 804 a - 804 g .
- parallel transparent strips 802 a - 802 g and parallel opaque strips 804 a - 804 g each have a width (along the x-dimension) of two blocking regions 314 , and have lengths that extend along the entire y-dimension (one blocking region 314 ) of blocking region array 312 .
- parallax barrier 106 may filter display-generated light 112 from pixel array 212 to generate one or more two-dimensional images and/or three-dimensional images viewable in viewing space 108 by users 222 .
- pixel array 702 includes a plurality of pixels 714 a - 714 d and 716 a - 716 d .
- Pixels 714 alternate with pixels 716 , such that pixels 714 a - 714 d and 716 a - 716 d are arranged in series in the order of pixels 714 a , 716 a , 714 b , 716 b , 714 c , 716 c , 714 d , and 716 d .
- Further pixels may be included in pixel array 702 that are not visible in FIG.
- pixels 714 a - 714 d and 716 a - 716 d passes light from backlight panel 102 , and this light emanates from display surface 724 of pixel array 702 (e.g., generally upward in FIG. 7 ) towards blocking region array 704 .
- Some example indications of light emanating from pixels 714 a - 714 d and 716 a - 716 d are shown in FIG.
- Light emanating from pixel array 702 is filtered by blocking region array 704 to form a plurality of images in a viewing space 726 , including a first image 706 a at a first location 708 a and a second image 706 b at a second location 708 b .
- a portion of the light emanating from pixel array 702 is blocked by opaque blocking regions 710 , while another portion of the light emanating from pixel array 702 passes through transparent blocking regions 712 , according to the filtering by blocking region array 704 .
- light 724 a from pixel 714 a is blocked by opaque blocking region 710 a
- light 724 b and light 724 c from pixel 714 b are blocked by opaque blocking regions 710 b and 710 c , respectively.
- light 718 a from pixel 714 a is passed by transparent blocking region 712 a
- light 718 b from pixel 714 b is passed by transparent blocking region 712 b.
- system 700 shown in FIG. 7 is configured to form first and second images 706 a and 706 b at locations 708 a and 708 b , respectively, which are positioned at a distance 728 from pixel array 702 (as shown in FIG. 7 , further instances of first and second images 706 a and 706 b may be formed in viewing space 726 according to system 700 , in a repeating, alternating fashion).
- pixel array 702 includes a first set of pixels 714 a - 714 d and a second set of pixels 716 a - 716 d .
- Pixels 714 a - 714 d correspond to first image 706 a and pixels 716 a - 716 d correspond to second image 706 b . Due to the spacing of pixels 714 a - 714 d and 716 a - 716 d in pixel array 702 , and the geometry of transparent blocking regions 712 in blocking region array 704 , first and second images 706 a and 706 b are formed at locations 708 a and 708 b , respectively. As shown in FIG. 7 , light 718 a - 718 d from the first set of pixels 714 a - 714 d is focused at location 708 a to form first image 706 a at location 708 a . Light 720 a - 720 d from the second set of pixels 716 a - 716 d is focused at location 708 b to form second image 706 b at location 708 b.
- FIG. 7 shows a slit spacing 722 (center-to-center) of transparent blocking regions 712 in blocking region array 704 .
- Spacing 722 may be determined to select locations for parallel transparent slits to be formed in blocking region array 704 for a particular image distance 728 at which images are desired to be formed (for viewing by users). For example, in an embodiment, if a spacing of pixels 714 a - 714 d corresponding to an image is known, and a distance 728 at which the image is desired to be displayed is known, the spacing 722 between adjacent parallel transparent slits in blocking region array 704 may be selected.
- blocking array controller 208 may include a slit spacing calculator 902 . Slit spacing calculator 902 is configured to calculate spacing 722 for a particular spacing of pixels and a desired distance for the corresponding image to be formed.
- display system 700 may be configured to generate three-dimensional images for viewing by users in a viewing space.
- first and second images 706 a and 706 b may be configured to be perceived by a user as a three-dimensional image.
- step 606 of flowchart 6 may include a step 1002 shown in FIG. 10 .
- step 1002 light from the array of pixels is filtered to form a first image corresponding to a first set of pixels at a right eye location and to form a second image corresponding to a second set of pixels at a left eye location.
- FIG. 11 shows display system 700 of FIG.
- First and second images 706 a and 706 b may be generated by first set of pixels 714 a - 714 d and second set of pixels 716 a - 716 d such that they represent slightly different perspectives of the same subject matter. Images 706 a and 706 b are combined in the visual center of the brain of user 1104 to be perceived as a three-dimensional image.
- first and second images 706 a and 706 b may be formed by display system 700 such that their centers are spaced apart a width of a user's pupils (e.g., an “interocular distance” 1106 ).
- the spacing of first and second images 706 a and 706 b may be approximately 65 mm (or other suitable spacing) to generally be equivalent to interocular distance 1106 .
- multiple instances of first and second images 706 a and 706 b may be formed by display system 700 that repeat in a viewing space.
- first and second images 706 a and 706 b shown in FIG. 11 coinciding with the left and right eyes of user 1104 may be separated by one or more instances of first and second images 706 a and 706 b of the repeating instances that happen to be separated by interocular distance 1106 .
- parallax barrier 300 of FIG. 3 Details regarding a manner by which various characteristics of a parallax barrier, such as parallax barrier 300 of FIG. 3 , can be modified to achieve desired display characteristics are set forth in commonly-owned co-pending U.S. patent application Ser. No. 12/845,440, the entirety of which is incorporated by reference herein. These modifications may include, for example, modifying at least one of a distance between adjacent transparent slits, the width of one or more of the transparent slits, the width of one or more opaque strips, and the orientation of the transparent slits and opaque strips.
- parallax barrier 300 enable the adaptively accommodation of, for example, a changing viewer location (also referred to as a “sweet spot”), switching between two-dimensional images, three-dimensional images and multi-view three-dimensional content, and the simultaneous display of two-dimensional images, three-dimensional images, and multi-view three-dimensional content.
- a changing viewer location also referred to as a “sweet spot”
- switching between two-dimensional images, three-dimensional images and multi-view three-dimensional content switching between two-dimensional images, three-dimensional images and multi-view three-dimensional content, and the simultaneous display of two-dimensional images, three-dimensional images, and multi-view three-dimensional content.
- a blocking region array may be configured to enable multiple two-dimensional images and/or three-dimensional images to be displayed simultaneously.
- the blocking region array may include one or more transparent sections to generate one or more two-dimensional images and one or more sections that include parallel transparent slits to generate one or more three-dimensional images.
- FIG. 12 shows a flowchart 1200 that may be performed during step 604 of flowchart 600 ( FIG. 6 ) to enable the simultaneous display of two-dimensional and three-dimensional images, according to an example embodiment.
- Flowchart 1200 is described as follows with respect to FIG. 13 .
- FIG. 13 shows a display system 1300 configured to generate two-dimensional and three-dimensional images, according to an example embodiment.
- a first set of blocking regions of the blocking region array is configured to filter light from a first set of pixels to form a first image at a right eye location and to filter light from a second set of pixels to form a second image at a left eye location.
- system 1300 includes a pixel array 1302 and a blocking region array 1304 .
- System 1300 may also include display controller 202 of FIG. 2 , which is not shown in FIG. 13 for ease of illustration.
- Pixel array 1302 includes a first set of pixels 1314 a - 1314 d and a second set of pixels 1316 a - 1316 c .
- First set of pixels 1314 a - 1314 d and second set of pixels 1316 a - 1316 c are configured to generate images at left-eye and right-eye locations that combine to form a three-dimensional image in a similar fashion as described above (e.g., with respect to FIG. 7 ). Pixels of the two sets of pixels are alternated in pixel array 1302 in the order of pixel 1314 a , pixel 1316 a , pixel 1314 b , pixel 1316 b , etc. (further pixels may be included).
- Blocking region array 1304 includes a first portion 1318 and a second portion 1320 .
- First portion 1318 of blocking region array 1304 is positioned adjacent to first and second sets of pixels 1314 a - 1314 d and 1316 a - 1316 c .
- First portion 1318 includes blocking regions that are opaque indicated as blocking regions 1310 a - 1310 e , and blocking regions that are transparent indicated as blocking regions 1312 a - 1312 d .
- Opaque blocking regions 1310 are alternated with transparent blocking regions 1312 to form a plurality of parallel transparent slits in blocking region array 1304 , similarly to blocking region array 304 shown in FIG. 8 .
- Light emanating from pixel array 1302 is filtered by portion 1318 of blocking region array 1304 to form first and second images 1306 a and 1306 b , respectively, in a viewing space as described above.
- a second set of blocking regions of the blocking region array is selected to be transparent to pass light from a third set of pixels to form a third image.
- pixel array 1302 further includes a third set of pixels 1308 a and 1308 b (further pixels may be included in the third set of pixels).
- Second portion 1320 of blocking region array 1304 is positioned adjacent to third set of pixels 1308 a - 1308 b .
- Second portion 1320 includes blocking regions that are transparent, indicated as blocking regions 1312 e . No opaque blocking regions are included in second portion 1320 .
- Third image 1306 c is a two-dimensional image, and may be received at multiple locations of the viewing space.
- FIG. 13 a three-dimensional image (based on the combination of first and second images 1306 a and 1306 b ) and a two-dimensional image are simultaneously generated by display system 1300 .
- a single three-dimensional image and a single two-dimensional image are simultaneously generated by display system 1300
- any number of two-dimensional and three-dimensional images may be simultaneously generated by a display system, in embodiments.
- the three-dimensional and two-dimensional images may have any size.
- FIGS. 14 and 15 show views of blocking region array 302 of FIG. 3 configured to enable the simultaneous display of two-dimensional and three-dimensional images of various sizes, according to example embodiments.
- FIG. 14 and 15 show views of blocking region array 302 of FIG. 3 configured to enable the simultaneous display of two-dimensional and three-dimensional images of various sizes, according to example embodiments.
- a first portion 1402 of blocking region array 302 is configured similarly to blocking region array 300 of FIG. 8 , including a plurality of parallel transparent strips alternated with parallel opaque strips that together fill first portion 1402 .
- a second portion 1404 of blocking region array 302 is surrounded by first portion 1402 .
- Second portion 1404 is a rectangular shaped portion of blocking region array 302 that includes a two-dimensional array of blocking regions 304 that are transparent.
- blocking region array 302 is configured to enable a three-dimensional image to be generated by pixels of a pixel array that are adjacent to blocking regions of first portion 1402 , and to enable a two-dimensional image to be generated by pixels of the pixel array that are adjacent to blocking regions inside of second portion 1404 .
- blocking region array 302 includes a first portion 1502 and a second portion 1504 .
- First portion 1502 includes a two-dimensional array of blocking regions 304 that are transparent.
- Second portion 1504 is rectangular shaped, and is contained within first portion 1502 .
- Second portion 1504 includes a plurality of parallel transparent strips alternated with parallel opaque strips that together fill second portion 1504 of blocking region array 302 .
- blocking region array 302 is configured to enable a two-dimensional image to be generated by pixels of a pixel array that are adjacent to blocking regions of first portion 1502 , and to enable a three-dimensional image to be generated by pixels of the pixel array that are adjacent to blocking regions inside of second portion 1504 .
- second portions 1404 and 1504 are shown for illustrative purposes in FIGS. 14 and 15 as being rectangular areas, second portions 1404 and 1504 may have other shapes, including circular, triangular or other polygon, irregular, or any other shape.
- flowchart 1200 (and FIGS. 13-15 ) relate to a two-dimensional image and a three-dimensional image being provided by a display system simultaneously
- two or more two-dimensional images or two or more three-dimensional images may be provided by a display system simultaneously.
- step 1202 of flowchart 1200 may be repeated to form fourth and fifth images corresponding to another three-dimensional image.
- step 1204 may be repeated to form a sixth image corresponding to another two-dimensional image. Any number of additional two-dimensional and/or three-dimensional images may be formed in this manner by corresponding regions of a display.
- display system 116 is capable of simultaneously displaying two-dimensional and three-dimensional images in different display regions by selectively modifying portions of blocking region array 214 that correspond to different areas of pixel array 212 .
- a viewer that is capable of viewing the simultaneously-displayed two-dimensional and three-dimensional images will perceive a different number of pixels per unit area in each display region depending upon the type of image that is being presented in each display region.
- the image passed by second portion 1504 of blocking region array 302 is a three-dimensional image.
- a viewer viewing the two-dimensional image passed by first portion 1502 of blocking region array 302 will perceive every pixel in the portion of pixel array 212 that is aligned with first portion 1502 of blocking region array 302 .
- each of the viewer's eyes will perceive only one half of the pixels in the portion of pixel array 212 that is aligned with second portion 1504 of blocking region array 302 .
- multi-view three-dimensional content refers to content in which multiple three-dimensional images are embedded, wherein the position of a viewer dictates which of the multiple three-dimensional images is currently perceived. Multi-view three-dimensional content will thus be formed from some multiple of the two two-dimensional images normally required to generate a single three-dimensional image (e.g., four two-dimensional images to provide two three-dimensional images, six two-dimensional images to provided three three-dimensional images, etc.).
- N-view three-dimensional content indicates that N three-dimensional images are embedded in the content, wherein each three-dimensional image is formed from two distinct two-dimensional images.
- 8-view three-dimensional content will comprise 8 different three-dimensional images formed from 16 different underlying two-dimensional images.
- second portion 1504 of blocking region array 302 passes 2-view three-dimensional content
- each of a the viewer's eyes will perceive only one-fourth of the pixels in the portion of pixel array 212 that is aligned with second portion 1504 of blocking region array 302 .
- one fourth of the pixels in the relevant portion of pixel array 212 will be perceived as a first two-dimensional image by one eye of the viewer and another fourth of the pixels will be perceived as a second two-dimensional image that is perceived by the other eye of the viewer.
- the remaining pixels will be dedicated to forming two additional two-dimensional images that are not perceived by the user.
- the brightness of each display region as perceived by a viewer will vary when backlighting of uniform luminosity is provided.
- backlight panel 102 a viewer perceiving a two-dimensional image in a first display region of display 116 and a three-dimensional image in a second display region of display 116 will perceive that the two-dimensional image is brighter than the three-dimensional image.
- This disparity in perceived brightness between display regions may lead to an unsatisfactory viewing experience for a viewer.
- the amount of light emitted by the individual light sources that make up backlight array 210 can be selectively controlled so that the brightness associated with each of a plurality of display regions of display system 116 can also be controlled.
- This enables display system 116 to provide a desired brightness level for each display region automatically and/or in response to user input.
- backlight array 210 can be controlled such that a uniform level of brightness is achieved across different simultaneously-displayed display regions, even though the number of perceptible pixels per unit area varies from display region to display region.
- backlight array 210 can be controlled such that the level of brightness associated with a particular display region is increased or reduced without impacting (or without substantially impacting) the brightness of other simultaneously-displayed display regions.
- FIG. 16 depicts a display system 1600 that implements a controllable backlight array as described immediately above.
- Display system 1600 comprises one implementation of display system 200 .
- display system 1600 includes a backlight panel 1610 , a display panel 1620 and parallax barrier 300 . These elements may be aligned with and positioned proximate to each other to create an integrated display unit.
- display panel 1620 includes a pixel array 1622 .
- Each of the pixels in a first portion 1624 of pixel array 1622 is individually controlled by a pixel array controller (such as pixel array controller 206 of FIG. 2 ) to pass a selected amount of light produced by backlight panel 1610 , thereby producing display-generated light representative of a single two-dimensional image.
- Each of the pixels in a second portion 1626 of pixel array 1622 is individually controlled by the pixel array controller to pass a selected amount of light produced by backlight panel 1610 , thereby producing display-generated light representative of two two-dimensional images that, when combined by the brain of a viewer positioned in an appropriate location relative to display system 1600 , will be perceived as a single three-dimensional image.
- Parallax barrier 300 includes blocking region array 302 that includes a first portion 1502 and a second portion 1504 as discussed above in reference to FIG. 15 .
- Blocking region array 302 is aligned with pixel array 1622 such that first portion 1502 of blocking region array 302 overlays first portion 1624 of pixel array 1622 and second portion 1504 of blocking region array 302 overlays second portion 1626 of pixel array 1622 .
- a blocking array controller (such as blocking array controller 208 of FIG. 2 ) causes all the blocking regions within first portion 1502 of blocking region array 302 to be transparent.
- the blocking array controller manipulates the blocking regions within second portion 1504 of blocking region array 302 to form a plurality of parallel transparent strips alternated with parallel opaque strips, thereby creating a parallax effect that enables the two two-dimensional images generated by the pixels of second portion 1626 of pixel array 1622 to be perceived as a three-dimensional image by a viewer in the viewing space in front of display system 1600 .
- backlight panel 1610 includes a backlight array 1612 comprising an arrangement of individually addressable and controllable light sources. As shown in FIG. 16 , the light sources are arranged in a rectangular grid although other arrangements can be used.
- a backlight array controller (such as backlight array controller 204 of FIG. 2 ) causes the light sources included in a first portion 1614 of backlight array 1612 to emit a first amount of light and cause the light sources included in a second portion 1616 of backlight array 1612 to emit a second amount of light, wherein the second amount of light is different (e.g., greater) than the first amount of light.
- Backlight array 1612 is aligned with pixel array 1622 such that first portion 1624 of pixel array 1622 overlays first portion of 1614 of backlight array 1612 and second portion 1626 of pixel array 1622 overlays second portion 1616 of backlight array 1612 .
- the luminosity of portion 1616 of backlight array 1612 can be increased relative to the luminosity of portion 1614 of backlight array 1612 so that the three-dimensional image will appear as bright as the two-dimensional image.
- a display system in accordance with an embodiment can dynamically manipulate pixel array 1622 and blocking region array 302 in a coordinated fashion to dynamically and simultaneously create any number of display regions of different sizes and in different locations, wherein each of the created display regions can display one of two-dimensional, three-dimensional or multi-view three-dimensional content.
- backlight array 1612 can also be dynamically manipulated in a coordinated fashion with pixel array 1622 and blocking region array 302 to ensure that each display region is perceived at a desired level of brightness.
- FIG. 17 depicts a configuration of display system 1600 in which pixel array 1622 and blocking region array 302 have been modified to create different display regions than those created by the configuration shown in FIG. 16 .
- a first portion 1722 of pixel array 1622 and a first portion 1732 of blocking region array 302 have been manipulated to create a first display region that displays multi-view three-dimensional content
- a second portion 1724 of pixel array 1622 and a second portion 1734 of blocking region array 302 have been manipulated to create a second display region that displays a three-dimensional image
- a third portion of 1726 of pixel array 1622 and a third portion 1736 of blocking region array 302 have been manipulated to create a third display region that displays a two-dimensional image.
- the amount of light emitted by light sources included within a first portion 1712 , a second portion 1714 and a third portion 1716 of backlight array 1612 can respectively be controlled.
- the light sources within first portion 1712 may be controlled to provide greater luminosity than the light sources within second portion 1714 and third portion 1716 as the number of perceivable pixels per unit area will be smallest in the first display region with which first portion 1712 is aligned.
- the light sources within second portion 1714 may be controlled to provide greater luminosity than the light sources within third portion 1716 since the number of perceivable pixels per unit area will be smaller in the second display region with which second portion 1714 is aligned than the third display region with which third portion 1716 is aligned.
- the light sources within second portion 1714 may be controlled to provide greater luminosity than the light sources within third portion 1716 since the number of perceivable pixels per unit area will be smaller in the second display region with which second portion 1714 is aligned than the third display region with which third portion 1716 is aligned.
- other control schemes may be used.
- each light source in backlight array 1612 there is a one-to-one correspondence between each light source in backlight array 1612 and every display pixel in pixel array 1622 .
- the number of light sources provided in backlight array 1612 is less than the number of pixels provided in pixel array 1622 .
- a single light source may be provided in backlight array 1612 for every N pixels provided in pixel array 1622 , wherein N is an integer greater than 1.
- each light source in backlight array 1612 may be arranged so that it provides backlighting for a particular group of pixels in pixel array 1622 , although this is only an example. In alternate embodiments, the number of light sources provided in backlight array 1612 is greater than the number of pixels provided in pixel array 1622 .
- light sources in backlight array 1612 are described as being individually controllable. However, in alternate embodiments, light sources in backlight array 1612 may only be controllable in groups. This may facilitate a reduction in the complexity of the control infrastructure associated with backlight array 210 . In still further embodiments, light sources in backlight array 1612 may be controllable both individually and in groups.
- FIGS. 16 and 17 show display system configurations in which a pixel array is disposed between a backlight array of individually addressable and controllable light sources and a blocking region array of an adaptable parallax barrier
- the blocking region array may be disposed between the pixel array and the backlight array (see, e.g., FIG. 1A ).
- selective control of the luminosity of groups or individual ones of the light sources in the backlight array may also be used to vary the backlighting luminosity associated with different display regions created by the interaction of the backlight array, the blocking region array and the pixel array.
- a method for operating a display system that utilizes a backlight panel such as that described above will now be described with reference to flowchart 1800 of FIG. 18 .
- the method of flowchart 1800 may be performed, for example, by display system 200 of FIG. 2 .
- the method is not limited to that embodiment and may be implemented by other display systems.
- the method of flowchart 1800 begins at step 1802 in which an amount of light emitted by each light source in an array of light sources included in a backlight panel is individually controlled.
- backlight array controller 204 may issue a control signal 216 (which may itself include one or more distinct control signals) to backlight array 210 included in backlight panel 102 to individually control an amount of light emitted by each light source in backlight array 210 .
- an amount of light originating from the backlight panel that is passed by each pixel in an array of pixels included in a display panel that is disposed proximate to the backlight panel is controlled.
- pixel array controller 206 may issue a control signal 218 (which may itself include one or more distinct control signals) to pixel array 212 included in display panel 104 to control the amount of light originating from backlight panel 102 that is passed by each pixel in pixel array 212 .
- an adaptable parallax barrier is operated in conjunction with the backlight panel and the display panel to selectively generate one or more two-dimensional or three-dimensional user-viewable images.
- this step may involve controlling the adaptable parallax barrier to filter the light passed by the pixels in the array of pixels to selectively generate one or more two-dimensional or three-dimensional images. For example, with reference to system 200 of FIG.
- blocking array controller 208 may issue a control signal 220 (which may itself include one or more distinct control signals) to blocking region array 214 of parallax barrier 106 to cause blocking region array 214 to filter the light passed by the pixels in pixel array 212 to selectively generate one or more two-dimensional or three-dimensional images. These images may be viewable by users 222 located in viewing space 108 .
- this step may involve controlling the adaptable parallax barrier to filter the light passed by the backlight panel to the pixels in the array of pixels to selectively generate one or more two-dimensional or three-dimensional images.
- FIG. 19 depicts a flowchart 1900 of a method that represents a particular implementation of flowchart 1800 of FIG. 18 .
- the method of flowchart 1900 may be performed by display system 200 of FIG. 2 , although the method may also be implemented by other display systems.
- the method of flowchart 1900 begins at step 1902 in which an adaptable parallax barrier is operated in conjunction with a backlight panel and a display panel to generate first user-viewable content in a first display region associated with a first subset of pixels in the array of pixels and to simultaneously generate second user-viewable content in a second display region associated with a second subset of pixels in the array of pixels.
- Step 1902 may represent, for example, one manner of performing step 1806 of flowchart 1800 .
- this step may be carried out, for example, when blocking array controller 208 issues a control signal 220 (which may itself include one or more distinct control signals) to blocking region array 214 of parallax barrier 106 to cause blocking region array 214 to filter the light passed by a first subset of pixels in pixel array 212 to generate first user-viewable content in a first display region and to simultaneously filter light passed by a second subset of pixels in pixel array 212 to generate second user-viewable content in a second display region. Examples of such display regions are shown, for example, in FIGS. 16 and 17 . For example, in FIG.
- first portion 1502 of blocking region array 302 filters first portion 1624 of pixel array 1622 (which is analogous to the first subset of pixels referred to above) to form a first display region that provides first user-viewable content in the form of a two-dimensional image.
- second portion 1504 of blocking region array 302 filters second portion 1626 of pixel array 1622 (which is analogous to the second subset of pixels referred to above) to form a second display region that provides second user-viewable content in the form of at least one three-dimensional image.
- Step 1904 a first subset of an array of light sources is controlled to define a first backlight region having first brightness characteristics, the first backlight region being aligned with the first display region.
- Step 1904 may represent, for example, a step performed as part of performing step 1802 of flowchart 1800 . With respect to example display system 200 of FIG. 2 , this step may be carried out when backlight array controller 204 issues a control signal 216 (which may itself include one or more distinct control signals) to backlight array 210 included in backlight panel 102 to control the amount of light emitted by each light source in a first subset of the light sources in backlight array 210 .
- a control signal 216 which may itself include one or more distinct control signals
- first portion 1614 of backlight array 1612 which is controlled to provide a desired level of brightness to a first display region with which it is aligned, wherein the first display region is formed through the interaction of first portion 1624 of pixel array 1622 and first portion 1502 of blocking region array 302 .
- Step 1906 a second subset of the array of light sources is controlled to define a second backlight region having second brightness characteristics, the second backlight region being aligned with the second display region.
- Step 1906 may represent, for example, another step performed as part of performing step 1802 of flowchart 1800 . With respect to example display system 200 of FIG. 2 , this step may be carried out when backlight array controller 204 issues a control signal 216 (which may itself include one or more distinct control signals) to backlight array 210 included in backlight panel 102 to control the amount of light emitted by each light source in a second subset of the light sources in backlight array 210 .
- a control signal 216 which may itself include one or more distinct control signals
- second portion 1616 of backlight array 1612 which is controlled to provide a desired level of brightness to a second display region with which it is aligned, wherein the second display region is formed through the interaction of second portion 1626 of pixel array 1622 and second portion 1504 of blocking region array 302 .
- first and second backlight regions having different brightness characteristics
- embodiments described herein are capable of defining any number of backlight regions having different brightness characteristics as needed to support any number of display regions.
- the first user-viewable content referenced in the foregoing method comprises a two-dimensional image and the second user-viewable content comprises a three-dimensional image. Since the number of viewable pixels per unit area will be less for a three-dimensional image than for a two-dimensional image, the foregoing method can advantageously be used to increase the backlighting in a region behind the pixels that are used to form the three-dimensional image relative to the backlighting in a region behind the pixels that are used to form the two-dimensional image, thereby reducing a perceived disparity in brightness between the two images.
- the first user-viewable content referenced in the foregoing method comprises a three-dimensional image and the second user-viewable content comprises multi-view three-dimensional content. Since the number of viewable pixels per unit area will be less for multi-view three-dimensional content than for a single three-dimensional image, the foregoing method can advantageously be used to increase the backlighting in a region behind the pixels that are used to form the multi-view three-dimensional content relative to the backlighting in a region behind the pixels that are used to form the three-dimensional image, thereby reducing a perceived disparity in brightness between the multi-view three-dimensional content and the three-dimensional image.
- the regional backlighting capability described above can also advantageously be used to independently control the perceived brightness of the first user-viewable content and the second user-viewable content. Such independent control may be performed automatically in accordance with a predefined brightness control scheme and/or in response to user input received by the display system. It is further noted that the regional backlighting capability described above can advantageously be used in display system configurations in accordance with that shown in FIG. 1A (display panel disposed between backlighting panel and adaptable parallax barrier) and also in display system configurations in accordance with that shown in FIG. 1B (adaptable parallax barrier disposed between backlighting panel and display panel).
- FIG. 20 A block diagram of such a display system, denoted display system 2000 , is shown in FIG. 20 .
- Display system 2000 of FIG. 20 is another example implementation of system 100 shown in FIG. 1 .
- display system 2000 includes a display controller 2002 and display device 116 (which includes backlight panel 102 , display panel 104 and parallax barrier 106 ).
- display panel 104 includes a pixel array 2010 and parallax barrier 106 includes a blocking region array 2012 .
- display controller 2002 includes a backlight controller 2004 , a pixel array controller 2006 , and a blocking array controller 2008 .
- backlight panel 102 in system 2000 does not include a backlight array of independently-controllable light sources. Rather, backlight panel 102 in system 2000 is intended to represent a conventional backlight panel that is designed to produce a sheet of light of uniform luminosity for illuminating pixels in pixel array 2010 .
- backlight panel 102 comprises one or more light source(s), the brightness of which may only be controlled in unison by backlight controller 2004 through the transmission of a control signal 2014 (which may itself comprise one or more distinct control signals).
- backlight controller 2004 may cause the light source(s) included in backlight panel 102 to be turned on or off in unison or may cause the light emitted by each light source(s) included in backlight panel 102 to be increased or reduced in unison.
- Pixel array 2010 is analogous to pixel array 212 described above in detail in reference to system 200 of FIG. 2 . As such, each pixel in pixel array 2010 is individually addressable and controllable to select an amount of light originating from backlight panel 102 that will be passed thereby, thus allowing the intensity of each pixel to be varied.
- Parallax barrier 106 is positioned proximate to a surface of pixel array 2010 .
- Blocking region array 2012 is a layer of parallax barrier 106 that includes a plurality of blocking regions arranged in an array and is analogous to blocking region array 214 as described above in reference to system 200 of FIG. 2 .
- each blocking region of blocking region array 2012 is configured to be selectively opaque or transparent.
- Display controller 2002 is configured to generate control signals to enable display device 116 to display two-dimensional and three-dimensional images to users 2020 in viewing space 108 .
- pixel array controller 2006 (which is analogous to pixel array controller 206 described above in reference to system 200 of FIG. 2 ) is configured to generate a control signal 2016 that is received by pixel array 2010 .
- Control signal 2016 may include one or more control signals used to cause pixels of pixel array 2010 to emit display-generated light 112 of particular desired colors and/or intensity.
- Blocking array controller 2008 (which is analogous to blocking array controller 208 described above in reference to system 200 of FIG. 2 ) is configured to generate a control signal 2018 that is received by blocking region array 2012 .
- Control signal 2018 may include one or more control signals used to cause each of the blocking regions of blocking region array 2012 to be transparent or opaque.
- blocking region array 2012 filters display-generated light 112 to generate filtered light 114 that includes one or more two-dimensional and/or three-dimensional images that may be viewed by users 2020 in viewing space 108 .
- system 2000 may be utilized to simultaneously display two-dimensional and three-dimensional images in different display regions by selectively modifying portions of blocking region array 2012 that correspond to different areas of pixel array 2010 .
- a viewer that is capable of simultaneously viewing a two-dimensional image in a first display region and a three-dimensional image in a second display region will perceive a different number of pixels per unit area in each display region. This will result in each display region having a different perceived brightness when backlighting of uniform luminosity is provided by backlight panel 102 , which may lead to an unsatisfactory viewing experience for a viewer.
- the amount of light passed by the individual pixels that make up pixel array 2010 can be selectively controlled so that the brightness associated with each of a plurality of display regions of display system 116 can also be controlled.
- This enables display system 116 to provide a desired brightness level for each display region automatically and/or in response to user input.
- the intensity of the pixels in pixel array 2010 can be controlled such that a uniform level of brightness is achieved across different simultaneously-displayed display regions, even though the number of perceptible pixels per unit area varies from display region to display region.
- the intensity of the pixels in pixel array 2010 can be controlled such that the level of brightness associated with a particular display region is increased or reduced without impacting (or without substantially impacting) the brightness of other simultaneously-displayed display regions.
- FIG. 21 depicts a display system 2100 that implements a regional brightness control scheme based on pixel intensity as described immediately above.
- Display system 2100 comprises one implementation of display system 2000 .
- display system 2100 includes a display panel 2102 and a parallax barrier 2112 .
- Display panel 2102 is one example of display panel 104 of FIG. 20 while parallax barrier 2112 is one example of parallax barrier 106 of FIG. 20 .
- Display system 2100 also includes a backlight panel, although this element is not shown in FIG. 21 for ease of illustration. These elements may be aligned with and positioned proximate to each other to create an integrated display unit.
- display panel 2102 includes a pixel array 2104 .
- Each of the pixels in a first portion 2106 of pixel array 2104 is individually controlled by a pixel array controller (such as pixel array controller 2006 of FIG. 20 ) to pass a selected amount of light produced by a backlight panel (not shown in FIG. 20 ), thereby producing display-generated light representative of a single two-dimensional image.
- a pixel array controller such as pixel array controller 2006 of FIG. 20
- Each of the pixels in a second portion 2108 of pixel array 2104 is individually controlled by the pixel array controller to pass a selected amount of light produced by the backlight panel, thereby producing display-generated light representative of two two-dimensional images that, when combined by the brain of a viewer positioned in an appropriate location relative to display system 2100 , will be perceived as a single three-dimensional image.
- Parallax barrier 2112 includes blocking region array 2114 that includes a first portion 2116 and a second portion 2118 .
- Blocking region array 2114 is aligned with pixel array 2104 such that first portion 2116 of blocking region array 2114 overlays first portion 2106 of pixel array 2104 and second portion 2118 of blocking region array 2112 overlays second portion 2108 of pixel array 2104 .
- a blocking array controller (such as blocking array controller 2008 of FIG. 20 ) causes all the blocking regions within first portion 2116 of blocking region array 2114 to be transparent.
- the two-dimensional image generated by the pixels of first portion 2106 of pixel array 2104 will simply be passed through to a viewer in a viewing space in front of display system 2100 (such as viewing space 108 in FIG. 20 ).
- the blocking array controller manipulates the blocking regions within second portion 2118 of blocking region array 2114 to form a plurality of parallel transparent strips alternated with parallel opaque strips, thereby creating a parallax effect that enables the two two-dimensional images generated by the pixels of second portion 2108 of pixel array 2104 to be perceived as a three-dimensional image by a viewer in the viewing space in front of display system 2100 .
- the pixel array controller may selectively cause the pixels included in first portion 2106 of pixel array 2104 to pass less light from the backlight panel (i.e., become less intense), thereby reducing the brightness of the two-dimensional image produced from the pixels in first portion 2106 of pixel array 2104 .
- the pixel array controller may selectively cause the pixels included in second portion 2108 of pixel array 2104 to pass more light from the backlight panel (i.e., become more intense), thereby increasing the brightness of the three-dimensional image produced from the pixels in second portion 2108 of pixel array 2104 .
- the intensity of the pixels in portions 2106 and 2108 of pixel array 2104 By controlling the intensity of the pixels in portions 2106 and 2108 of pixel array 2104 in this manner, the brightness of the two-dimensional image produced from the pixels in first portion 2106 of pixel array 2104 and the brightness of the three-dimensional image produced from the pixels in second portion 2108 of pixel array 2104 can be kept consistent. Additionally, by providing independent control over the intensity of the pixels in portions 2106 and 2108 of pixel array 2104 , independent control over the brightness of the two-dimensional and three-dimensional images generated therefrom can also be achieved.
- a display system in accordance with an embodiment can dynamically manipulate pixel array 2104 and blocking region array 2114 in a coordinated fashion to dynamically and simultaneously create any number of display regions of different sizes and in different locations, wherein each of the created display regions can display one of two-dimensional, three-dimensional or multi-view three-dimensional content.
- the intensity of the pixels in pixel array 2104 can also be dynamically manipulated in a coordinated fashion to ensure that each display region is perceived at a desired level of brightness.
- a method for operating a display system that utilizes a regional brightness control scheme based on pixel intensity such as that described above will now be described with reference to flowchart 2200 of FIG. 22 .
- the method of flowchart 2200 may be performed, for example, by display system 2000 of FIG. 20 .
- the method is not limited to that embodiment and may be implemented by other display systems.
- the method of flowchart 2000 begins at step 2202 in which an adaptable parallax barrier is operated in conjunction with an array of pixels in a display panel and a backlight panel to generate first user-viewable content in a first display region associated with a first subset of pixels in the array of pixels and to generate second user-viewable content in a second display region associated with a second subset of pixels in the array of pixels.
- step 2202 may involve controlling the adaptable parallax barrier to filter the light passed by the first subset of pixels in the array of pixels to generate the first user-viewable content in the first display region and to filter the light passed by the second subset of pixels in the array of pixels to generate the second user-viewable content in the second display region.
- the adaptable parallax barrier may involve controlling the adaptable parallax barrier to filter the light passed by the first subset of pixels in the array of pixels to generate the first user-viewable content in the first display region and to filter the light passed by the second subset of pixels in the array of pixels to generate the second user-viewable content in the second display region.
- this step may be carried out when blocking array controller 2008 issues a control signal 2018 (which may itself include one or more distinct control signals) to blocking region array 2012 of parallax barrier 106 to cause blocking region array 2012 to filter the light passed by a first subset of pixels in pixel array 2010 to generate first user-viewable content in a first display region and to filter the light passed by a second subset of pixels in pixel array 2010 to generate second user-viewable content in a second display region.
- the first subset of pixels may be first portion 2106 of pixel array 2104 and the first user-viewable content may be the two-dimensional image formed by those pixels. Also, with continued reference to the example of FIG.
- the second subset of pixels may be second portion 2108 of pixel array 2104 and the second user-viewable content may be the three-dimensional image formed by those pixels in conjunction with second portion 2118 of blocking region array 2114 .
- step 2202 may involve controlling the adaptable parallax barrier to filter the light passed by the backlight panel to the first subset of pixels in the array of pixels to generate the first user-viewable content in the first display region and to filter the light passed by the backlight panel to the second subset of pixels in the array of pixels to generate the second user-viewable content in the second display region.
- the amount of light passed by one or more pixels in the first subset of pixels is selectively increased or reduced to increase or reduce the brightness of the first display region.
- This step may be performed based on the type of content (e.g., two-dimensional content, three-dimensional content, multi-view three-dimensional content) being displayed by the first display region.
- this step may be carried out when pixel array controller 2006 issues a control signal 2016 (which may itself include one or more distinct control signals) to pixel array 2010 that causes the amount of light passed by one or more pixels in the first subset of pixels of pixel array 2010 to be increased or reduced.
- this step may involve increasing or reducing the amount of light passed by one or more pixels in first portion 2106 of pixel array 2104 .
- the amount of light passed by one or more pixels in the second subset of pixels is selectively increased or reduced to increase or reduce the brightness of the second display region.
- This step may be performed based on the type of content (e.g., two-dimensional content, three-dimensional content, multi-view three-dimensional content) being displayed by the second display region.
- this step may be carried out when pixel array controller 2006 issues a control signal 2006 (which may itself include one or more distinct control signals) to pixel array 2010 that causes the amount of light passed by one or more pixels in the second subset of pixels of pixel array 2010 to be increased or reduced.
- this step may involve increasing or reducing the amount of light passed by one or more pixels in second portion 2108 of pixel array 2104 .
- the method described above in reference to flowchart 2200 of FIG. 22 may advantageously be used to independently control the brightness of different display regions generated by a display system to simultaneously display corresponding two-dimensional images, three-dimensional images, and multi-view three-dimensional content.
- a display system may simultaneously display corresponding two-dimensional images, three-dimensional images, and multi-view three-dimensional content.
- the first user-viewable content referenced in the foregoing method comprises a two-dimensional image and the second user-viewable content comprises a three-dimensional image. Since the number of viewable pixels per unit area will be less for a three-dimensional image than for a two-dimensional image, the foregoing method can advantageously be used to increase the intensity of the pixels that are used to form the three-dimensional image and/or reduce the intensity of the pixels that are used to form the two-dimensional image, thereby reducing a perceived disparity in brightness between the two images.
- the first user-viewable content referenced in the foregoing method comprises a three-dimensional image and the second user-viewable content comprises multi-view three-dimensional content. Since the number of viewable pixels per unit area will be less for multi-view three-dimensional content than for a single three-dimensional image, the foregoing method can advantageously be used to increase the intensity of the pixels that are used to form the multi-view three-dimensional content and/or reduce the intensity of the pixels that are used to form the three-dimensional image, thereby reducing a perceived disparity in brightness between the multi-view three-dimensional content and the three-dimensional image.
- the regional brightness control capability described above can also advantageously be used to independently control the perceived brightness of the first user-viewable content and the second user-viewable content. Such independent control may be performed automatically in accordance with a predefined brightness control scheme and/or in response to user input received by the display system.
- FIG. 23 illustrates a front perspective view of display panel 1620 , which was described above in reference to FIG. 16 .
- display panel 1620 includes a pixel array 1622 that includes a first portion 1624 and a second portion 1626 , wherein each of first portion 1624 and second portion 1626 includes a different subset of the pixels in pixel array 1622 .
- first portion 1624 and second portion 1626 includes a different subset of the pixels in pixel array 1622 .
- first portion 1624 of pixel array 1622 is illuminated by backlighting provided by an aligned first portion 1614 of backlight array 1612 , which is a component of backlight panel 1610 (not shown in FIG. 23 ).
- Second portion 1626 of pixel array 1622 is illuminated by backlighting provided by an aligned second portion 1616 of backlight array 1612 .
- the amount of light emitted by each light source in second portion 1616 of backlight array 1612 to illuminate second portion 1626 of pixel array 1622 is controlled such that it is greater than the amount of light emitted by each light source in first portion 1614 of backlight array 1612 to illuminate first portion 1624 of pixel array 1622 .
- This control scheme may be applied, for example, to cause images formed from the different portions of pixel array 1622 to appear to have a uniform brightness level.
- the difference in the amount of light emitted by each light source in first and second portions 1614 and 1616 of backlight array 1612 to illuminate corresponding first and second portions 1624 and 1626 of pixel array 1624 may also give rise to undesired visual artifacts.
- the difference may cause pixels in boundary areas immediately outside of second portion 1626 of pixel array 1622 to appear brighter than desired in relation to other pixels in first portion 1624 of pixel array 1622 .
- the pixels in boundary area 2302 immediately outside of second portion 1626 of pixel array 1622 may appear brighter than desired in relation to other pixels in first portion 1624 of pixel array 1622 .
- the difference may cause pixels in boundary areas immediately inside of second portion 1626 of pixel array 1622 to appear dimmer than desired in relation to other pixels in second portion 1626 of pixel array 1622 .
- the pixels in boundary area 2304 immediately inside of second portion 1626 of pixel array 1622 may appear dimmer than desired in relation to other pixels in second portion 1626 of pixel array 1622 .
- the reduced luminosity of the light sources in second portion 1616 of backlight array 1612 has “spilled over” to impact the pixels in boundary area 2304 , causing those pixels to be dimmer than desired.
- an embodiment may selectively control the amount of light passed by the pixels located in boundary region 2302 or boundary region 2304 to compensate for the undesired visual effects.
- pixel array controller 206 may selectively cause the pixels included in boundary area 2302 of pixel array 1622 to pass less light from the backlight panel (i.e., become less intense), thereby reducing the brightness of the pixels in boundary area 2302 , thus compensating for an undesired increase in brightness due to “spill over” from light sources in second portion 1616 of backlight array 1612 .
- pixel array controller 206 may selectively cause the pixels included in boundary area 2304 of pixel array 1622 to pass more light from the backlight panel (i.e., become more intense), thereby increasing the brightness of the pixels in boundary area 2304 , thus compensating for an undesired reduction in brightness due to “spill over” from light sources in first portion 1614 of backlight array 1612 .
- the intensity of the pixels in boundary areas 2302 and 2304 in this manner, the undesired visual effects described above that can arise from the use of a backlight array to provide regional brightness control can be mitigated or avoided entirely.
- FIG. 23 provides only one example of undesired visual effects that can arise from the use of a backlight array to provide regional brightness control.
- Persons skilled in the relevant art(s) will appreciate that many different display regions having many different brightness characteristics can be simultaneously generated by a display system in accordance with embodiments, thereby giving rise to different undesired visual effects relating to the brightness of boundary areas inside and outside of the different display regions. In each case, the intensity of pixels located in such boundaries areas can be selectively increased or reduced to mitigate or avoid such undesired visual effects.
- a method for implementing regional brightness control in a display system that combines the use of a backlight array of independently-controllable light sources with regional pixel intensity control such as that discussed above will now be described with reference to flowchart 2400 of FIG. 24 .
- the method of flowchart 2400 may be performed, for example, by display system 200 of FIG. 2 .
- the method is not limited to that embodiment and may be implemented by other display systems.
- the method of flowchart 2400 begins at step 2402 in which an adaptable parallax barrier is operated in conjunction with a display panel that includes an array of pixels and a backlight panel that includes an array of light sources to generate first user-viewable content in a first display region associated with a first pixel region in the array of pixels and to simultaneously generate second user-viewable content in a second display region associated with a second pixel region in the array of pixels to, the second pixel region being adjacent to the first pixel region.
- this step may involve controlling the adaptable parallax barrier to filter light passed by the first pixel region in the array of pixels to generate the first user-viewable content in the first display region and to simultaneously filter light passed by the second pixel region in the array of pixels to generate the second user-viewable content in the second display region, the second pixel region being adjacent to the first pixel region.
- Each of the first and second pixel regions may comprise a different subset of pixels in the array of pixels.
- this step may be carried out when blocking array controller 208 issues a control signal 220 (which may itself include one or more distinct control signals) to blocking region array 214 of parallax barrier 106 to cause blocking region array 214 to filter the light passed by a first pixel region in pixel array 212 to generate first user-viewable content in a first display region and to simultaneously filter light passed by a second pixel region in pixel array 212 that is adjacent to the first pixel region to generate second user-viewable content in a second display region. Examples of such display regions are shown, for example, in FIGS. 16 and 17 . For example, in FIG.
- first portion 1502 of blocking region array 302 filters first portion 1624 of pixel array 1622 (which is analogous to the first pixel region referred to above) to form a first display region that provides first user-viewable content in the form of a two-dimensional image.
- second portion 1504 of blocking region array 302 filters second portion 1626 of pixel array 1622 (which is adjacent to first portion 1624 of pixel array 1622 and is analogous to the second pixel region referred to above) to form a second display region that provides second user-viewable content in the form of at least one three-dimensional image.
- a first subset of an array of light sources is controlled to define a first backlight region having first brightness characteristics, the first backlight region being aligned with the first display region.
- this step may be carried out when backlight array controller 204 issues a control signal 216 (which may itself include one or more distinct control signals) to backlight array 210 included in backlight panel 102 to control the amount of light emitted by each light source in a first subset of the light sources in backlight array 210 .
- a control signal 216 which may itself include one or more distinct control signals
- first portion 1614 of backlight array 1612 which is controlled to provide a desired level of brightness to a first display region with which it is aligned, wherein the first display region is formed through the interaction of first portion 1624 of pixel array 1622 and first portion 1502 of blocking region array 302 .
- a second subset of the array of light sources is controlled to define a second backlight region having second brightness characteristics, the second backlight region being aligned with the second display region.
- this step may be carried out when backlight array controller 204 issues a control signal 216 (which may itself include one or more distinct control signals) to backlight array 210 included in backlight panel 102 to control the amount of light emitted by each light source in a second subset of the light sources in backlight array 210 .
- a control signal 216 which may itself include one or more distinct control signals
- second portion 1616 of backlight array 1612 which is controlled to provide a desired level of brightness to a second display region with which it is aligned, wherein the second display region is formed through the interaction of second portion 1626 of pixel array 1622 and second portion 1504 of blocking region array 302 .
- an amount of light passed by at least one pixel in a perimeter area of the first pixel region is selectively increased or reduced based on the brightness characteristics of one or both of the first backlight region and the second backlight region.
- this step may be carried out when pixel array controller 206 issues a control signal 218 (which may itself include one or more distinct control signals) to pixel array 212 that causes the amount of light passed by one or more pixels in a perimeter area of the first pixel region in pixel array 212 to be selectively increased or reduced based on the brightness characteristics of one or both of the first backlight region and the second backlight region.
- a control signal 218 which may itself include one or more distinct control signals
- this step may involve selectively increasing or reducing the amount of light passed by one or more pixels in boundary areas 2302 or 2304 to negate or reduce a “spill over” effect that results from a disparity in the amount of light emitted by first portion 1614 and second portion 1616 of backlight array 1612 .
- the amount by which the intensity of a pixel in a perimeter area is increased or reduced may be based upon a measure of disparity between the brightness of adjacent pixels, adjacent backlights, adjacent pixel regions and/or adjacent backlight regions.
- the amount by which the intensity of a pixel in a perimeter area is increased or reduced may be based on additional or alternative measures or factors.
- backlight panel 102 further comprises a grating structure that limits an amount of light dispersed by each of the light sources in backlight array 210 , thereby mitigating or avoiding the “spill over” problem described above.
- FIG. 25 illustrates a display system 2500 that includes such a grating structure.
- FIG. 25 is an exploded view of a display system 2500 that includes a backlight panel 2510 that comprises a backlight array 2512 of independently-controllable light sources 2514 and a grating structure 2520 .
- Grating structure 2520 is disposed in front of backlight array 2512 and aligned with backlight array 2512 in such a manner that individual openings 2522 in grating structure 2520 align with individual light sources 2514 in backlight array 2512 .
- Each opening 2522 acts to partially block the transmission of light from a corresponding light source so that the light will not illuminate pixels other than the pixel directly in front of the light source or so that the amount of light that reaches such other pixels is reduced.
- FIG. 26 is a partial view of grating structure 2520 that provides a larger view of an individual opening 2522 .
- grating structure 2520 shown in FIGS. 25 and 26 is shown to have square openings 2522 , persons skilled in the relevant art(s) will appreciate that openings having other shapes may be used to perform the function of partially block the light emitted by the light sources in backlight array 2512 .
- openings having other shapes may be used to perform the function of partially block the light emitted by the light sources in backlight array 2512 .
- circular openings, triangular openings, hexagonal openings, octagonal openings, or other shaped openings may be used.
- grating structure 2520 shown in FIGS. 25 and 26 is structured such that each opening is aligned with a single light source in backlight array 2512 , in other embodiments a single opening may be aligned with a plurality of light sources in light source array. In other words, an opening in the grating structure may be used to limit the amount of light dispersed by a group of light sources rather than a single light source.
- grating structure 2520 is disposed directly on top of backlight array 2512 . In alternate embodiments, grating structure 2520 is disposed in front of backlight array but not directly on top of backlight array 2512 .
- FIG. 27 is a block diagram of an example display system 2700 in accordance with such an embodiment.
- Display system 2700 includes a display device 2712 that is capable of simultaneously displaying two-dimensional images, three-dimensional images and multi-view three-dimensional content via different display regions.
- display device 2712 includes a display panel 2702 and a parallax barrier 2704 .
- Display panel 2702 emits display-generated light 2708 , which includes image information.
- Display-generated light 2708 is received by parallax barrier 2704 , which filters display-generated light 2708 to pass filtered light 2710 .
- parallax barrier 2704 may filter display-generated light 2708 with a plurality of barrier regions that are selectively opaque or transparent.
- Filtered light 2710 includes a plurality of images formed from the image information included in display-generated light 2708 .
- filtered light 2710 may include one or more two-dimensional images and/or one or more three-dimensional images.
- Filtered light 2710 is received in a viewing space 2706 proximate to display device 2712 .
- One or more users may be present in viewing space 2706 to view the two-dimensional and/or three-dimensional images included in filtered light 2710 .
- display panel 2702 includes an OLED/PLED pixel array 2714 .
- OLED/PLED pixel array 2714 comprises an array of OLEDs or PLEDs, each of which is individually addressable and controllable to selectively produce light of a desired color and intensity. Unlike the LCD pixels described above, OLED/PLED pixels provide their own illumination and thus require no backlight.
- Parallax barrier 2704 is positioned proximate to a surface of OLED/PLED pixel array 2714 and includes a blocking region array 2716 .
- Blocking region array 2716 is a layer of parallax barrier 2704 that includes a plurality of blocking regions arranged in an array and is analogous to blocking region array 214 as described above in reference to system 200 of FIG. 2 .
- each blocking region of blocking region array 2716 is configured to be selectively opaque or transparent.
- Display system 2700 also includes a display controller 2720 that includes a pixel array controller 2722 and a blocking array controller 2724 .
- Display controller 2720 is configured to generate control signals to enable display device 2712 to display two-dimensional and three-dimensional images to users 2726 in viewing space 2706 .
- pixel array controller 2722 is configured to generate a control signal 2730 that is received by OLED/PLED pixel array 2714 .
- Control signal 2730 may include one or more control signals used to cause pixels of OLED/PLED pixel array 2714 to emit display-generated light 2708 of particular desired colors and/or intensity.
- Blocking array controller 2724 (which is analogous to blocking array controller 208 described above in reference to system 200 of FIG.
- Control signal 2732 is configured to generate a control signal 2732 that is received by blocking region array 2716 .
- Control signal 2732 may include one or more control signals used to cause each of the blocking regions of blocking region array 2716 to be transparent or opaque.
- blocking region array 2716 filters display-generated light 2708 to generate filtered light 2710 that includes one or more two-dimensional and/or three-dimensional images that may be viewed by users 2726 in viewing space 2706 .
- system 2700 may be utilized to simultaneously display two-dimensional and three-dimensional images in different display regions by selectively modifying portions of blocking region array 2716 that correspond to different areas of OLED/PLED pixel array 2714 .
- a viewer that is capable of simultaneously viewing a two-dimensional image in a first display region and a three-dimensional image in a second display region will perceive a different number of pixels per unit area in each display region. This will result in each display region having a different perceived brightness when a uniform display-wide luminosity scheme is implemented by the pixels in OLED/PLED pixel array 2714 , which may lead to an unsatisfactory viewing experience for a viewer.
- the amount of light emitted by the individual OLED/PLED pixels that make up OLED/PLED pixel array 2714 can be selectively controlled so that the brightness associated with each of a plurality of display regions of display system 2712 can also be controlled.
- This enables display system 2712 to provide a desired brightness level for each display region automatically and/or in response to user input.
- OLED/PLED pixel array 2714 can be controlled such that a uniform level of brightness is achieved across different simultaneously-displayed display regions, even though the number of perceptible pixels per unit area varies from display region to display region.
- OLED/PLED pixel array 2714 can be controlled such that the level of brightness associated with a particular display region is increased or reduced without impacting (or without substantially impacting) the brightness of other simultaneously-displayed display regions.
- a method for operating a display system that implements a regional brightness control scheme by controlling the amount of light emitted by OLED/PLED pixels such as that described above will now be described with reference to flowchart 2800 of FIG. 28 .
- the method of flowchart 2800 may be performed, for example, by display system 2700 of FIG. 27 .
- the method is not limited to that embodiment and may be implemented by other display systems.
- the method of flowchart 2800 begins at step 2802 in which a first subset of LEDs in an array of LEDs in a display panel is controlled to define a first pixel region having first brightness characteristics.
- this step may be carried out when pixel array controller 2722 issues a control signal 2730 (which may itself include one or more distinct control signals) to OLED/PLED pixel array 2714 to cause a first subset of the pixels in OLED/PLED pixel array 2714 to produce display-generated light representative of one or more images at a first desired brightness level.
- a control signal 2730 which may itself include one or more distinct control signals
- a second subset of LEDs in the array of LEDs is controlled to define a second pixel region having second brightness characteristics.
- this step may be carried out when pixel array controller 2722 issues a control signal 2730 (which may itself include one or more distinct control signals) to OLED/PLED pixel array 2714 to cause a second subset of the pixels in OLED/PLED pixel array 2714 to produce display-generated light representative of one or more images at a second desired brightness level.
- an adaptable parallax barrier that is positioned proximate to the display panel is configured to filter light emitted by the first pixel region to form first user-viewable content and to simultaneously filter light emitted by the second pixel region to form second user-viewable content.
- this step may be carried out when blocking array controller 2724 issues a control signal 2732 to blocking region array 2716 of parallax barrier 2704 to cause blocking region array 2716 to filter the display-generated light passed by the first subset of pixels in OLED/PLED pixel array 2714 , thereby generating first user-viewable content and to simultaneously filter the display-generated light passed by the second subset of pixels in OLED/PLED pixel array 2714 , thereby generating second user-viewable content.
- the method described above in reference to flowchart 2800 of FIG. 28 may advantageously be used to independently control the brightness of different display regions generated by a display system to simultaneously display corresponding two-dimensional images, three-dimensional images, and multi-view three-dimensional content.
- a display system may simultaneously display corresponding two-dimensional images, three-dimensional images, and multi-view three-dimensional content.
- the first user-viewable content referenced in the foregoing method comprises a two-dimensional image and the second user-viewable content comprises a three-dimensional image. Since the number of viewable pixels per unit area will be less for a three-dimensional image than for a two-dimensional image, the foregoing method can advantageously be used to increase the intensity of the OLED/PLED pixels that are used to form the three-dimensional image and/or reduce the intensity of the OLED/PLED pixels that are used to form the two-dimensional image, thereby reducing a perceived disparity in brightness between the two images.
- the first user-viewable content referenced in the foregoing method comprises a three-dimensional image and the second user-viewable content comprises multi-view three-dimensional content. Since the number of viewable pixels per unit area will be less for multi-view three-dimensional content than for a single three-dimensional image, the foregoing method can advantageously be used to increase the intensity of the OLED/PLED pixels that are used to form the multi-view three-dimensional content and/or reduce the intensity of the OLED/PLED pixels that are used to form the three-dimensional image, thereby reducing a perceived disparity in brightness between the multi-view three-dimensional content and the three-dimensional image.
- the regional brightness control capability described above can also advantageously be used to independently control the perceived brightness of the first user-viewable content and the second user-viewable content. Such independent control may be performed automatically in accordance with a predefined brightness control scheme and/or in response to user input received by the display system.
- OLED/PLED pixel regions such as those described above are adjacent to each other, it is possible that the brightness characteristics of one pixel region can impact the perceived brightness of an adjacent pixel region having different brightness characteristics, creating an undesired visual effect.
- a first OLED/PLED pixel region having a relatively high level of brightness to support the viewing of multi-view three-dimensional content may be adjacent to a second OLED/PLED pixel region having a relatively low level of brightness to support the viewing of two-dimensional content.
- light from pixels in a perimeter area of the first OLED/PLED pixel region that are close to the boundary between the two pixel regions may “spill over” into a perimeter area of the second OLED/PLED pixel region.
- pixels in the perimeter area of the second OLED/PLED pixel region may appear brighter than desired in relation to other pixels in the second OLED/PLED pixel region.
- pixels in the perimeter area of the first OLED/PLED pixel array may appear dimmer than desired in relation to other pixels in the first OLED/PLED pixel region because of the adjacency to the second OLED/PLED pixel region.
- a regional brightness control scheme is implemented in a display system that includes an adaptable parallax barrier that also supports brightness regulation via an “overlay” approach that will be described herein.
- embodiments described herein attempt to match and support independent regional adjustment of backlighting output to produce a non-uniform output that compensates for regional differences in an adaptable screen assembly, wherein such screen assembly has inherent regional light blocking characteristics (i.e. various parallax barrier configurations). That is, embodiments described herein attempt to maintain standard brightness across various regional screen configurations, wherein each region has differing light blocking characteristics. Also, because of backlighting dispersion in zones running along the perimeter of regional boundaries, techniques to compensate or to minimize backlighting dispersion are applied in accordance with various embodiments described herein. For example, structures such as grating structure 2520 shown in FIGS. 25 and 26 may be applied to address this issue or pixel “lightening/darkening” techniques such as those described above may be used.
- FIG. 29 illustrates a display system 2900 in accordance with such an embodiment.
- Display system 2900 includes a display device 2904 and a display controller 2902 that can control the operation of display device 2904 so that it will simultaneously display two-dimensional images, three-dimensional images and multi-view three-dimensional content via different display regions.
- display device 2904 includes a display panel 2924 and an adaptable light manipulator 2922 .
- Display panel 2924 includes a pixel array 2932 that comprises a two-dimensional array of pixels, each of which is individually addressable and controllable to selectively produce light of a desired color and intensity.
- Such pixels may be, for example, LCD pixels that require backlighting or OLED/PLED pixels that provide their own illumination. Control over the state of the pixels in pixel array 2932 is provided by a pixel array controller 2914 within display controller 2902 .
- Adaptable light manipulator 2922 comprises a parallax barrier and a brightness regulation overlay.
- the parallax barrier may comprise a parallax barrier such as parallax barrier 106 described above in reference to FIG. 1 in which individual blocking regions in a blocking region array can be selectively rendered transparent or opaque in order to support a desired 2D, 3D, or regional 2D and/or 3D viewing experience.
- the brightness regulation overlay comprises an element that allows regional dimming through various tones of “grey” pixels.
- the parallax barrier and the brightness regulation overlay are implemented as a non-color (i.e., black, white and grayscale) LCD sandwich, although other implementations may be used.
- the combined adaptable parallax barrier and brightness regulation overlay provide full transparent or opaque states for each pixel, as well as a grayscale alternative that can be used to “balance out” brightness variations caused by the parallax barrier itself
- Control over the individual blocking regions of the parallax barrier and the individual grayscale pixels of the brightness regulation overlay is provided by parallax barrier control logic 2942 and overlay control logic 2944 included within display controller 2902 .
- These elements provide coordinated signaling to the pixels of the parallax barrier and the brightness regulation overlay (collectively referred to below as the manipulator pixels) to create opaque and transparent barrier elements associated with a particular parallax barrier configuration and a grayscale support there between to allow creation of overlays.
- display system 2900 can be implemented in configurations in which display panel 2924 is disposed between a backlight panel and adaptable light manipulator 2922 as well as in configurations in which adaptable light manipulator 2922 is disposed between a backlight panel and display panel 2924 . In either case, the desired display of 2D/3D regions and simultaneous backlight regulation can be achieved.
- pixel array 2932 of display panel 2924 comprises OLED or PLED pixels that are self-illuminating, no backlight panel is needed and adaptable light manipulator 2922 is disposed “in front of” display panel 2924 (i.e., between display panel 2924 and the users in a viewing space in front of display system 2900 ).
- FIG. 30 illustrates two exemplary configurations of adaptable light manipulator 2922 in accordance with an embodiment in which adaptable light manipulator 2922 is implemented as a light manipulating LCD sandwich with manipulator grayscale pixels.
- the grayscale pixels map to the display pixels on a one-to-one basis, but that need not be the case.
- a first exemplary configuration of adaptable light manipulator 2922 is shown above the section line denoted with reference numeral 3002 .
- a 3D region 3004 is created with fully transparent or fully opaque manipulator pixels that provide parallax barrier functionality and a 2D region 3006 is created having continuous medium gray manipulator pixels.
- the medium gray manipulator pixels operate to reduce the perceived brightness of 2D region 3006 to better match that of 3D region 3004 .
- 2D region 3006 could instead comprise a 3D region having a number of views that is different than 3D region 3004 , thus also requiring brightness regulation.
- a boundary region 3010 within 2D region 3006 may be “lightened” to a light gray to compensate for any diminution of light that might occur near the boundary with 3D region 3004 .
- the grayscale level of an inner portion 3008 of 2D region 3006 is maintained at the same medium gray level as in the portion of 2D region 3006 above section line 3002 .
- a first boundary region 3012 and a second boundary region 3014 within 3D region 3004 comprise darker and lighter gray transitional areas, respectively, to account for light dispersion from 2D region 3006 .
- an inner portion 3016 of 3D region 3004 includes only fully transparent or fully opaque manipulator pixels consistent with a parallax barrier configuration and no brightness regulation.
- the configuration of adaptable light manipulator 2922 is achieved by first creating a white through various grayscale areas that correspond to the regions and boundary areas to be formed. Once established, the manipulator pixels in these areas that comprise the opaque portions of the parallax barrier are overwritten to turn them black.
- this two-stage approach is conceptual only and no “overwriting” need be performed.
- adaptable light manipulator 2922 comprises the only component used in display system 2900 for performing brightness regulation and/or boundary region compensation.
- display system 2900 further utilizes any one or more of the following aforementioned techniques for performing brightness regulation and/or boundary region compensation: a backlighting array with independently-controllable light sources, a grating structure for use therewith, and/or a pixel array and associated control logic for selectively increasing or decreasing the intensity of display pixels (e.g., either LCD pixels or OLED/PLED pixels).
- adaptable light manipulator 2922 is implemented as an integrated parallax barrier and brightness regulation overlay.
- adaptable light manipulator 2922 is implemented using a parallax barrier panel and an independent brightness regulation overlay panel. In certain embodiments, whichever elements of display system 2900 are not used to help perform brightness regulation may be replaced with more conventional counterparts.
- a method for operating a display system that implements a regional brightness control scheme by using a brightness regulation overlay such as that described above will now be described with reference to flowchart 3100 of FIG. 31 .
- the method of flowchart 3100 may be performed, for example, by display system 2900 of FIG. 29 .
- the method is not limited to that embodiment and may be implemented by other display systems.
- the method of flowchart 3100 begins at step 3102 , in which a pixel array is controlled to simultaneously represent first image content via a first portion of the pixel array and second image content via a second portion of the pixel array.
- this step may be performed by controlling pixel array 2932 of display system 2900 to simultaneously represent first image content via a first portion of pixel array 2932 that is aligned with 2D region 3006 of adaptable light manipulator 2922 and to represent second image content via a second portion of pixel array 2932 that is aligned with 3D region 3004 of adaptable light manipulator 2922 .
- At step 3104 at least a portion of a plurality of manipulator pixels in an adaptable light manipulator are controlled to form a first parallax barrier arrangement that causes the first image content to be perceived in a first viewing mode in a first display region and to form a second parallax barrier arrangement that causes the second image content to be perceived in a second viewing mode in a second display region.
- this step may be performed by controlling the manipulator pixels of adaptable light manipulator 2922 to form the particular parallax barrier arrangement shown in 2D region 3006 (in this example, the first parallax barrier arrangement being the parallax barrier being turned off entirely although this need not be the case) and to form the parallax barrier arrangement shown in 3D region 3008 .
- parallax barrier arrangements for supporting 2D and 3D viewing may be formed.
- step 3106 at least a portion of the plurality of manipulator pixels in the adaptable light manipulator are controlled to be placed in a grayscale mode to regulate a perceived brightness of at least a portion of the first image content perceived in the first viewing mode in the first display region or at least a portion of the first image content perceived in the second viewing mode in the second display region.
- this step may be performed by controlling manipulator pixels of adaptable light manipulator 2922 in 2D region 3006 so that they appear as a continuous medium gray array of manipulator pixels (as shown by the example configuration above section line 3002 ) thereby reducing the brightness of the image perceived in that region.
- this step may also be performed by controlling manipulator pixels of adaptable light manipulator 2922 in selected portions of 2D region 3006 and 3D region 3004 to be selectively lighter or darker gray (e.g., see boundary regions 3010 , 3012 and 3014 in FIG. 30 ).
- the grayscale mode of each of the manipulator pixels may be thought of as comprising a selectable plurality of gray levels.
- FIG. 32 is a block diagram of an example practical implementation of a display system 3200 in accordance with an embodiment of the present invention. As shown in FIG. 32 , display system 3200 generally comprises control circuitry 3202 , driver circuitry 3204 and screen elements 3206 .
- control circuitry 3202 includes a processing unit 3214 , which may comprise one or more general-purpose or special-purpose processors or one or more processing cores.
- Processing unit 3214 is connected to a communication infrastructure 3212 , such as a communication bus.
- Control circuitry 3202 may also include a primary or main memory (not shown in FIG. 32 ), such as random access memory (RAM), that is connected to communication infrastructure 3212 .
- the main memory may have control logic stored thereon for execution by processing unit 3214 as well as data stored thereon that may be input to or output by processing unit 3214 during execution of such control logic.
- Control circuitry 3202 may also include one or more secondary storage devices (not shown in FIG. 32 ) that are connected to communication infrastructure 3212 , including but not limited to a hard disk drive, a removable storage drive (such as an optical disk drive, a floppy disk drive, a magnetic tape drive, or the like), or an interface for communicating with a removable storage unit such as an interface for communicating with a memory card, memory stick or the like.
- secondary storage devices provide an additional means for storing control logic for execution by processing unit 3214 as well as data that may be input to or output by processing unit 3214 during execution of such control logic.
- Control circuitry 3202 further includes a user input interface 3216 and a media interface 3218 .
- User input interface 3216 is intended to generally represent any type of interface that may be used to receive user input, including but not limited to a remote control device, a traditional computer input device such as a keyboard or mouse, a touch screen, a gamepad or other type of gaming console input device, or one or more sensors including but not limited to video cameras, microphones and motion sensors.
- Media interface 3218 is intended to represent any type of interface that is capable of receiving media content such as video content or image content.
- media interface 3218 may comprise an interface for receiving media content from a remote source such as a broadcast media server, an on-demand media server, or the like.
- media interface 3218 may comprise, for example and without limitation, a wired or wireless internet or intranet connection, a satellite interface, a fiber interface, a coaxial cable interface, or a fiber-coaxial cable interface.
- Media interface 3218 may also comprise an interface for receiving media content from a local source such as a DVD or Blu-Ray disc player, a personal computer, a personal media player, smart phone, or the like.
- Media content 3218 may be capable of retrieving video content from multiple sources.
- Control circuitry 3202 further includes a communication interface 3220 .
- Communication interface 3220 enables control circuitry 3202 to send control signals via a communication medium 3262 to another communication interface 3240 within driver circuitry 3204 , thereby enabling control circuitry 3202 to control the operation of driver circuitry 3204 .
- Communication medium 3262 may comprise any kind of wired or wireless communication medium suitable for transmitting such control signals.
- driver circuitry 3204 includes the aforementioned communication interface 3240 as well as pixel array driver circuitry 3242 , adaptable light manipulator driver circuitry 3244 and backlight driver circuitry 3246 all of which are connected thereto.
- Each of these driver circuitry elements is configured to receive control signals from control circuitry 3202 (via the link between communication interface 3220 and communication interface 3230 ) and, responsive thereto, to send selected drive signals to a corresponding hardware element within screen elements 3206 , the drive signals causing the corresponding hardware element to operate in a particular manner.
- pixel array driver circuitry 3242 is configured to send selected drive signals to a pixel array 3252 within screen elements 3206
- adaptable light manipulator driver circuitry 3244 is configured to send selected drive signals to an adaptable light manipulator 3254 within screen elements 3206
- backlight driver circuitry 3246 is configured to send selected drive signals to a backlight 3256 within screen elements 3206 .
- processing unit 3214 operates pursuant to control logic to receive video content via media interface 3218 and to generate control signals necessary to cause driver circuitry to render such video content to a screen comprised of screen elements 3206 .
- the control logic that is executed by processing unit 3214 may be retrieved, for example, from a primary memory or a secondary storage device connected to processing unit 3214 via communication infrastructure 3212 as discussed above.
- the control logic may also be retrieved from some other local or remote source.
- the control logic is stored on a computer readable medium, that computer readable medium may be referred to herein as a computer program product.
- driver circuitry 3204 may be controlled to send drive signals necessary for simultaneously displaying two-dimensional images, three-dimensional images and multi-view three-dimensional content via different display regions of the screen.
- pixel array 3252 , adaptable light manipulator 3254 (e.g., an adaptable parallax barrier), and backlight 3256 may be manipulated in a coordinated fashion to perform this function was described previously herein. Note that in accordance with certain implementations (e.g., implementations in which pixel array comprises a OLED/PLED pixel array), screen elements 3206 need not include a backlight 3256 .
- Driver circuitry 3205 may also be controlled to cause screen elements 3206 to perform certain functions described elsewhere herein for regulating a perceived brightness across various regional screen configurations, wherein each region has differing light blocking characteristics, and to minimize backlighting dispersion effects that may occur between adjacent regions.
- backlight 3256 may comprise an array of light sources (e.g., LEDs) that may be individually driven to vary the backlighting luminosity provided to pixel array 3252 on a region-by-region basis, wherein each region has differing light blocking characteristics as determined by the configuration of adaptable light manipulator 3254 .
- the intensity of pixels in pixel array 3252 associated with a particular display region can also be increased or reduced in response to drive signals from pixel array driver circuitry 3242 in order to control brightness on a region-by-region or pixel-by-pixel basis.
- driver circuitry 3204 is controlled by control circuitry 3202 to implement a combined backlight array and pixel intensity control scheme to provide desired brightness on a region-by-region basis.
- pixel array driver circuitry 3242 may be controlled to cause the intensity of pixels near a boundary of a region to be increased or reduced to correct disparities caused by the luminosity contribution (or lack thereof) from backlight sources associated with adjacent regions.
- a grating system is also included within screen elements 3206 to prevent the spilling over of light from adjacent regions.
- adaptable light manipulator 3254 includes both a parallax barrier and a brightness regulation overlay.
- adaptable light manipulator driver circuitry 3244 may be controlled by control circuitry 3202 to implement different parallax barrier configurations for different display regions and to also configure the brightness regulation overlay to achieve a standard perceived brightness across such display regions and/or to minimize dispersion effects between adjacent regions.
- control circuitry 3202 may be controlled by control circuitry 3202 to implement different parallax barrier configurations for different display regions and to also configure the brightness regulation overlay to achieve a standard perceived brightness across such display regions and/or to minimize dispersion effects between adjacent regions.
- control circuitry 3202 , driver circuitry 3204 and screen elements 3206 are all included within a single housing. For example and without limitation, all these elements may exist within a laptop computer, a tablet computer, or a telephone.
- the link 3260 formed between communication interfaces 3220 and 3240 may be replaced by a direction connection between driver circuitry 3204 and communication infrastructure 3212 .
- control circuitry 3202 is disposed within a first housing, such as set top box or personal computer, and driver circuitry 3204 and screen elements 3206 are disposed within a second housing, such as a television or computer monitor.
- the set top box may be any type of set top box including but not limited to fiber, Internet, cable, satellite, or terrestrial digital.
Abstract
Description
- This application claims the benefit of U.S. Provisional Application No. 61/291,818, filed on Dec. 31, 2009, which is incorporated by reference herein in its entirety. This application also claims the benefit of U.S. Provisional Application No. 61/303,119, filed on Feb. 10, 2010, which is incorporated by reference herein in its entirety.
- This application is also related to the following U.S. patent applications, each of which also claims the benefit of U.S. Provisional Patent Application Nos. 61/291,818 and 61/303,119 and each of which is incorporated by reference herein:
- U.S. patent application Ser. No. 12/845,409, filed on Jul. 28, 2010, and entitled “Display with Adaptable Parallax Barrier”; and
- U.S. patent application Ser. No. 12/845,440, filed on Jul. 28, 2010, and entitled “Adaptable Parallax Barrier Supporting Mixed 2D and Stereoscopic 3D Display Regions.”
- 1. Field of the Invention
- The present invention generally relates to display systems that utilize backlighting and, in particular, to display systems that utilize backlighting and support the viewing of two-dimensional and three-dimensional images.
- 2. Background Art
- Images may be generated for display in various forms. For instance, television (TV) is a widely used telecommunication medium for transmitting and displaying images in monochromatic (“black and white”) or color form. Conventionally, images are provided in analog form and are displayed by display devices in two-dimensions. More recently, images are being provided in digital form for display in two-dimensions on display devices having improved resolution (e.g., “high definition” or “HD”). Even more recently, images capable of being displayed in three-dimensions are being generated.
- A parallax barrier is one example of a device that enables images to be displayed in three-dimensions. A parallax barrier includes of a layer of material with a series of precision slits. The parallax barrier is placed proximal to a display so that a viewer's eyes each see a different set of pixels to create a sense of depth through parallax. A disadvantage of parallax barriers is that the viewer must be positioned in a well-defined location in order to experience the three-dimensional effect. If the viewer moves his/her eyes away from this “sweet spot,” image flipping and/or exacerbation of the eyestrain, headaches and nausea that may be associated with prolonged three-dimensional image viewing may result. Conventional three-dimensional LCD displays that utilize parallax barriers are also constrained in that the displays must be entirely in a two-dimensional image mode or a three-dimensional image mode at any time.
- To address these issues associated with conventional three-dimensional LCD displays that utilize parallax barriers, commonly-owned, co-pending U.S. patent application Ser. No. 12/845,409 presents an innovative two-dimensional/three-dimensional viewing display that includes a parallax barrier that may be dynamically modified in order to adaptively accommodate, for example, a changing viewer sweet spot, switching between two-dimensional images, three-dimensional images, and multi-view three-dimensional content, and the simultaneous display of two-dimensional images, three-dimensional images and multi-view three-dimensional content. Furthermore, commonly-owned, co-pending U.S. patent application Ser. No. 12/845,440 describes the use of such an innovative two-dimensional/three-dimensional viewing display to simultaneously present two-dimensional images, three-dimensional images and multi-view three-dimensional content via different regions of the same display.
- Conventional LCD displays typically include a backlight and a display panel that includes an array of LCD pixels. The backlight is designed to produce a sheet of light of uniform luminosity for illuminating the LCD pixels. When simultaneously displaying two-dimensional, three-dimensional and multi-view three-dimensional regions using a system such as that described in above-reference U.S. patent application Ser. No. 12/845,440, the use of a conventional backlight will result in a disparity in perceived brightness between the different simultaneously-displayed regions. This is because the number of visible pixels per unit area associated with a two-dimensional region will generally exceed the number of visible pixels per unit area associated with a particular three-dimensional or multi-view three-dimensional region (in which the pixels must be partitioned among different eyes/views). This disparity in perceived brightness between display regions may lead to an unsatisfactory viewing experience for a viewer. For example, when the viewer adjusts the brightness level of the backlight to improve the appearance of an image in a particular region, the viewer may also cause the brightness of an image in another display region to be reduced or increased to an undesired level. Consequently, the viewer will be unable to set all of the display regions to a single desired brightness level. In addition, the viewer may be unable to adequately perceive images displayed in regions of reduced brightness. Furthermore, the disparity in perceived brightness between the display regions may be distracting or annoying to the viewer.
- Display systems and methods are described herein. In accordance with certain embodiments, the display systems and methods provide a backlight panel comprising an array of light sources (e.g., LEDs) that may be individually controlled to vary the backlighting luminosity provided to a proximately-positioned display panel on a region-by-region basis. Such control may be automatic and/or manual. This enables, for example, the brightness of each region to be controlled such that a viewer perceives roughly uniform brightness across all regions. This is particularly useful in a display system having an adaptable parallax barrier that allows for the simultaneous viewing of two-dimensional images, three-dimensional images and multi-view three-dimensional content in different display regions, since those display regions may be perceived as having a different number of pixels per unit area.
- Alternatively or in addition to controlling the backlighting array, the intensity of pixels associated with a particular display region can also be increased or reduced in order to control brightness on a region-by-region or pixel-by-pixel basis. In one embodiment, a combined backlight array and pixel intensity control scheme is used to provide desired brightness on a region-by-region basis. For example, the intensity of pixels near the boundary of a region may be increased or reduced to correct disparities caused by the luminosity contribution (or lack thereof) from backlight sources associated with adjacent regions. Alternatively or additionally, a grating system may be used to prevent the spilling over of light from adjacent regions.
- For certain display systems that do not utilize backlights, such as OLED/PLED display systems, an embodiment of the invention may be implemented by providing control of the brightness of the regions of the OLED/PLED array that correspond to different display regions.
- Further features and advantages of the invention, as well as the structure and operation of various embodiments of the invention, are described in detail below with reference to the accompanying drawings. It is noted that the invention is not limited to the specific embodiments described herein. Such embodiments are presented herein for illustrative purposes only. Additional embodiments will be apparent to persons skilled in the relevant art(s) based on the teachings contained herein.
- The accompanying drawings, which are incorporated herein and form a part of the specification, illustrate the present invention and, together with the description, further serve to explain the principles of the invention and to enable a person skilled in the pertinent art to make and use the invention.
-
FIG. 1A is a block diagram of a display system in accordance with one example embodiment. -
FIG. 1B is a block diagram of a display system in accordance with another example embodiment. -
FIG. 2 is a block diagram of one example implementation of the display system ofFIG. 1A . -
FIG. 3 shows a view of a surface of a parallax barrier in accordance with an example embodiment. -
FIGS. 4 and 5 show views of a blocking region of a blocking region array that is selected to be transparent and to be opaque, respectively, according to example embodiments. -
FIG. 6 depicts a flowchart of one method for generating two-dimensional and/or three-dimensional images in accordance with an example embodiment. -
FIG. 7 shows a cross-sectional view of an example of the display system ofFIG. 2 in accordance with an embodiment. -
FIGS. 8A and 8B each show a view of an example parallax barrier with non-blocking slits in accordance with an embodiment. -
FIG. 9 is a block diagram of a blocking array controller in accordance with an example embodiment. -
FIG. 10 depicts a flowchart of a method for forming a three-dimensional image in accordance with an example embodiment. -
FIG. 11 shows the display system ofFIG. 7 providing a three-dimensional image to a user in accordance with an example embodiment. -
FIG. 12 depicts a flowchart of a method that may be performed to enable the display of two-dimensional and three-dimensional images in accordance with an example embodiment. -
FIG. 13 shows a display system configured to generate two-dimensional and three-dimensional images in accordance with an example embodiment. -
FIGS. 14 and 15 show views of the blocking region array ofFIG. 3 configured to enable the simultaneous display of two-dimensional and three-dimensional images of various sizes in accordance with example embodiments. -
FIG. 16 is a view of a display system that implements a controllable backlight array and is configured to simultaneously display two-dimensional and three-dimensional content in accordance with an embodiment. -
FIG. 17 is a view of the display system ofFIG. 16 in an alternate configuration for simultaneously displaying two-dimensional and three-dimensional content. -
FIG. 18 depicts a flowchart of method for operating a display system that utilizes a backlight panel comprising an array of individually-controllable light sources in accordance with an embodiment. -
FIG. 19 depicts a flowchart of a method for operating a display system that includes a backlight array to independently control the brightness of different display regions generated thereby to simultaneously display corresponding two-dimensional images, three-dimensional images, and multi-view three-dimensional content. -
FIG. 20 is a block diagram of a display system in accordance with an alternate embodiment that uses a conventional backlight and implements a regional brightness control scheme based on pixel intensity. -
FIG. 21 illustrates one example configuration of the display system ofFIG. 20 . -
FIG. 22 depicts a flowchart of a method for operating a display system that utilizes a regional brightness control scheme based on pixel intensity in accordance with an embodiment. -
FIG. 23 is a front perspective view of the display panel ofFIG. 16 . -
FIG. 24 depicts a flowchart of a method for implementing regional brightness control in a display system that combines the use of a backlight array of independently-controllable light sources with regional pixel intensity control in accordance with an embodiment. -
FIG. 25 is a view of display system that includes a grating structure in accordance with an embodiment. -
FIG. 26 provides a partial, blown-up view of the grating structure shown inFIG. 25 . -
FIG. 27 is a block diagram of a display system in accordance with an alternate embodiment that utilizes a display panel comprising an array of organic light emitting diodes (OLEDs) or polymer light emitting diodes (PLEDs) and implements a regional brightness control scheme based on controlling OLED/PLED pixel brightness. -
FIG. 28 depicts a flowchart of a method for operating a display system that implements a regional brightness control scheme by controlling the amount of light emitted by OLED/PLED pixels in accordance with an embodiment. -
FIG. 29 is a block diagram of a display system in accordance with an alternate embodiment that uses a brightness regulation overlay to implement a regional brightness control scheme. -
FIG. 30 illustrates two exemplary configurations of an example implementation of an adaptable light manipulator that includes a parallax barrier and a brightness regulation overlay in accordance with an embodiment. -
FIG. 31 depicts a flowchart of a method for operating a display system that uses a using a brightness regulation overlay to implement a regional brightness control scheme by in accordance with an embodiment. -
FIG. 32 is a block diagram of an example practical implementation of a display system in accordance with an embodiment of the present invention. - The present invention will now be described with reference to the accompanying drawings. In the drawings, like reference numbers indicate identical or functionally similar elements. Additionally, the left-most digit(s) of a reference number identifies the drawing in which the reference number first appears.
- The present specification discloses one or more embodiments that incorporate the features of the invention. The disclosed embodiment(s) merely exemplify the invention. The scope of the invention is not limited to the disclosed embodiment(s). The invention is defined by the claims appended hereto.
- References in the specification to “one embodiment,” “an embodiment,” “an example embodiment,” etc., indicate that the embodiment described may include a particular feature, structure, or characteristic, but every embodiment may not necessarily include the particular feature, structure, or characteristic. Moreover, such phrases are not necessarily referring to the same embodiment. Further, when a particular feature, structure, or characteristic is described in connection with an embodiment, it is submitted that it is within the knowledge of one skilled in the art to effect such feature, structure, or characteristic in connection with other embodiments whether or not explicitly described.
- Furthermore, it should be understood that spatial descriptions (e.g., “above,” “below,” “up,” “left,” “right,” “down,” “top,” “bottom,” “vertical,” “horizontal,” etc.) used herein are for purposes of illustration only, and that practical implementations of the structures described herein can be spatially arranged in any orientation or manner.
- Display systems will be described herein that include a backlight panel comprising an array of light sources that can be individually controlled to vary backlighting luminosity on a region-by-region basis. Such a backlight panel is particularly useful, for example, in display systems such as those described in commonly-owned, co-pending U.S. patent application Ser. No. 12/845,440 (entitled “Adaptable Parallax Barrier Supporting Mixed 2D and Stereoscopic 3D Display Regions” and filed on Jul. 28, 2010) in which a dynamically-modifiable parallax barrier is used to support the simultaneous display of two-dimensional images, three-dimensional images and multi-view three-dimensional content in different display regions. However, the backlight panels described herein may advantageously be used in any display system in which it is desirable to simultaneously provide different levels of brightness to different display regions associated with the display system.
- Display systems will also be described herein that selectively increase or reduce the intensity of pixels associated with a particular display region in order to control brightness on a region-by-region or pixel-by-pixel basis. In one embodiment described herein, a combined backlight array and pixel intensity control scheme is used to provide desired brightness on a region-by-region basis. For example, in accordance with such an embodiment, the intensity of pixels near the boundary of a region may be increased or reduced to correct disparities caused by the luminosity contribution (or lack thereof) from backlight sources associated with adjacent regions. In a further embodiment described herein, a grating system is used to prevent the spilling over of light from adjacent regions.
- Display systems will also be described herein that do not use backlights but instead use organic light emitting diodes (OLEDs) or polymer light emitting diodes (PLEDs) that combine the illumination and image-generation function. In embodiments, described herein, these display systems implement regional brightness control by providing control over the brightness of the regions of an OLED/PLED pixel array that correspond to different display regions.
-
FIG. 1A is a block diagram of anexample display system 100 in which embodiments of the present invention may be implemented. As shown inFIG. 1A ,display system 100 includes adisplay device 116.Display device 116 may comprise, for example, a television display, a computer monitor, a laptop monitor, or a display associated with a cellular telephone, smart telephone, personal media player, personal digital assistant, or the like. As will be discussed in more detail herein,display device 116 is capable of simultaneously displaying two-dimensional images, three-dimensional images and multi-view three-dimensional content via different display regions. - As shown in
FIG. 1A ,display device 116 includes abacklight panel 102, adisplay panel 104 and aparallax barrier 106.Backlight panel 102 emits light 110, which passes through pixels ofdisplay panel 104, thereby creating display-generatedlight 112, which includes image information. Such image information may include one or more still images, motion (e.g., video) images, etc. Display-generatedlight 112 is received byparallax barrier 106, which filters display-generatedlight 112 to pass filtered display-generatedlight 114. For instance,parallax barrier 106 may filter display-generatedlight 112 with a plurality of barrier regions that are selectively opaque or transparent. Filtered display-generatedlight 114 includes a plurality of images formed from the image information included in display-generatedlight 112. For example, filtered display-generatedlight 114 may include one or more two-dimensional images and/or one or more three-dimensional images. Filtered display-generatedlight 114 is received in aviewing space 108 proximate to displaydevice 116. One or more users may be present inviewing space 108 to view the two-dimensional and/or three-dimensional images included in filtered display-generatedlight 114. -
FIG. 1B is a block diagram of an alternativeexample display system 150 in which embodiments of the present invention may be implemented. As shown inFIG. 1B ,display system 150 includes adisplay device 166 that includes abacklight panel 152, aparallax barrier 154 and adisplay panel 156.Backlight panel 152 emits light 160, which is received byparallax barrier 154, which filters light 160 to pass filteredlight 162. For instance,parallax barrier 154 may filter light 160 with a plurality of barrier regions that are selectively opaque or transparent. Filtered light 162 passes through pixels ofdisplay panel 156, thereby creating filtered display-generatedlight 164. Filtered display-generatedlight 164 includes a plurality of images formed by the passage of filtered light 162 through the pixels ofdisplay panel 156. For example, filtered display-generatedlight 164 may include one or more two-dimensional images and/or one or more three-dimensional images. Filtered display-generatedlight 114 is received in aviewing space 158 proximate to displaydevice 166. One or more users may be present inviewing space 158 to view the two-dimensional and/or three-dimensional images included in filtered display-generatedlight 114. - Although subsequent description will expand upon an implementation of
display system 100 ofFIG. 1A , persons skilled in the relevant art(s) will readily appreciate that embodiments of the present invention described herein may likewise be implemented indisplay system 150 ofFIG. 1B . For example, embodiments described herein that utilize a backlight panel comprising an array of light sources that can be individually controlled to vary backlighting luminosity on a region-by-region basis can be implemented in eitherdisplay system 100 ofFIG. 1A ordisplay system 150 ofFIG. 1B to achieve similar benefits. Furthermore, embodiments described herein that selectively increase or reduce the intensity of pixels associated with a particular display region in order to control brightness on a region-by-region or pixel-by-pixel basis can be implemented in eitherdisplay system 100 ofFIG. 1A ordisplay system 150 ofFIG. 1B to achieve similar benefits. -
FIG. 2 is a block diagram of adisplay system 200, which is one example implementation ofsystem 100 shown inFIG. 1A . As shown inFIG. 2 ,system 200 includes adisplay controller 202 and display device 116 (which includesbacklight panel 102,display panel 104 and parallax barrier 106). As shown inFIG. 2 ,backlight panel 102 includes abacklight array 210,display panel 104 includes apixel array 212 andparallax barrier 106 includes a blockingregion array 210. Furthermore, as shown inFIG. 2 ,display controller 202 includes abacklight array controller 204, apixel array controller 206, and ablocking array controller 208. -
Backlight array 210 comprises a two-dimensional array of light sources. Such light sources may be arranged, for example, in a rectangular grid. Each light source inbacklight array 210 is individually addressable and controllable to select an amount of light emitted thereby. A single light source may comprise one or more light-emitting elements depending upon the implementation. In one embodiment, each light source inbacklight array 210 comprises a single light-emitting diode (LED) although this example is not intended to be limiting.Backlight array controller 204 withindisplay controller 202 controls the amount of light emitted by each light source inbacklight array 210 by sending acontrol signal 216 tobacklight array 210.Control signal 216 may include one or more control signals used to control the amount of light emitted by each light source inbacklight array 210. The operation ofbacklight array controller 204 andbacklight array 210 will be described in further detail herein. -
Pixel array 212 includes a two-dimensional array of pixels. Such pixels may be arranged, for example, in a rectangular grid. In an embodiment in whichdisplay panel 104 comprises a liquid crystal display (LCD) panel, each pixel inpixel array 212 comprises an LCD pixel, although this example is not intended to be limiting. Each pixel inpixel array 212 is individually addressable and controllable to select an amount of light originating frombacklight array 210 that will be passed thereby, thus allowing the intensity of each pixel to be varied. In an embodiment, each pixel ofpixel array 212 includes a plurality of sub-pixels, wherein each sub-pixel operates as a filter to pass a certain type of colored light and is individually addressable and controllable to select an amount of light that will be passed thereby. For example, each pixel inpixel array 212 may include a red sub-pixel that filters light produced bybacklight panel 102 to produce red light, a green sub-pixel that filters light produced bybacklight panel 102 to produce green light and a blue sub-pixel that filters light produced bybacklight panel 102 to produce blue light. By controlling the intensity of each red, green and blue sub-pixel associated with a pixel, various colors may be produced at various degrees of intensity. -
Parallax barrier 106 is positioned proximate to a surface ofpixel array 212.Blocking region array 214 is a layer ofparallax barrier 106 that includes a plurality of blocking regions arranged in an array. Each blocking region of the array is configured to be selectively opaque or transparent. For instance,FIG. 3 shows aparallax barrier 300 in accordance with an example embodiment.Parallax barrier 300 is an example ofparallax barrier 106 ofFIG. 2 . As shown inFIG. 3 ,parallax barrier 300 includes a blockingregion array 302.Blocking region array 302 includes a plurality of blockingregions 304 arranged in a two-dimensional array (e.g., arranged in a grid), although in otherembodiments blocking regions 304 may be arranged in other ways. Each blockingregion 304 is shown inFIG. 3 as rectangular (e.g., square) in shape but, in other embodiments, blockingregions 304 may have other shapes. Blockingregions 304 may each comprise a pixel of an LCD, a moveable mechanical element (e.g., a hinged flap that passes light in a first position and blocks light in a second position), a magnetically-actuated element, or other suitable blocking element. -
Blocking region array 302 may include any number of blockingregions 304. For example, inFIG. 3 , blockingregion array 302 includes twenty-eightblocking regions 304 along an x-axis and includes twenty blockingregions 304 along a y-axis, for a total number of five hundred and sixty blockingregions 304. However, these dimensions of blockingregion array 302 and the total number of blockingregions 304 for blockingregion array 302 shown inFIG. 3 are provided for illustrative purposes, and are not intended to be limiting.Blocking region array 302 may include any number of blockingregions 304, and may have any array dimensions, including hundreds, thousands, or even larger numbers of blockingregions 304 along each of the x- and y-axes. - Each blocking
region 304 of blockingregion array 302 is selectable to be opaque or transparent. For instance,FIG. 4 shows a blockingregion 304 x that is selected to be transparent, andFIG. 5 shows blocking region 304 x when selected to be opaque, according to example embodiments. When blockingregion 304 x is selected to be transparent, display-generated light 112 emanating frompixel array 212 may pass through blockingregion 304 x (e.g., to viewing space 108). When blockingregion 304 x is selected to be opaque, display-generated light 112 frompixel array 212 is blocked from passing through blockingregion 304 x. By selecting some of blockingregions 304 of blockingregion array 302 to be transparent, and some of blockingregions 304 of blockingregion array 302 to be opaque, display-generatedlight 112 received at blockingregion array 302 is filtered to generate filtered display-generatedlight 114. -
Display controller 202 is configured to generate control signals to enabledisplay device 116 to display two-dimensional and three-dimensional images tousers 222 inviewing space 108. For example,pixel array controller 206 is configured to generate acontrol signal 218 that is received bypixel array 212.Control signal 218 may include one or more control signals used to cause pixels ofpixel array 212 to emit display-generatedlight 112 of particular desired colors and/or intensity. Blockingarray controller 208 is configured to generate acontrol signal 220 that is received by blockingregion array 214.Control signal 220 may include one or more control signals used to cause each of blockingregions 304 of blockingregion array 302 to be transparent or opaque. In this manner, blockingregion array 214 filters display-generatedlight 112 to generate filtered display-generatedlight 114 that includes one or more two-dimensional and/or three-dimensional images that may be viewed byusers 222 inviewing space 108. - For example,
control signal 218 may control sets of pixels ofpixel array 212 to each emit light representative of a respective image, to provide a plurality of images.Control signal 220 may control blockingregions 304 of blockingregion array 214 to filter the light received frompixel array 212 according to the provided images such that one or more of the images are received byusers 222 in two-dimensional form. For instance,control signal 220 may select one or more sets of blockingregions 304 of blockingregion array 302 to be transparent, to transmit one or more corresponding two-dimensional images tousers 222. Furthermore,control signal 220 may control sections of blockingregion array 214 to include opaque andtransparent blocking regions 304 to filter the light received frompixel array 212 so that one or more pairs of images provided bypixel array 212 are each received byusers 222 as a corresponding as three-dimensional image. For example,control signal 220 may select parallel strips of blockingregions 304 of blockingregion array 302 to be transparent to form slits that enable three-dimensional images to be received byusers 222. - In embodiments,
control signal 220 may be generated by blockingarray controller 208 to configure one or more characteristics of blockingregion array 214. For example,control signal 220 may be generated to form any number of parallel strips of blockingregions 304 of blockingregion array 302 to be transparent, to modify the number and/or spacing of parallel strips of blockingregions 304 of blockingregion array 302 that are transparent, to select and/or modify a width and/or a length (in blocking regions 304) of one or more strips of blockingregions 304 of blockingregion array 302 that are transparent or opaque, to select and/or modify an orientation of one or more strips of blockingregions 304 of blockingregion array 302 that are transparent, to select one or more areas of blockingregion array 302 to include all transparent or allopaque blocking regions 304, etc. - Two-dimensional and three-dimensional images may be generated by
system 200 in various ways. For instance,FIG. 6 depicts aflowchart 600 of a method for generating two-dimensional and/or three-dimensional images in accordance with an example embodiment. The method offlowchart 600 may be performed bysystem 200 inFIG. 2 , for example. The method offlowchart 600 will be described with respect toFIG. 7 , which shows a cross-sectional view of adisplay system 700.Display system 700 is an example embodiment ofsystem 200 shown inFIG. 2 . As shown inFIG. 7 ,system 700 includes apixel array 702 and a blockingregion array 704. Further structural and operational embodiments will be apparent to persons skilled in the relevant art(s) based on thediscussion regarding flowchart 600. The method offlowchart 600 is described as follows. - The method of
flowchart 600 begins withstep 602. Instep 602, light is received at a parallax barrier. For example, as shown inFIG. 2 , display-generatedlight 112 is received atparallax barrier 106 frompixel array 212 ofdisplay panel 104. Each pixel ofpixel array 212 may emit light that is received atparallax barrier 106. Depending on the particular display mode ofparallax barrier 106,parallax barrier 106 may filter display-generated light 112 frompixel array 212 to generate a two-dimensional image or a three-dimensional image viewable inviewing space 108 byusers 222. Furthermore,parallax barrier 106 may filter display-generated light 112 frompixel array 212 differently in different areas ofparallax barrier 106 to simultaneously generate two-dimensional images and/or three-dimensional images corresponding to the different areas. - In
step 604, each blocking region in a plurality of parallel strips of blocking regions of the blocking region array is selected to be transparent to form a plurality of parallel transparent slits, the spacing of transparent slits in the plurality of parallel transparent slits being selectable. For example, as shown inFIG. 7 , blockingregion array 704 includes a plurality of blocking regions that are each either transparent or opaque. Blocking regions that are opaque are indicated as blocking regions 710 a-710 f, and blocking regions that are transparent are indicated as blocking regions 712 a-712 e. Further blocking regions may be included in blockingregion array 704 that are not visible inFIG. 7 . Each of blocking regions 710 a-710 f and 712 a-712 e may include one or more blocking regions. Blocking regions 710 alternate with blocking regions 712 in series in the order of blockingregions region array 704. - For instance,
FIG. 8A shows a view ofparallax barrier 300 ofFIG. 3 with transparent slits, according to an example embodiment. As shown inFIG. 8A ,parallax barrier 300 includes blockingregion array 302, which includes a plurality of blockingregions 304 arranged in a two-dimensional array. Furthermore, as shown inFIG. 8 , blockingregion array 302 includes a plurality of parallel strips of blockingregions 304 that are selected to be transparent to form a plurality of parallel transparent strips (or “slits”) 802 a-802 g. As shown inFIG. 8 , paralleltransparent strips 802 a-802 g (transparent slits) are alternated with parallel opaque strips 804 a-804 g of blockingregions 304 that are selected to be opaque. In the example ofFIG. 8A ,transparent strips 802 a-802 g and opaque strips 804 a-804 g each have a width (along the x-dimension) of two blockingregions 304, and have lengths that extend along the entire y-dimension (twenty blocking regions 304) of blockingregion array 304, although in other embodiments, may have alternative dimensions. The spacing (and number) of paralleltransparent strips 802 in blockingregion array 704 may be selectable by choosing any number and combination of particular strips of blockingregions 304 in blockingregion array 302 to be transparent, to be alternated with opaque strips 804, as desired. -
FIG. 8B shows aparallax barrier 310 that is another example of blockingregion array 704 with parallel transparent slits, according to an embodiment. Similarly toparallax barrier 300 ofFIG. 8A ,parallax barrier 310 has includes a blockingregion array 312, which includes a plurality of blockingregions 314 arranged in a two-dimensional array (28 by 1 array). Blockingregions 314 have widths (along the x-dimension) similar to the widths of blockingregions 304 inFIG. 8A , but have lengths that extend along the entire vertical length (y-dimension) of blockingregion array 312. As shown inFIG. 8B , blockingregion array 312 includes paralleltransparent strips 802 a-802 g alternated with parallel opaque strips 804 a-804 g. In the example ofFIG. 8B , paralleltransparent strips 802 a-802 g and parallel opaque strips 804 a-804 g each have a width (along the x-dimension) of two blockingregions 314, and have lengths that extend along the entire y-dimension (one blocking region 314) of blockingregion array 312. - Referring back to
FIG. 6 , instep 606, the light is filtered at the parallax barrier to form a plurality of images in a viewing space. In embodiments,parallax barrier 106 may filter display-generated light 112 frompixel array 212 to generate one or more two-dimensional images and/or three-dimensional images viewable inviewing space 108 byusers 222. - For example, as shown in
FIG. 7 ,pixel array 702 includes a plurality of pixels 714 a-714 d and 716 a-716 d. Pixels 714 alternate with pixels 716, such that pixels 714 a-714 d and 716 a-716 d are arranged in series in the order ofpixels pixel array 702 that are not visible inFIG. 7 , including further pixels along the width dimension of pixel array 702 (e.g., in the left-right directions) as well as pixels along a length dimension of pixel array 702 (not visible inFIG. 7 ). Each of pixels 714 a-714 d and 716 a-716 d passes light frombacklight panel 102, and this light emanates fromdisplay surface 724 of pixel array 702 (e.g., generally upward inFIG. 7 ) towards blockingregion array 704. Some example indications of light emanating from pixels 714 a-714 d and 716 a-716 d are shown inFIG. 7 (as dotted lines), including light 724 a and light 718 a emanating frompixel 714 a, light 724 b, light 718 b, and light 724 c emanating frompixel 714 b, etc. - Light emanating from
pixel array 702 is filtered by blockingregion array 704 to form a plurality of images in aviewing space 726, including afirst image 706 a at afirst location 708 a and asecond image 706 b at asecond location 708 b. A portion of the light emanating frompixel array 702 is blocked by opaque blocking regions 710, while another portion of the light emanating frompixel array 702 passes through transparent blocking regions 712, according to the filtering by blockingregion array 704. For instance, light 724 a frompixel 714 a is blocked byopaque blocking region 710 a, and light 724 b and light 724 c frompixel 714 b are blocked by opaque blocking regions 710 b and 710 c, respectively. In contrast, light 718 a frompixel 714 a is passed bytransparent blocking region 712 a and light 718 b frompixel 714 b is passed by transparent blocking region 712 b. - By forming parallel transparent slits in a blocking region array, light from a pixel array can be filtered to form multiple images in a viewing space. For instance,
system 700 shown inFIG. 7 is configured to form first andsecond images locations distance 728 from pixel array 702 (as shown inFIG. 7 , further instances of first andsecond images viewing space 726 according tosystem 700, in a repeating, alternating fashion). As described above,pixel array 702 includes a first set of pixels 714 a-714 d and a second set of pixels 716 a-716 d. Pixels 714 a-714 d correspond tofirst image 706 a and pixels 716 a-716 d correspond tosecond image 706 b. Due to the spacing of pixels 714 a-714 d and 716 a-716 d inpixel array 702, and the geometry of transparent blocking regions 712 in blockingregion array 704, first andsecond images locations FIG. 7 , light 718 a-718 d from the first set of pixels 714 a-714 d is focused atlocation 708 a to formfirst image 706 a atlocation 708 a. Light 720 a-720 d from the second set of pixels 716 a-716 d is focused atlocation 708 b to formsecond image 706 b atlocation 708 b. -
FIG. 7 shows a slit spacing 722 (center-to-center) of transparent blocking regions 712 in blockingregion array 704. Spacing 722 may be determined to select locations for parallel transparent slits to be formed in blockingregion array 704 for aparticular image distance 728 at which images are desired to be formed (for viewing by users). For example, in an embodiment, if a spacing of pixels 714 a-714 d corresponding to an image is known, and adistance 728 at which the image is desired to be displayed is known, the spacing 722 between adjacent parallel transparent slits in blockingregion array 704 may be selected. As shown inFIG. 9 , in an embodiment, blocking array controller 208 (ofFIG. 2 ) may include aslit spacing calculator 902.Slit spacing calculator 902 is configured to calculate spacing 722 for a particular spacing of pixels and a desired distance for the corresponding image to be formed. - In an embodiment,
display system 700 may be configured to generate three-dimensional images for viewing by users in a viewing space. For instance, first andsecond images FIG. 6 ) may include astep 1002 shown inFIG. 10 . Instep 1002, light from the array of pixels is filtered to form a first image corresponding to a first set of pixels at a right eye location and to form a second image corresponding to a second set of pixels at a left eye location. For example,FIG. 11 showsdisplay system 700 ofFIG. 7 , where auser 1104 receivesfirst image 706 a at afirst eye location 1102 a andsecond image 706 b at asecond eye location 1102 b, according to an example embodiment. First andsecond images Images user 1104 to be perceived as a three-dimensional image. - In such an embodiment, first and
second images display system 700 such that their centers are spaced apart a width of a user's pupils (e.g., an “interocular distance” 1106). For example, the spacing of first andsecond images interocular distance 1106. As described above, multiple instances of first andsecond images display system 700 that repeat in a viewing space. Thus, first andsecond images FIG. 11 that coincide with the left and right eyes ofuser 1104 may be adjacent first andsecond images interocular distance 1106. Alternatively, first andsecond images FIG. 11 coinciding with the left and right eyes ofuser 1104 may be separated by one or more instances of first andsecond images interocular distance 1106. - Details regarding a manner by which various characteristics of a parallax barrier, such as
parallax barrier 300 ofFIG. 3 , can be modified to achieve desired display characteristics are set forth in commonly-owned co-pending U.S. patent application Ser. No. 12/845,440, the entirety of which is incorporated by reference herein. These modifications may include, for example, modifying at least one of a distance between adjacent transparent slits, the width of one or more of the transparent slits, the width of one or more opaque strips, and the orientation of the transparent slits and opaque strips. The modification of these characteristics ofparallax barrier 300 enable the adaptively accommodation of, for example, a changing viewer location (also referred to as a “sweet spot”), switching between two-dimensional images, three-dimensional images and multi-view three-dimensional content, and the simultaneous display of two-dimensional images, three-dimensional images, and multi-view three-dimensional content. - As described in above-referenced U.S. patent application Ser. No. 12/845,440, a blocking region array may be configured to enable multiple two-dimensional images and/or three-dimensional images to be displayed simultaneously. For example, the blocking region array may include one or more transparent sections to generate one or more two-dimensional images and one or more sections that include parallel transparent slits to generate one or more three-dimensional images. For instance,
FIG. 12 shows aflowchart 1200 that may be performed duringstep 604 of flowchart 600 (FIG. 6 ) to enable the simultaneous display of two-dimensional and three-dimensional images, according to an example embodiment.Flowchart 1200 is described as follows with respect toFIG. 13 .FIG. 13 shows adisplay system 1300 configured to generate two-dimensional and three-dimensional images, according to an example embodiment. - In
step 1202 offlowchart 1200, a first set of blocking regions of the blocking region array is configured to filter light from a first set of pixels to form a first image at a right eye location and to filter light from a second set of pixels to form a second image at a left eye location. For example, as shown inFIG. 13 ,system 1300 includes apixel array 1302 and a blockingregion array 1304.System 1300 may also includedisplay controller 202 ofFIG. 2 , which is not shown inFIG. 13 for ease of illustration.Pixel array 1302 includes a first set of pixels 1314 a-1314 d and a second set of pixels 1316 a-1316 c. First set of pixels 1314 a-1314 d and second set of pixels 1316 a-1316 c are configured to generate images at left-eye and right-eye locations that combine to form a three-dimensional image in a similar fashion as described above (e.g., with respect toFIG. 7 ). Pixels of the two sets of pixels are alternated inpixel array 1302 in the order ofpixel 1314 a,pixel 1316 a,pixel 1314 b,pixel 1316 b, etc. (further pixels may be included).Blocking region array 1304 includes afirst portion 1318 and asecond portion 1320.First portion 1318 of blockingregion array 1304 is positioned adjacent to first and second sets of pixels 1314 a-1314 d and 1316 a-1316 c.First portion 1318 includes blocking regions that are opaque indicated as blocking regions 1310 a-1310 e, and blocking regions that are transparent indicated as blocking regions 1312 a-1312 d. Opaque blocking regions 1310 are alternated with transparent blocking regions 1312 to form a plurality of parallel transparent slits in blockingregion array 1304, similarly to blockingregion array 304 shown inFIG. 8 . Light emanating frompixel array 1302 is filtered byportion 1318 of blockingregion array 1304 to form first andsecond images - In
step 1204, a second set of blocking regions of the blocking region array is selected to be transparent to pass light from a third set of pixels to form a third image. For example, as shown inFIG. 13 ,pixel array 1302 further includes a third set ofpixels Second portion 1320 of blockingregion array 1304 is positioned adjacent to third set of pixels 1308 a-1308 b.Second portion 1320 includes blocking regions that are transparent, indicated as blockingregions 1312 e. No opaque blocking regions are included insecond portion 1320. As such, light emanating from third set of pixels 1308 a-1308 b passes throughsecond portion 1320 of blockingregion array 1304 without being filtered to be received as athird image 1306 c in a viewing space.Third image 1306 c is a two-dimensional image, and may be received at multiple locations of the viewing space. - As such, in
FIG. 13 , a three-dimensional image (based on the combination of first andsecond images display system 1300. Although in the example ofFIG. 13 a single three-dimensional image and a single two-dimensional image are simultaneously generated bydisplay system 1300, any number of two-dimensional and three-dimensional images may be simultaneously generated by a display system, in embodiments. Furthermore, the three-dimensional and two-dimensional images may have any size. For instance,FIGS. 14 and 15 show views of blockingregion array 302 ofFIG. 3 configured to enable the simultaneous display of two-dimensional and three-dimensional images of various sizes, according to example embodiments. InFIG. 14 , afirst portion 1402 of blockingregion array 302 is configured similarly to blockingregion array 300 ofFIG. 8 , including a plurality of parallel transparent strips alternated with parallel opaque strips that together fillfirst portion 1402. A second portion 1404 of blockingregion array 302 is surrounded byfirst portion 1402. Second portion 1404 is a rectangular shaped portion of blockingregion array 302 that includes a two-dimensional array of blockingregions 304 that are transparent. Thus, inFIG. 14 , blockingregion array 302 is configured to enable a three-dimensional image to be generated by pixels of a pixel array that are adjacent to blocking regions offirst portion 1402, and to enable a two-dimensional image to be generated by pixels of the pixel array that are adjacent to blocking regions inside of second portion 1404. - In
FIG. 15 , blockingregion array 302 includes afirst portion 1502 and asecond portion 1504.First portion 1502 includes a two-dimensional array of blockingregions 304 that are transparent.Second portion 1504 is rectangular shaped, and is contained withinfirst portion 1502.Second portion 1504 includes a plurality of parallel transparent strips alternated with parallel opaque strips that together fillsecond portion 1504 of blockingregion array 302. Thus, inFIG. 15 , blockingregion array 302 is configured to enable a two-dimensional image to be generated by pixels of a pixel array that are adjacent to blocking regions offirst portion 1502, and to enable a three-dimensional image to be generated by pixels of the pixel array that are adjacent to blocking regions inside ofsecond portion 1504. - It is noted that although
second portions 1404 and 1504 are shown for illustrative purposes inFIGS. 14 and 15 as being rectangular areas,second portions 1404 and 1504 may have other shapes, including circular, triangular or other polygon, irregular, or any other shape. - Furthermore, although flowchart 1200 (and
FIGS. 13-15 ) relate to a two-dimensional image and a three-dimensional image being provided by a display system simultaneously, in embodiments, two or more two-dimensional images or two or more three-dimensional images may be provided by a display system simultaneously. For instance, in an embodiment,step 1202 offlowchart 1200 may be repeated to form fourth and fifth images corresponding to another three-dimensional image. Additionally or alternatively,step 1204 may be repeated to form a sixth image corresponding to another two-dimensional image. Any number of additional two-dimensional and/or three-dimensional images may be formed in this manner by corresponding regions of a display. - As discussed in the preceding section,
display system 116 is capable of simultaneously displaying two-dimensional and three-dimensional images in different display regions by selectively modifying portions of blockingregion array 214 that correspond to different areas ofpixel array 212. A viewer that is capable of viewing the simultaneously-displayed two-dimensional and three-dimensional images will perceive a different number of pixels per unit area in each display region depending upon the type of image that is being presented in each display region. - For example, in further accordance with the example provided above with respect to
FIG. 15 , assume that the image passed bysecond portion 1504 of blockingregion array 302 is a three-dimensional image. In this case, a viewer viewing the two-dimensional image passed byfirst portion 1502 of blockingregion array 302 will perceive every pixel in the portion ofpixel array 212 that is aligned withfirst portion 1502 of blockingregion array 302. If the viewer is also viewing the three-dimensional image passed bysecond portion 1504 of blockingregion array 302, then each of the viewer's eyes will perceive only one half of the pixels in the portion ofpixel array 212 that is aligned withsecond portion 1504 of blockingregion array 302. This is because one half of the pixels in the relevant portion ofpixel array 212 will be perceived as a first two-dimensional image by one eye of the viewer and the other half of the pixels will be perceived as a second two-dimensional image that is perceived by the other eye of the viewer. - Assume now instead that multi-view three-dimensional content is passed by
second portion 1504 of blockingregion array 302. As used herein, the term “multi-view three dimensional content” refers to content in which multiple three-dimensional images are embedded, wherein the position of a viewer dictates which of the multiple three-dimensional images is currently perceived. Multi-view three-dimensional content will thus be formed from some multiple of the two two-dimensional images normally required to generate a single three-dimensional image (e.g., four two-dimensional images to provide two three-dimensional images, six two-dimensional images to provided three three-dimensional images, etc.). As also used herein, the term N-view three-dimensional content indicates that N three-dimensional images are embedded in the content, wherein each three-dimensional image is formed from two distinct two-dimensional images. Thus, 8-view three-dimensional content will comprise 8 different three-dimensional images formed from 16 different underlying two-dimensional images. - Thus, if it is assumed that
second portion 1504 of blockingregion array 302 passes 2-view three-dimensional content, then each of a the viewer's eyes will perceive only one-fourth of the pixels in the portion ofpixel array 212 that is aligned withsecond portion 1504 of blockingregion array 302. This is because one fourth of the pixels in the relevant portion ofpixel array 212 will be perceived as a first two-dimensional image by one eye of the viewer and another fourth of the pixels will be perceived as a second two-dimensional image that is perceived by the other eye of the viewer. The remaining pixels will be dedicated to forming two additional two-dimensional images that are not perceived by the user. - Because the number of perceptible pixels per unit area will vary from display region to display region based on the type of image that is being presented in the region, the brightness of each display region as perceived by a viewer will vary when backlighting of uniform luminosity is provided. Thus, for example, if backlighting of uniform luminosity is provided by
backlight panel 102, a viewer perceiving a two-dimensional image in a first display region ofdisplay 116 and a three-dimensional image in a second display region ofdisplay 116 will perceive that the two-dimensional image is brighter than the three-dimensional image. This disparity in perceived brightness between display regions may lead to an unsatisfactory viewing experience for a viewer. - To address this issue, the amount of light emitted by the individual light sources that make up
backlight array 210 can be selectively controlled so that the brightness associated with each of a plurality of display regions ofdisplay system 116 can also be controlled. This enablesdisplay system 116 to provide a desired brightness level for each display region automatically and/or in response to user input. For example,backlight array 210 can be controlled such that a uniform level of brightness is achieved across different simultaneously-displayed display regions, even though the number of perceptible pixels per unit area varies from display region to display region. As another example,backlight array 210 can be controlled such that the level of brightness associated with a particular display region is increased or reduced without impacting (or without substantially impacting) the brightness of other simultaneously-displayed display regions. - To help illustrate this,
FIG. 16 depicts adisplay system 1600 that implements a controllable backlight array as described immediately above.Display system 1600 comprises one implementation ofdisplay system 200. As shown inFIG. 16 ,display system 1600 includes abacklight panel 1610, adisplay panel 1620 andparallax barrier 300. These elements may be aligned with and positioned proximate to each other to create an integrated display unit. - As further shown in
FIG. 16 ,display panel 1620 includes apixel array 1622. Each of the pixels in afirst portion 1624 ofpixel array 1622 is individually controlled by a pixel array controller (such aspixel array controller 206 ofFIG. 2 ) to pass a selected amount of light produced bybacklight panel 1610, thereby producing display-generated light representative of a single two-dimensional image. Each of the pixels in asecond portion 1626 ofpixel array 1622 is individually controlled by the pixel array controller to pass a selected amount of light produced bybacklight panel 1610, thereby producing display-generated light representative of two two-dimensional images that, when combined by the brain of a viewer positioned in an appropriate location relative to displaysystem 1600, will be perceived as a single three-dimensional image. -
Parallax barrier 300 includes blockingregion array 302 that includes afirst portion 1502 and asecond portion 1504 as discussed above in reference toFIG. 15 .Blocking region array 302 is aligned withpixel array 1622 such thatfirst portion 1502 of blockingregion array 302 overlaysfirst portion 1624 ofpixel array 1622 andsecond portion 1504 of blockingregion array 302 overlayssecond portion 1626 ofpixel array 1622. Consistent with the example configuration discussed above in reference toFIG. 15 , a blocking array controller (such as blockingarray controller 208 ofFIG. 2 ) causes all the blocking regions withinfirst portion 1502 of blockingregion array 302 to be transparent. Thus, the two-dimensional image generated by the pixels offirst portion 1624 ofpixel array 1622 will simply be passed through to a viewer in a viewing space in front of display system 1600 (such asviewing space 108 inFIG. 2 ). Also consistent with the example configuration discussed above in reference toFIG. 15 , the blocking array controller manipulates the blocking regions withinsecond portion 1504 of blockingregion array 302 to form a plurality of parallel transparent strips alternated with parallel opaque strips, thereby creating a parallax effect that enables the two two-dimensional images generated by the pixels ofsecond portion 1626 ofpixel array 1622 to be perceived as a three-dimensional image by a viewer in the viewing space in front ofdisplay system 1600. - Assume that a viewer is positioned such that he/she can perceive both the two-dimensional image passed by
first portion 1502 of blockingregion array 302 and the three-dimensional image formed through parallax bysecond portion 1504 of blockingregion array 302. As discussed above, the pixels per unit area perceived by this viewer with respect to the two-dimensional image will be greater than the pixels per unit area perceived by this viewer with respect to the three-dimensional image. Thus, the two-dimensional image will appear brighter to the viewer than the three dimensional image when backlighting of constant luminosity is provided behindpixel array 1622. - To address this issue,
backlight panel 1610 includes abacklight array 1612 comprising an arrangement of individually addressable and controllable light sources. As shown inFIG. 16 , the light sources are arranged in a rectangular grid although other arrangements can be used. A backlight array controller (such asbacklight array controller 204 ofFIG. 2 ) causes the light sources included in afirst portion 1614 ofbacklight array 1612 to emit a first amount of light and cause the light sources included in asecond portion 1616 ofbacklight array 1612 to emit a second amount of light, wherein the second amount of light is different (e.g., greater) than the first amount of light.Backlight array 1612 is aligned withpixel array 1622 such thatfirst portion 1624 ofpixel array 1622 overlays first portion of 1614 ofbacklight array 1612 andsecond portion 1626 ofpixel array 1622 overlayssecond portion 1616 ofbacklight array 1612. By controlling the luminosity ofportions backlight array 1612 in this manner, the brightness of the two-dimensional image generated through the interaction of the pixels in first portion of 1624 ofpixel array 1622 andfirst portion 1502 of blockingregion array 302 can be kept consistent with the brightness of the three-dimensional image generated through the interaction of the pixels insecond portion 1626 ofpixel array 1622 andsecond portion 1504 of blockingregion array 302. That is to say, the luminosity ofportion 1616 ofbacklight array 1612 can be increased relative to the luminosity ofportion 1614 ofbacklight array 1612 so that the three-dimensional image will appear as bright as the two-dimensional image. - Of course, the arrangement shown in
FIG. 16 provides only a single teaching example. It should be noted that a display system in accordance with an embodiment can dynamically manipulatepixel array 1622 and blockingregion array 302 in a coordinated fashion to dynamically and simultaneously create any number of display regions of different sizes and in different locations, wherein each of the created display regions can display one of two-dimensional, three-dimensional or multi-view three-dimensional content. To accommodate this,backlight array 1612 can also be dynamically manipulated in a coordinated fashion withpixel array 1622 and blockingregion array 302 to ensure that each display region is perceived at a desired level of brightness. - To help illustrate this,
FIG. 17 depicts a configuration ofdisplay system 1600 in whichpixel array 1622 and blockingregion array 302 have been modified to create different display regions than those created by the configuration shown inFIG. 16 . In accordance with the example configuration shown inFIG. 17 , afirst portion 1722 ofpixel array 1622 and afirst portion 1732 of blockingregion array 302 have been manipulated to create a first display region that displays multi-view three-dimensional content, asecond portion 1724 ofpixel array 1622 and asecond portion 1734 of blockingregion array 302 have been manipulated to create a second display region that displays a three-dimensional image, and a third portion of 1726 ofpixel array 1622 and athird portion 1736 of blockingregion array 302 have been manipulated to create a third display region that displays a two-dimensional image. To independently control the brightness of each of the first, second and third display regions, the amount of light emitted by light sources included within afirst portion 1712, asecond portion 1714 and athird portion 1716 ofbacklight array 1612 can respectively be controlled. For example, the light sources withinfirst portion 1712 may be controlled to provide greater luminosity than the light sources withinsecond portion 1714 andthird portion 1716 as the number of perceivable pixels per unit area will be smallest in the first display region with whichfirst portion 1712 is aligned. In further accordance with this example, the light sources withinsecond portion 1714 may be controlled to provide greater luminosity than the light sources withinthird portion 1716 since the number of perceivable pixels per unit area will be smaller in the second display region with whichsecond portion 1714 is aligned than the third display region with whichthird portion 1716 is aligned. Of course, if uniform luminosity is not desired across the various display regions then other control schemes may be used. - In the arrangements shown in
FIGS. 16 and 17 , there is a one-to-one correspondence between each light source inbacklight array 1612 and every display pixel inpixel array 1622. However, this need not be the case to achieve regional brightness control. For example, in certain embodiments, the number of light sources provided inbacklight array 1612 is less than the number of pixels provided inpixel array 1622. For instance, in one embodiment, a single light source may be provided inbacklight array 1612 for every N pixels provided inpixel array 1622, wherein N is an integer greater than 1. In an embodiment in which the number of light sources inbacklight array 1612 is less than the number of pixels inpixel array 1622, each light source may be arranged so that it provides backlighting for a particular group of pixels inpixel array 1622, although this is only an example. In alternate embodiments, the number of light sources provided inbacklight array 1612 is greater than the number of pixels provided inpixel array 1622. - Also, in the examples described above, light sources in
backlight array 1612 are described as being individually controllable. However, in alternate embodiments, light sources inbacklight array 1612 may only be controllable in groups. This may facilitate a reduction in the complexity of the control infrastructure associated withbacklight array 210. In still further embodiments, light sources inbacklight array 1612 may be controllable both individually and in groups. - It is also noted that although
FIGS. 16 and 17 show display system configurations in which a pixel array is disposed between a backlight array of individually addressable and controllable light sources and a blocking region array of an adaptable parallax barrier, in alternate implementations the blocking region array may be disposed between the pixel array and the backlight array (see, e.g.,FIG. 1A ). In such alternate implementations, selective control of the luminosity of groups or individual ones of the light sources in the backlight array may also be used to vary the backlighting luminosity associated with different display regions created by the interaction of the backlight array, the blocking region array and the pixel array. - A method for operating a display system that utilizes a backlight panel such as that described above will now be described with reference to
flowchart 1800 ofFIG. 18 . The method offlowchart 1800 may be performed, for example, bydisplay system 200 ofFIG. 2 . However, the method is not limited to that embodiment and may be implemented by other display systems. - As shown in
FIG. 18 , the method offlowchart 1800 begins atstep 1802 in which an amount of light emitted by each light source in an array of light sources included in a backlight panel is individually controlled. For example, with reference tosystem 200 ofFIG. 2 ,backlight array controller 204 may issue a control signal 216 (which may itself include one or more distinct control signals) tobacklight array 210 included inbacklight panel 102 to individually control an amount of light emitted by each light source inbacklight array 210. - At
step 1804, an amount of light originating from the backlight panel that is passed by each pixel in an array of pixels included in a display panel that is disposed proximate to the backlight panel is controlled. For example, with reference tosystem 200 ofFIG. 2 ,pixel array controller 206 may issue a control signal 218 (which may itself include one or more distinct control signals) topixel array 212 included indisplay panel 104 to control the amount of light originating frombacklight panel 102 that is passed by each pixel inpixel array 212. - At
step 1806, an adaptable parallax barrier is operated in conjunction with the backlight panel and the display panel to selectively generate one or more two-dimensional or three-dimensional user-viewable images. In accordance with one embodiment in which the display panel is disposed between the backlight panel and the adaptable parallax barrier, this step may involve controlling the adaptable parallax barrier to filter the light passed by the pixels in the array of pixels to selectively generate one or more two-dimensional or three-dimensional images. For example, with reference tosystem 200 ofFIG. 2 , blockingarray controller 208 may issue a control signal 220 (which may itself include one or more distinct control signals) to blockingregion array 214 ofparallax barrier 106 to cause blockingregion array 214 to filter the light passed by the pixels inpixel array 212 to selectively generate one or more two-dimensional or three-dimensional images. These images may be viewable byusers 222 located inviewing space 108. In accordance with an alternative embodiment in which the adaptable parallax barrier is disposed between the backlight panel and the display panel, this step may involve controlling the adaptable parallax barrier to filter the light passed by the backlight panel to the pixels in the array of pixels to selectively generate one or more two-dimensional or three-dimensional images. - The method described above in reference to
flowchart 1800 ofFIG. 18 may advantageously be used to independently control the brightness of different display regions generated by a display system to simultaneously display corresponding two-dimensional images, three-dimensional images, and multi-view three-dimensional content. To help illustrate this,FIG. 19 depicts aflowchart 1900 of a method that represents a particular implementation offlowchart 1800 ofFIG. 18 . Like the method offlowchart 1800, the method offlowchart 1900 may be performed bydisplay system 200 ofFIG. 2 , although the method may also be implemented by other display systems. - As shown in
FIG. 19 , the method offlowchart 1900 begins atstep 1902 in which an adaptable parallax barrier is operated in conjunction with a backlight panel and a display panel to generate first user-viewable content in a first display region associated with a first subset of pixels in the array of pixels and to simultaneously generate second user-viewable content in a second display region associated with a second subset of pixels in the array of pixels.Step 1902 may represent, for example, one manner of performingstep 1806 offlowchart 1800. With respect toexample display system 200 ofFIG. 2 , this step may be carried out, for example, when blockingarray controller 208 issues a control signal 220 (which may itself include one or more distinct control signals) to blockingregion array 214 ofparallax barrier 106 to cause blockingregion array 214 to filter the light passed by a first subset of pixels inpixel array 212 to generate first user-viewable content in a first display region and to simultaneously filter light passed by a second subset of pixels inpixel array 212 to generate second user-viewable content in a second display region. Examples of such display regions are shown, for example, inFIGS. 16 and 17 . For example, inFIG. 16 ,first portion 1502 of blockingregion array 302 filtersfirst portion 1624 of pixel array 1622 (which is analogous to the first subset of pixels referred to above) to form a first display region that provides first user-viewable content in the form of a two-dimensional image. Likewise, inFIG. 16 ,second portion 1504 of blockingregion array 302 filterssecond portion 1626 of pixel array 1622 (which is analogous to the second subset of pixels referred to above) to form a second display region that provides second user-viewable content in the form of at least one three-dimensional image. - At
step 1904, a first subset of an array of light sources is controlled to define a first backlight region having first brightness characteristics, the first backlight region being aligned with the first display region.Step 1904 may represent, for example, a step performed as part of performingstep 1802 offlowchart 1800. With respect toexample display system 200 ofFIG. 2 , this step may be carried out whenbacklight array controller 204 issues a control signal 216 (which may itself include one or more distinct control signals) tobacklight array 210 included inbacklight panel 102 to control the amount of light emitted by each light source in a first subset of the light sources inbacklight array 210. An example of such a subset of light sources isfirst portion 1614 ofbacklight array 1612 which is controlled to provide a desired level of brightness to a first display region with which it is aligned, wherein the first display region is formed through the interaction offirst portion 1624 ofpixel array 1622 andfirst portion 1502 of blockingregion array 302. - At
step 1906, a second subset of the array of light sources is controlled to define a second backlight region having second brightness characteristics, the second backlight region being aligned with the second display region.Step 1906 may represent, for example, another step performed as part of performingstep 1802 offlowchart 1800. With respect toexample display system 200 ofFIG. 2 , this step may be carried out whenbacklight array controller 204 issues a control signal 216 (which may itself include one or more distinct control signals) tobacklight array 210 included inbacklight panel 102 to control the amount of light emitted by each light source in a second subset of the light sources inbacklight array 210. An example of such a subset of light sources issecond portion 1616 ofbacklight array 1612 which is controlled to provide a desired level of brightness to a second display region with which it is aligned, wherein the second display region is formed through the interaction ofsecond portion 1626 ofpixel array 1622 andsecond portion 1504 of blockingregion array 302. - Although the foregoing method describes the definition of first and second backlight regions having different brightness characteristics, persons skilled in the relevant art(s) will readily appreciate that embodiments described herein are capable of defining any number of backlight regions having different brightness characteristics as needed to support any number of display regions.
- In one embodiment, the first user-viewable content referenced in the foregoing method comprises a two-dimensional image and the second user-viewable content comprises a three-dimensional image. Since the number of viewable pixels per unit area will be less for a three-dimensional image than for a two-dimensional image, the foregoing method can advantageously be used to increase the backlighting in a region behind the pixels that are used to form the three-dimensional image relative to the backlighting in a region behind the pixels that are used to form the two-dimensional image, thereby reducing a perceived disparity in brightness between the two images.
- In another embodiment, the first user-viewable content referenced in the foregoing method comprises a three-dimensional image and the second user-viewable content comprises multi-view three-dimensional content. Since the number of viewable pixels per unit area will be less for multi-view three-dimensional content than for a single three-dimensional image, the foregoing method can advantageously be used to increase the backlighting in a region behind the pixels that are used to form the multi-view three-dimensional content relative to the backlighting in a region behind the pixels that are used to form the three-dimensional image, thereby reducing a perceived disparity in brightness between the multi-view three-dimensional content and the three-dimensional image.
- The regional backlighting capability described above can also advantageously be used to independently control the perceived brightness of the first user-viewable content and the second user-viewable content. Such independent control may be performed automatically in accordance with a predefined brightness control scheme and/or in response to user input received by the display system. It is further noted that the regional backlighting capability described above can advantageously be used in display system configurations in accordance with that shown in
FIG. 1A (display panel disposed between backlighting panel and adaptable parallax barrier) and also in display system configurations in accordance with that shown inFIG. 1B (adaptable parallax barrier disposed between backlighting panel and display panel). - The foregoing section described a system and method for controlling the brightness of different simultaneously-displayed display regions of a display system based on the use of a backlight array comprising a plurality of individually-controllable light sources. An alternative embodiment for achieving independent region-by-region brightness control will now be described that may be used in display systems that do not include such a backlight array. A block diagram of such a display system, denoted
display system 2000, is shown inFIG. 20 . -
Display system 2000 ofFIG. 20 is another example implementation ofsystem 100 shown inFIG. 1 . As shown inFIG. 20 ,display system 2000 includes adisplay controller 2002 and display device 116 (which includesbacklight panel 102,display panel 104 and parallax barrier 106). As further shown inFIG. 20 ,display panel 104 includes apixel array 2010 andparallax barrier 106 includes a blockingregion array 2012. Furthermore,display controller 2002 includes abacklight controller 2004, apixel array controller 2006, and ablocking array controller 2008. - Unlike the backlight panel shown in
system 200 ofFIG. 2 ,backlight panel 102 insystem 2000 does not include a backlight array of independently-controllable light sources. Rather,backlight panel 102 insystem 2000 is intended to represent a conventional backlight panel that is designed to produce a sheet of light of uniform luminosity for illuminating pixels inpixel array 2010. Thus, insystem 2000,backlight panel 102 comprises one or more light source(s), the brightness of which may only be controlled in unison bybacklight controller 2004 through the transmission of a control signal 2014 (which may itself comprise one or more distinct control signals). For example,backlight controller 2004 may cause the light source(s) included inbacklight panel 102 to be turned on or off in unison or may cause the light emitted by each light source(s) included inbacklight panel 102 to be increased or reduced in unison. -
Pixel array 2010 is analogous topixel array 212 described above in detail in reference tosystem 200 ofFIG. 2 . As such, each pixel inpixel array 2010 is individually addressable and controllable to select an amount of light originating frombacklight panel 102 that will be passed thereby, thus allowing the intensity of each pixel to be varied. -
Parallax barrier 106 is positioned proximate to a surface ofpixel array 2010.Blocking region array 2012 is a layer ofparallax barrier 106 that includes a plurality of blocking regions arranged in an array and is analogous to blockingregion array 214 as described above in reference tosystem 200 ofFIG. 2 . Thus, each blocking region of blockingregion array 2012 is configured to be selectively opaque or transparent. -
Display controller 2002 is configured to generate control signals to enabledisplay device 116 to display two-dimensional and three-dimensional images tousers 2020 inviewing space 108. For example, pixel array controller 2006 (which is analogous topixel array controller 206 described above in reference tosystem 200 ofFIG. 2 ) is configured to generate a control signal 2016 that is received bypixel array 2010. Control signal 2016 may include one or more control signals used to cause pixels ofpixel array 2010 to emit display-generatedlight 112 of particular desired colors and/or intensity. Blocking array controller 2008 (which is analogous to blockingarray controller 208 described above in reference tosystem 200 ofFIG. 2 ) is configured to generate acontrol signal 2018 that is received by blockingregion array 2012.Control signal 2018 may include one or more control signals used to cause each of the blocking regions of blockingregion array 2012 to be transparent or opaque. In this manner, blockingregion array 2012 filters display-generatedlight 112 to generate filtered light 114 that includes one or more two-dimensional and/or three-dimensional images that may be viewed byusers 2020 inviewing space 108. - As will be appreciated by persons skilled in the relevant art(s) based on the teachings provided herein,
system 2000 may be utilized to simultaneously display two-dimensional and three-dimensional images in different display regions by selectively modifying portions of blockingregion array 2012 that correspond to different areas ofpixel array 2010. As discussed above, a viewer that is capable of simultaneously viewing a two-dimensional image in a first display region and a three-dimensional image in a second display region will perceive a different number of pixels per unit area in each display region. This will result in each display region having a different perceived brightness when backlighting of uniform luminosity is provided bybacklight panel 102, which may lead to an unsatisfactory viewing experience for a viewer. - To address this issue, the amount of light passed by the individual pixels that make up
pixel array 2010 can be selectively controlled so that the brightness associated with each of a plurality of display regions ofdisplay system 116 can also be controlled. This enablesdisplay system 116 to provide a desired brightness level for each display region automatically and/or in response to user input. For example, the intensity of the pixels inpixel array 2010 can be controlled such that a uniform level of brightness is achieved across different simultaneously-displayed display regions, even though the number of perceptible pixels per unit area varies from display region to display region. As another example, the intensity of the pixels inpixel array 2010 can be controlled such that the level of brightness associated with a particular display region is increased or reduced without impacting (or without substantially impacting) the brightness of other simultaneously-displayed display regions. - To help illustrate this,
FIG. 21 depicts adisplay system 2100 that implements a regional brightness control scheme based on pixel intensity as described immediately above.Display system 2100 comprises one implementation ofdisplay system 2000. As shown inFIG. 21 ,display system 2100 includes adisplay panel 2102 and aparallax barrier 2112.Display panel 2102 is one example ofdisplay panel 104 ofFIG. 20 whileparallax barrier 2112 is one example ofparallax barrier 106 ofFIG. 20 .Display system 2100 also includes a backlight panel, although this element is not shown inFIG. 21 for ease of illustration. These elements may be aligned with and positioned proximate to each other to create an integrated display unit. - As further shown in
FIG. 21 ,display panel 2102 includes apixel array 2104. Each of the pixels in afirst portion 2106 ofpixel array 2104 is individually controlled by a pixel array controller (such aspixel array controller 2006 ofFIG. 20 ) to pass a selected amount of light produced by a backlight panel (not shown inFIG. 20 ), thereby producing display-generated light representative of a single two-dimensional image. Each of the pixels in asecond portion 2108 ofpixel array 2104 is individually controlled by the pixel array controller to pass a selected amount of light produced by the backlight panel, thereby producing display-generated light representative of two two-dimensional images that, when combined by the brain of a viewer positioned in an appropriate location relative to displaysystem 2100, will be perceived as a single three-dimensional image. -
Parallax barrier 2112 includes blockingregion array 2114 that includes afirst portion 2116 and asecond portion 2118.Blocking region array 2114 is aligned withpixel array 2104 such thatfirst portion 2116 of blockingregion array 2114 overlaysfirst portion 2106 ofpixel array 2104 andsecond portion 2118 of blockingregion array 2112 overlayssecond portion 2108 ofpixel array 2104. A blocking array controller (such as blockingarray controller 2008 ofFIG. 20 ) causes all the blocking regions withinfirst portion 2116 of blockingregion array 2114 to be transparent. Thus, the two-dimensional image generated by the pixels offirst portion 2106 ofpixel array 2104 will simply be passed through to a viewer in a viewing space in front of display system 2100 (such asviewing space 108 inFIG. 20 ). Furthermore, the blocking array controller manipulates the blocking regions withinsecond portion 2118 of blockingregion array 2114 to form a plurality of parallel transparent strips alternated with parallel opaque strips, thereby creating a parallax effect that enables the two two-dimensional images generated by the pixels ofsecond portion 2108 ofpixel array 2104 to be perceived as a three-dimensional image by a viewer in the viewing space in front ofdisplay system 2100. - Assume that a viewer is positioned such that he/she can perceive both the two-dimensional image passed by
first portion 2116 of blockingregion array 2114 and the three-dimensional image formed through parallax bysecond portion 2118 of blockingregion array 2114. As discussed above, the pixels per unit area perceived by this viewer with respect to the two-dimensional image will be greater than the pixels per unit area perceived by this viewer with respect to the three-dimensional image. Thus, the two-dimensional image will appear brighter to the viewer than the three dimensional image when backlighting of constant luminosity is provided behindpixel array 2104. - To address this issue, the pixel array controller may selectively cause the pixels included in
first portion 2106 ofpixel array 2104 to pass less light from the backlight panel (i.e., become less intense), thereby reducing the brightness of the two-dimensional image produced from the pixels infirst portion 2106 ofpixel array 2104. Alternatively or additionally, the pixel array controller may selectively cause the pixels included insecond portion 2108 ofpixel array 2104 to pass more light from the backlight panel (i.e., become more intense), thereby increasing the brightness of the three-dimensional image produced from the pixels insecond portion 2108 ofpixel array 2104. By controlling the intensity of the pixels inportions pixel array 2104 in this manner, the brightness of the two-dimensional image produced from the pixels infirst portion 2106 ofpixel array 2104 and the brightness of the three-dimensional image produced from the pixels insecond portion 2108 ofpixel array 2104 can be kept consistent. Additionally, by providing independent control over the intensity of the pixels inportions pixel array 2104, independent control over the brightness of the two-dimensional and three-dimensional images generated therefrom can also be achieved. - Of course, the arrangement shown in
FIG. 21 provides only a single teaching example. It should be noted that a display system in accordance with an embodiment can dynamically manipulatepixel array 2104 and blockingregion array 2114 in a coordinated fashion to dynamically and simultaneously create any number of display regions of different sizes and in different locations, wherein each of the created display regions can display one of two-dimensional, three-dimensional or multi-view three-dimensional content. To accommodate this, the intensity of the pixels inpixel array 2104 can also be dynamically manipulated in a coordinated fashion to ensure that each display region is perceived at a desired level of brightness. - A method for operating a display system that utilizes a regional brightness control scheme based on pixel intensity such as that described above will now be described with reference to
flowchart 2200 ofFIG. 22 . The method offlowchart 2200 may be performed, for example, bydisplay system 2000 ofFIG. 20 . However, the method is not limited to that embodiment and may be implemented by other display systems. - As shown in
FIG. 22 , the method offlowchart 2000 begins atstep 2202 in which an adaptable parallax barrier is operated in conjunction with an array of pixels in a display panel and a backlight panel to generate first user-viewable content in a first display region associated with a first subset of pixels in the array of pixels and to generate second user-viewable content in a second display region associated with a second subset of pixels in the array of pixels. In accordance with one embodiment in which the display panel is disposed between the backlight panel and the adaptable parallax barrier,step 2202 may involve controlling the adaptable parallax barrier to filter the light passed by the first subset of pixels in the array of pixels to generate the first user-viewable content in the first display region and to filter the light passed by the second subset of pixels in the array of pixels to generate the second user-viewable content in the second display region. With respect toexample display system 2000 ofFIG. 20 , this step may be carried out when blockingarray controller 2008 issues a control signal 2018 (which may itself include one or more distinct control signals) to blockingregion array 2012 ofparallax barrier 106 to cause blockingregion array 2012 to filter the light passed by a first subset of pixels inpixel array 2010 to generate first user-viewable content in a first display region and to filter the light passed by a second subset of pixels inpixel array 2010 to generate second user-viewable content in a second display region. With reference to the example ofFIG. 21 , the first subset of pixels may befirst portion 2106 ofpixel array 2104 and the first user-viewable content may be the two-dimensional image formed by those pixels. Also, with continued reference to the example ofFIG. 21 , the second subset of pixels may besecond portion 2108 ofpixel array 2104 and the second user-viewable content may be the three-dimensional image formed by those pixels in conjunction withsecond portion 2118 of blockingregion array 2114. In accordance with one embodiment in which the adaptable parallax barrier is disposed between the backlight panel and the display panel,step 2202 may involve controlling the adaptable parallax barrier to filter the light passed by the backlight panel to the first subset of pixels in the array of pixels to generate the first user-viewable content in the first display region and to filter the light passed by the backlight panel to the second subset of pixels in the array of pixels to generate the second user-viewable content in the second display region. - At
step 2204, the amount of light passed by one or more pixels in the first subset of pixels is selectively increased or reduced to increase or reduce the brightness of the first display region. This step may be performed based on the type of content (e.g., two-dimensional content, three-dimensional content, multi-view three-dimensional content) being displayed by the first display region. With respect toexample display system 2000 ofFIG. 20 , this step may be carried out whenpixel array controller 2006 issues a control signal 2016 (which may itself include one or more distinct control signals) topixel array 2010 that causes the amount of light passed by one or more pixels in the first subset of pixels ofpixel array 2010 to be increased or reduced. With reference to the example ofFIG. 21 , this step may involve increasing or reducing the amount of light passed by one or more pixels infirst portion 2106 ofpixel array 2104. - At
step 2206, the amount of light passed by one or more pixels in the second subset of pixels is selectively increased or reduced to increase or reduce the brightness of the second display region. This step may be performed based on the type of content (e.g., two-dimensional content, three-dimensional content, multi-view three-dimensional content) being displayed by the second display region. With respect toexample display system 2000 ofFIG. 20 , this step may be carried out whenpixel array controller 2006 issues a control signal 2006 (which may itself include one or more distinct control signals) topixel array 2010 that causes the amount of light passed by one or more pixels in the second subset of pixels ofpixel array 2010 to be increased or reduced. With reference to the example ofFIG. 21 , this step may involve increasing or reducing the amount of light passed by one or more pixels insecond portion 2108 ofpixel array 2104. - The method described above in reference to
flowchart 2200 ofFIG. 22 may advantageously be used to independently control the brightness of different display regions generated by a display system to simultaneously display corresponding two-dimensional images, three-dimensional images, and multi-view three-dimensional content. Although the foregoing method describes controlling the brightness of first and second display regions, persons skilled in the relevant art(s) will readily appreciate that embodiments described herein are capable of controlling the brightness of any number of display regions. - In one embodiment, the first user-viewable content referenced in the foregoing method comprises a two-dimensional image and the second user-viewable content comprises a three-dimensional image. Since the number of viewable pixels per unit area will be less for a three-dimensional image than for a two-dimensional image, the foregoing method can advantageously be used to increase the intensity of the pixels that are used to form the three-dimensional image and/or reduce the intensity of the pixels that are used to form the two-dimensional image, thereby reducing a perceived disparity in brightness between the two images.
- In another embodiment, the first user-viewable content referenced in the foregoing method comprises a three-dimensional image and the second user-viewable content comprises multi-view three-dimensional content. Since the number of viewable pixels per unit area will be less for multi-view three-dimensional content than for a single three-dimensional image, the foregoing method can advantageously be used to increase the intensity of the pixels that are used to form the multi-view three-dimensional content and/or reduce the intensity of the pixels that are used to form the three-dimensional image, thereby reducing a perceived disparity in brightness between the multi-view three-dimensional content and the three-dimensional image.
- The regional brightness control capability described above can also advantageously be used to independently control the perceived brightness of the first user-viewable content and the second user-viewable content. Such independent control may be performed automatically in accordance with a predefined brightness control scheme and/or in response to user input received by the display system.
- In one embodiment, a regional brightness control scheme combines the use of a backlight array of independently-controllable light sources as described in the preceding section with regional pixel intensity control. The advantages of such a control scheme will now be described with reference to
FIG. 23 .FIG. 23 illustrates a front perspective view ofdisplay panel 1620, which was described above in reference toFIG. 16 . Consistent with the description ofFIG. 16 provided above,display panel 1620 includes apixel array 1622 that includes afirst portion 1624 and asecond portion 1626, wherein each offirst portion 1624 andsecond portion 1626 includes a different subset of the pixels inpixel array 1622. As further described above in reference toFIG. 16 ,first portion 1624 ofpixel array 1622 is illuminated by backlighting provided by an alignedfirst portion 1614 ofbacklight array 1612, which is a component of backlight panel 1610 (not shown inFIG. 23 ).Second portion 1626 ofpixel array 1622 is illuminated by backlighting provided by an alignedsecond portion 1616 ofbacklight array 1612. In one example the amount of light emitted by each light source insecond portion 1616 ofbacklight array 1612 to illuminatesecond portion 1626 ofpixel array 1622 is controlled such that it is greater than the amount of light emitted by each light source infirst portion 1614 ofbacklight array 1612 to illuminatefirst portion 1624 ofpixel array 1622. This control scheme may be applied, for example, to cause images formed from the different portions ofpixel array 1622 to appear to have a uniform brightness level. - However, the difference in the amount of light emitted by each light source in first and
second portions backlight array 1612 to illuminate corresponding first andsecond portions pixel array 1624 may also give rise to undesired visual artifacts. In particular, the difference may cause pixels in boundary areas immediately outside ofsecond portion 1626 ofpixel array 1622 to appear brighter than desired in relation to other pixels infirst portion 1624 ofpixel array 1622. For example, as shown inFIG. 23 , the pixels inboundary area 2302 immediately outside ofsecond portion 1626 ofpixel array 1622 may appear brighter than desired in relation to other pixels infirst portion 1624 ofpixel array 1622. This may be due to the fact that the increased luminosity provided by the light sources insecond portion 1616 ofbacklight array 1612 has “spilled over” to impact the pixels inboundary area 2302, causing those pixels to be brighter than desired. Conversely, the difference may cause pixels in boundary areas immediately inside ofsecond portion 1626 ofpixel array 1622 to appear dimmer than desired in relation to other pixels insecond portion 1626 ofpixel array 1622. For example, as shown inFIG. 23 , the pixels inboundary area 2304 immediately inside ofsecond portion 1626 ofpixel array 1622 may appear dimmer than desired in relation to other pixels insecond portion 1626 ofpixel array 1622. This may be due to the fact that the reduced luminosity of the light sources insecond portion 1616 ofbacklight array 1612 has “spilled over” to impact the pixels inboundary area 2304, causing those pixels to be dimmer than desired. - To address this issue, an embodiment may selectively control the amount of light passed by the pixels located in
boundary region 2302 orboundary region 2304 to compensate for the undesired visual effects. For example, with respect toexample display system 200 described above in reference toFIG. 2 ,pixel array controller 206 may selectively cause the pixels included inboundary area 2302 ofpixel array 1622 to pass less light from the backlight panel (i.e., become less intense), thereby reducing the brightness of the pixels inboundary area 2302, thus compensating for an undesired increase in brightness due to “spill over” from light sources insecond portion 1616 ofbacklight array 1612. Alternatively or additionally,pixel array controller 206 may selectively cause the pixels included inboundary area 2304 ofpixel array 1622 to pass more light from the backlight panel (i.e., become more intense), thereby increasing the brightness of the pixels inboundary area 2304, thus compensating for an undesired reduction in brightness due to “spill over” from light sources infirst portion 1614 ofbacklight array 1612. By controlling the intensity of the pixels inboundary areas - The illustration provided in
FIG. 23 provides only one example of undesired visual effects that can arise from the use of a backlight array to provide regional brightness control. Persons skilled in the relevant art(s) will appreciate that many different display regions having many different brightness characteristics can be simultaneously generated by a display system in accordance with embodiments, thereby giving rise to different undesired visual effects relating to the brightness of boundary areas inside and outside of the different display regions. In each case, the intensity of pixels located in such boundaries areas can be selectively increased or reduced to mitigate or avoid such undesired visual effects. - A method for implementing regional brightness control in a display system that combines the use of a backlight array of independently-controllable light sources with regional pixel intensity control such as that discussed above will now be described with reference to
flowchart 2400 ofFIG. 24 . The method offlowchart 2400 may be performed, for example, bydisplay system 200 ofFIG. 2 . However, the method is not limited to that embodiment and may be implemented by other display systems. - As shown in
FIG. 24 , the method offlowchart 2400 begins atstep 2402 in which an adaptable parallax barrier is operated in conjunction with a display panel that includes an array of pixels and a backlight panel that includes an array of light sources to generate first user-viewable content in a first display region associated with a first pixel region in the array of pixels and to simultaneously generate second user-viewable content in a second display region associated with a second pixel region in the array of pixels to, the second pixel region being adjacent to the first pixel region. In accordance with an example embodiment in which the display panel is disposed between the backlight panel and the adaptable parallax barrier, this step may involve controlling the adaptable parallax barrier to filter light passed by the first pixel region in the array of pixels to generate the first user-viewable content in the first display region and to simultaneously filter light passed by the second pixel region in the array of pixels to generate the second user-viewable content in the second display region, the second pixel region being adjacent to the first pixel region. Each of the first and second pixel regions may comprise a different subset of pixels in the array of pixels. With respect toexample display system 200 ofFIG. 2 , this step may be carried out when blockingarray controller 208 issues a control signal 220 (which may itself include one or more distinct control signals) to blockingregion array 214 ofparallax barrier 106 to cause blockingregion array 214 to filter the light passed by a first pixel region inpixel array 212 to generate first user-viewable content in a first display region and to simultaneously filter light passed by a second pixel region inpixel array 212 that is adjacent to the first pixel region to generate second user-viewable content in a second display region. Examples of such display regions are shown, for example, inFIGS. 16 and 17 . For example, inFIG. 16 ,first portion 1502 of blockingregion array 302 filtersfirst portion 1624 of pixel array 1622 (which is analogous to the first pixel region referred to above) to form a first display region that provides first user-viewable content in the form of a two-dimensional image. Likewise, inFIG. 16 ,second portion 1504 of blockingregion array 302 filterssecond portion 1626 of pixel array 1622 (which is adjacent tofirst portion 1624 ofpixel array 1622 and is analogous to the second pixel region referred to above) to form a second display region that provides second user-viewable content in the form of at least one three-dimensional image. - At
step 2404, a first subset of an array of light sources is controlled to define a first backlight region having first brightness characteristics, the first backlight region being aligned with the first display region. With respect toexample display system 200 ofFIG. 2 , this step may be carried out whenbacklight array controller 204 issues a control signal 216 (which may itself include one or more distinct control signals) tobacklight array 210 included inbacklight panel 102 to control the amount of light emitted by each light source in a first subset of the light sources inbacklight array 210. An example of such a subset of light sources isfirst portion 1614 ofbacklight array 1612 which is controlled to provide a desired level of brightness to a first display region with which it is aligned, wherein the first display region is formed through the interaction offirst portion 1624 ofpixel array 1622 andfirst portion 1502 of blockingregion array 302. - At
step 2406, a second subset of the array of light sources is controlled to define a second backlight region having second brightness characteristics, the second backlight region being aligned with the second display region. With respect toexample display system 200 ofFIG. 2 , this step may be carried out whenbacklight array controller 204 issues a control signal 216 (which may itself include one or more distinct control signals) tobacklight array 210 included inbacklight panel 102 to control the amount of light emitted by each light source in a second subset of the light sources inbacklight array 210. An example of such a subset of light sources issecond portion 1616 ofbacklight array 1612 which is controlled to provide a desired level of brightness to a second display region with which it is aligned, wherein the second display region is formed through the interaction ofsecond portion 1626 ofpixel array 1622 andsecond portion 1504 of blockingregion array 302. - At
step 2408, an amount of light passed by at least one pixel in a perimeter area of the first pixel region is selectively increased or reduced based on the brightness characteristics of one or both of the first backlight region and the second backlight region. With respect toexample display system 200 ofFIG. 2 , this step may be carried out whenpixel array controller 206 issues a control signal 218 (which may itself include one or more distinct control signals) topixel array 212 that causes the amount of light passed by one or more pixels in a perimeter area of the first pixel region inpixel array 212 to be selectively increased or reduced based on the brightness characteristics of one or both of the first backlight region and the second backlight region. With reference to the example ofFIG. 23 , this step may involve selectively increasing or reducing the amount of light passed by one or more pixels inboundary areas first portion 1614 andsecond portion 1616 ofbacklight array 1612. Depending upon the implementation, the amount by which the intensity of a pixel in a perimeter area is increased or reduced may be based upon a measure of disparity between the brightness of adjacent pixels, adjacent backlights, adjacent pixel regions and/or adjacent backlight regions. In still further embodiments, the amount by which the intensity of a pixel in a perimeter area is increased or reduced may be based on additional or alternative measures or factors. - In an alternative implementation,
backlight panel 102 further comprises a grating structure that limits an amount of light dispersed by each of the light sources inbacklight array 210, thereby mitigating or avoiding the “spill over” problem described above.FIG. 25 illustrates a display system 2500 that includes such a grating structure. In particular,FIG. 25 is an exploded view of a display system 2500 that includes abacklight panel 2510 that comprises abacklight array 2512 of independently-controllable light sources 2514 and agrating structure 2520.Grating structure 2520 is disposed in front ofbacklight array 2512 and aligned withbacklight array 2512 in such a manner thatindividual openings 2522 in gratingstructure 2520 align with individuallight sources 2514 inbacklight array 2512. Eachopening 2522 acts to partially block the transmission of light from a corresponding light source so that the light will not illuminate pixels other than the pixel directly in front of the light source or so that the amount of light that reaches such other pixels is reduced.FIG. 26 is a partial view ofgrating structure 2520 that provides a larger view of anindividual opening 2522. - Although grating
structure 2520 shown inFIGS. 25 and 26 is shown to havesquare openings 2522, persons skilled in the relevant art(s) will appreciate that openings having other shapes may be used to perform the function of partially block the light emitted by the light sources inbacklight array 2512. For example, circular openings, triangular openings, hexagonal openings, octagonal openings, or other shaped openings may be used. Furthermore, although gratingstructure 2520 shown inFIGS. 25 and 26 is structured such that each opening is aligned with a single light source inbacklight array 2512, in other embodiments a single opening may be aligned with a plurality of light sources in light source array. In other words, an opening in the grating structure may be used to limit the amount of light dispersed by a group of light sources rather than a single light source. - In one embodiment, grating
structure 2520 is disposed directly on top ofbacklight array 2512. In alternate embodiments, gratingstructure 2520 is disposed in front of backlight array but not directly on top ofbacklight array 2512. - In alternate embodiments, a regional brightness control scheme is implemented in a display system that does not include a backlight panel at all, but instead utilizes a display panel comprising an array of organic light emitting diodes (OLEDs) or polymer light emitting diodes (PLEDs) which function as display pixels and also provide their own illumination.
FIG. 27 is a block diagram of anexample display system 2700 in accordance with such an embodiment.Display system 2700 includes adisplay device 2712 that is capable of simultaneously displaying two-dimensional images, three-dimensional images and multi-view three-dimensional content via different display regions. - As shown in
FIG. 27 ,display device 2712 includes adisplay panel 2702 and aparallax barrier 2704.Display panel 2702 emits display-generated light 2708, which includes image information. Display-generated light 2708 is received byparallax barrier 2704, which filters display-generated light 2708 to pass filtered light 2710. For instance,parallax barrier 2704 may filter display-generated light 2708 with a plurality of barrier regions that are selectively opaque or transparent. Filtered light 2710 includes a plurality of images formed from the image information included in display-generatedlight 2708. For example, filtered light 2710 may include one or more two-dimensional images and/or one or more three-dimensional images. Filtered light 2710 is received in aviewing space 2706 proximate to displaydevice 2712. One or more users may be present inviewing space 2706 to view the two-dimensional and/or three-dimensional images included in filtered light 2710. - As shown in
FIG. 27 ,display panel 2702 includes an OLED/PLEDpixel array 2714. OLED/PLEDpixel array 2714 comprises an array of OLEDs or PLEDs, each of which is individually addressable and controllable to selectively produce light of a desired color and intensity. Unlike the LCD pixels described above, OLED/PLED pixels provide their own illumination and thus require no backlight. -
Parallax barrier 2704 is positioned proximate to a surface of OLED/PLEDpixel array 2714 and includes a blockingregion array 2716.Blocking region array 2716 is a layer ofparallax barrier 2704 that includes a plurality of blocking regions arranged in an array and is analogous to blockingregion array 214 as described above in reference tosystem 200 ofFIG. 2 . Thus, each blocking region of blockingregion array 2716 is configured to be selectively opaque or transparent. -
Display system 2700 also includes adisplay controller 2720 that includes apixel array controller 2722 and ablocking array controller 2724.Display controller 2720 is configured to generate control signals to enabledisplay device 2712 to display two-dimensional and three-dimensional images tousers 2726 inviewing space 2706. For example,pixel array controller 2722 is configured to generate acontrol signal 2730 that is received by OLED/PLEDpixel array 2714.Control signal 2730 may include one or more control signals used to cause pixels of OLED/PLEDpixel array 2714 to emit display-generatedlight 2708 of particular desired colors and/or intensity. Blocking array controller 2724 (which is analogous to blockingarray controller 208 described above in reference tosystem 200 ofFIG. 2 ) is configured to generate acontrol signal 2732 that is received by blockingregion array 2716.Control signal 2732 may include one or more control signals used to cause each of the blocking regions of blockingregion array 2716 to be transparent or opaque. In this manner, blockingregion array 2716 filters display-generated light 2708 to generate filtered light 2710 that includes one or more two-dimensional and/or three-dimensional images that may be viewed byusers 2726 inviewing space 2706. - As will be appreciated by persons skilled in the relevant art(s) based on the teachings provided herein,
system 2700 may be utilized to simultaneously display two-dimensional and three-dimensional images in different display regions by selectively modifying portions of blockingregion array 2716 that correspond to different areas of OLED/PLEDpixel array 2714. As discussed above, a viewer that is capable of simultaneously viewing a two-dimensional image in a first display region and a three-dimensional image in a second display region will perceive a different number of pixels per unit area in each display region. This will result in each display region having a different perceived brightness when a uniform display-wide luminosity scheme is implemented by the pixels in OLED/PLEDpixel array 2714, which may lead to an unsatisfactory viewing experience for a viewer. - To address this issue, the amount of light emitted by the individual OLED/PLED pixels that make up OLED/PLED
pixel array 2714 can be selectively controlled so that the brightness associated with each of a plurality of display regions ofdisplay system 2712 can also be controlled. This enablesdisplay system 2712 to provide a desired brightness level for each display region automatically and/or in response to user input. For example, OLED/PLEDpixel array 2714 can be controlled such that a uniform level of brightness is achieved across different simultaneously-displayed display regions, even though the number of perceptible pixels per unit area varies from display region to display region. As another example, OLED/PLEDpixel array 2714 can be controlled such that the level of brightness associated with a particular display region is increased or reduced without impacting (or without substantially impacting) the brightness of other simultaneously-displayed display regions. - A method for operating a display system that implements a regional brightness control scheme by controlling the amount of light emitted by OLED/PLED pixels such as that described above will now be described with reference to
flowchart 2800 ofFIG. 28 . The method offlowchart 2800 may be performed, for example, bydisplay system 2700 ofFIG. 27 . However, the method is not limited to that embodiment and may be implemented by other display systems. - As shown in
FIG. 28 , the method offlowchart 2800 begins atstep 2802 in which a first subset of LEDs in an array of LEDs in a display panel is controlled to define a first pixel region having first brightness characteristics. With respect toexample display system 2700 ofFIG. 27 , this step may be carried out whenpixel array controller 2722 issues a control signal 2730 (which may itself include one or more distinct control signals) to OLED/PLEDpixel array 2714 to cause a first subset of the pixels in OLED/PLEDpixel array 2714 to produce display-generated light representative of one or more images at a first desired brightness level. - At
step 2804, a second subset of LEDs in the array of LEDs is controlled to define a second pixel region having second brightness characteristics. With respect toexample display system 2700 ofFIG. 27 , this step may be carried out whenpixel array controller 2722 issues a control signal 2730 (which may itself include one or more distinct control signals) to OLED/PLEDpixel array 2714 to cause a second subset of the pixels in OLED/PLEDpixel array 2714 to produce display-generated light representative of one or more images at a second desired brightness level. - At
step 2806, an adaptable parallax barrier that is positioned proximate to the display panel is configured to filter light emitted by the first pixel region to form first user-viewable content and to simultaneously filter light emitted by the second pixel region to form second user-viewable content. With respect toexample display system 2700 ofFIG. 27 , this step may be carried out when blockingarray controller 2724 issues acontrol signal 2732 to blockingregion array 2716 ofparallax barrier 2704 to cause blockingregion array 2716 to filter the display-generated light passed by the first subset of pixels in OLED/PLEDpixel array 2714, thereby generating first user-viewable content and to simultaneously filter the display-generated light passed by the second subset of pixels in OLED/PLEDpixel array 2714, thereby generating second user-viewable content. - The method described above in reference to
flowchart 2800 ofFIG. 28 may advantageously be used to independently control the brightness of different display regions generated by a display system to simultaneously display corresponding two-dimensional images, three-dimensional images, and multi-view three-dimensional content. Although the foregoing method describes controlling the brightness of images produced from the pixels in first and second pixel regions, persons skilled in the relevant art(s) will readily appreciate that embodiments described herein are capable of controlling the brightness of images produced from any number of different pixel regions. - In one embodiment, the first user-viewable content referenced in the foregoing method comprises a two-dimensional image and the second user-viewable content comprises a three-dimensional image. Since the number of viewable pixels per unit area will be less for a three-dimensional image than for a two-dimensional image, the foregoing method can advantageously be used to increase the intensity of the OLED/PLED pixels that are used to form the three-dimensional image and/or reduce the intensity of the OLED/PLED pixels that are used to form the two-dimensional image, thereby reducing a perceived disparity in brightness between the two images.
- In another embodiment, the first user-viewable content referenced in the foregoing method comprises a three-dimensional image and the second user-viewable content comprises multi-view three-dimensional content. Since the number of viewable pixels per unit area will be less for multi-view three-dimensional content than for a single three-dimensional image, the foregoing method can advantageously be used to increase the intensity of the OLED/PLED pixels that are used to form the multi-view three-dimensional content and/or reduce the intensity of the OLED/PLED pixels that are used to form the three-dimensional image, thereby reducing a perceived disparity in brightness between the multi-view three-dimensional content and the three-dimensional image.
- The regional brightness control capability described above can also advantageously be used to independently control the perceived brightness of the first user-viewable content and the second user-viewable content. Such independent control may be performed automatically in accordance with a predefined brightness control scheme and/or in response to user input received by the display system.
- Where OLED/PLED pixel regions such as those described above are adjacent to each other, it is possible that the brightness characteristics of one pixel region can impact the perceived brightness of an adjacent pixel region having different brightness characteristics, creating an undesired visual effect. For example, a first OLED/PLED pixel region having a relatively high level of brightness to support the viewing of multi-view three-dimensional content may be adjacent to a second OLED/PLED pixel region having a relatively low level of brightness to support the viewing of two-dimensional content. In this scenario, light from pixels in a perimeter area of the first OLED/PLED pixel region that are close to the boundary between the two pixel regions may “spill over” into a perimeter area of the second OLED/PLED pixel region. This may cause pixels in the perimeter area of the second OLED/PLED pixel region to appear brighter than desired in relation to other pixels in the second OLED/PLED pixel region. Conversely, pixels in the perimeter area of the first OLED/PLED pixel array may appear dimmer than desired in relation to other pixels in the first OLED/PLED pixel region because of the adjacency to the second OLED/PLED pixel region. To address this issue, it is possible to selectively increase or reduce the brightness of one or more OLED/PLED pixels in either perimeter area to reduce the “spill over” effect arising from the different brightness characteristics between the regions.
- In still further embodiments, a regional brightness control scheme is implemented in a display system that includes an adaptable parallax barrier that also supports brightness regulation via an “overlay” approach that will be described herein.
- Conceptually, embodiments described herein attempt to match and support independent regional adjustment of backlighting output to produce a non-uniform output that compensates for regional differences in an adaptable screen assembly, wherein such screen assembly has inherent regional light blocking characteristics (i.e. various parallax barrier configurations). That is, embodiments described herein attempt to maintain standard brightness across various regional screen configurations, wherein each region has differing light blocking characteristics. Also, because of backlighting dispersion in zones running along the perimeter of regional boundaries, techniques to compensate or to minimize backlighting dispersion are applied in accordance with various embodiments described herein. For example, structures such as
grating structure 2520 shown inFIGS. 25 and 26 may be applied to address this issue or pixel “lightening/darkening” techniques such as those described above may be used. - An embodiment will now be described in which a brightness regulation overlay that is either independent of or integrated with an adaptable parallax barrier is used to help achieve the aforementioned goals of maintaining standard brightness across various regional screen configurations and compensating for or minimizing backlighting dispersion. In particular,
FIG. 29 illustrates adisplay system 2900 in accordance with such an embodiment.Display system 2900 includes adisplay device 2904 and adisplay controller 2902 that can control the operation ofdisplay device 2904 so that it will simultaneously display two-dimensional images, three-dimensional images and multi-view three-dimensional content via different display regions. - As shown in
FIG. 29 ,display device 2904 includes adisplay panel 2924 and anadaptable light manipulator 2922.Display panel 2924 includes apixel array 2932 that comprises a two-dimensional array of pixels, each of which is individually addressable and controllable to selectively produce light of a desired color and intensity. Such pixels may be, for example, LCD pixels that require backlighting or OLED/PLED pixels that provide their own illumination. Control over the state of the pixels inpixel array 2932 is provided by apixel array controller 2914 withindisplay controller 2902. -
Adaptable light manipulator 2922 comprises a parallax barrier and a brightness regulation overlay. The parallax barrier may comprise a parallax barrier such asparallax barrier 106 described above in reference toFIG. 1 in which individual blocking regions in a blocking region array can be selectively rendered transparent or opaque in order to support a desired 2D, 3D, or regional 2D and/or 3D viewing experience. The brightness regulation overlay comprises an element that allows regional dimming through various tones of “grey” pixels. In one example embodiment, the parallax barrier and the brightness regulation overlay are implemented as a non-color (i.e., black, white and grayscale) LCD sandwich, although other implementations may be used. The combined adaptable parallax barrier and brightness regulation overlay provide full transparent or opaque states for each pixel, as well as a grayscale alternative that can be used to “balance out” brightness variations caused by the parallax barrier itself Control over the individual blocking regions of the parallax barrier and the individual grayscale pixels of the brightness regulation overlay is provided by parallaxbarrier control logic 2942 andoverlay control logic 2944 included withindisplay controller 2902. These elements provide coordinated signaling to the pixels of the parallax barrier and the brightness regulation overlay (collectively referred to below as the manipulator pixels) to create opaque and transparent barrier elements associated with a particular parallax barrier configuration and a grayscale support there between to allow creation of overlays. - Note that
display system 2900 can be implemented in configurations in whichdisplay panel 2924 is disposed between a backlight panel andadaptable light manipulator 2922 as well as in configurations in whichadaptable light manipulator 2922 is disposed between a backlight panel anddisplay panel 2924. In either case, the desired display of 2D/3D regions and simultaneous backlight regulation can be achieved. In an embodiment in whichpixel array 2932 ofdisplay panel 2924 comprises OLED or PLED pixels that are self-illuminating, no backlight panel is needed andadaptable light manipulator 2922 is disposed “in front of” display panel 2924 (i.e., betweendisplay panel 2924 and the users in a viewing space in front of display system 2900). -
FIG. 30 illustrates two exemplary configurations ofadaptable light manipulator 2922 in accordance with an embodiment in whichadaptable light manipulator 2922 is implemented as a light manipulating LCD sandwich with manipulator grayscale pixels. InFIG. 30 , the grayscale pixels map to the display pixels on a one-to-one basis, but that need not be the case. - A first exemplary configuration of
adaptable light manipulator 2922 is shown above the section line denoted withreference numeral 3002. In accordance with the first exemplary configuration, a3D region 3004 is created with fully transparent or fully opaque manipulator pixels that provide parallax barrier functionality and a2D region 3006 is created having continuous medium gray manipulator pixels. The medium gray manipulator pixels operate to reduce the perceived brightness of2D region 3006 to better match that of3D region 3004. It is noted that in other example configurations,2D region 3006 could instead comprise a 3D region having a number of views that is different than3D region 3004, thus also requiring brightness regulation. - In the first exemplary configuration, no boundary region compensation is performed. In the second exemplary configuration, which is shown below
section line 3002, boundary region compensation is performed. For example, aboundary region 3010 within2D region 3006 may be “lightened” to a light gray to compensate for any diminution of light that might occur near the boundary with3D region 3004. In contrast, the grayscale level of aninner portion 3008 of2D region 3006 is maintained at the same medium gray level as in the portion of2D region 3006 abovesection line 3002. As a further example, afirst boundary region 3012 and asecond boundary region 3014 within3D region 3004 comprise darker and lighter gray transitional areas, respectively, to account for light dispersion from2D region 3006. In contrast, aninner portion 3016 of3D region 3004 includes only fully transparent or fully opaque manipulator pixels consistent with a parallax barrier configuration and no brightness regulation. - In one embodiment, the configuration of
adaptable light manipulator 2922 is achieved by first creating a white through various grayscale areas that correspond to the regions and boundary areas to be formed. Once established, the manipulator pixels in these areas that comprise the opaque portions of the parallax barrier are overwritten to turn them black. Of course this two-stage approach is conceptual only and no “overwriting” need be performed. - In certain embodiments,
adaptable light manipulator 2922 comprises the only component used indisplay system 2900 for performing brightness regulation and/or boundary region compensation. In alternate embodiments,display system 2900 further utilizes any one or more of the following aforementioned techniques for performing brightness regulation and/or boundary region compensation: a backlighting array with independently-controllable light sources, a grating structure for use therewith, and/or a pixel array and associated control logic for selectively increasing or decreasing the intensity of display pixels (e.g., either LCD pixels or OLED/PLED pixels). Note that in certain embodiments (such as the one described above in reference toFIG. 30 ),adaptable light manipulator 2922 is implemented as an integrated parallax barrier and brightness regulation overlay. However, in alternate embodiments,adaptable light manipulator 2922 is implemented using a parallax barrier panel and an independent brightness regulation overlay panel. In certain embodiments, whichever elements ofdisplay system 2900 are not used to help perform brightness regulation may be replaced with more conventional counterparts. - A method for operating a display system that implements a regional brightness control scheme by using a brightness regulation overlay such as that described above will now be described with reference to
flowchart 3100 ofFIG. 31 . The method offlowchart 3100 may be performed, for example, bydisplay system 2900 ofFIG. 29 . However, the method is not limited to that embodiment and may be implemented by other display systems. - As shown in
FIG. 31 , the method offlowchart 3100 begins atstep 3102, in which a pixel array is controlled to simultaneously represent first image content via a first portion of the pixel array and second image content via a second portion of the pixel array. With continued reference to the embodiments depicted inFIGS. 29 and 30 , this step may be performed by controllingpixel array 2932 ofdisplay system 2900 to simultaneously represent first image content via a first portion ofpixel array 2932 that is aligned with2D region 3006 ofadaptable light manipulator 2922 and to represent second image content via a second portion ofpixel array 2932 that is aligned with3D region 3004 ofadaptable light manipulator 2922. - At
step 3104, at least a portion of a plurality of manipulator pixels in an adaptable light manipulator are controlled to form a first parallax barrier arrangement that causes the first image content to be perceived in a first viewing mode in a first display region and to form a second parallax barrier arrangement that causes the second image content to be perceived in a second viewing mode in a second display region. Again, with continued reference to the embodiments depicted inFIGS. 29 and 30 , this step may be performed by controlling the manipulator pixels ofadaptable light manipulator 2922 to form the particular parallax barrier arrangement shown in 2D region 3006 (in this example, the first parallax barrier arrangement being the parallax barrier being turned off entirely although this need not be the case) and to form the parallax barrier arrangement shown in3D region 3008. Note that in other embodiments, rather than forming parallax barrier arrangements for supporting 2D and 3D viewing as shown inFIG. 30 , parallax barrier arrangements for supporting different types of 3D viewing (e.g., 3D and various levels of multi-view 3D viewing) may be formed. - At
step 3106, at least a portion of the plurality of manipulator pixels in the adaptable light manipulator are controlled to be placed in a grayscale mode to regulate a perceived brightness of at least a portion of the first image content perceived in the first viewing mode in the first display region or at least a portion of the first image content perceived in the second viewing mode in the second display region. Again, with continued reference to the embodiments depicted inFIGS. 29 and 30 , this step may be performed by controlling manipulator pixels ofadaptable light manipulator 2922 in2D region 3006 so that they appear as a continuous medium gray array of manipulator pixels (as shown by the example configuration above section line 3002) thereby reducing the brightness of the image perceived in that region. Furthermore, this step may also be performed by controlling manipulator pixels ofadaptable light manipulator 2922 in selected portions of2D region 3006 and3D region 3004 to be selectively lighter or darker gray (e.g., seeboundary regions FIG. 30 ). In the latter implementation, the grayscale mode of each of the manipulator pixels may be thought of as comprising a selectable plurality of gray levels. -
FIG. 32 is a block diagram of an example practical implementation of adisplay system 3200 in accordance with an embodiment of the present invention. As shown inFIG. 32 ,display system 3200 generally comprisescontrol circuitry 3202,driver circuitry 3204 andscreen elements 3206. - As shown in
FIG. 32 ,control circuitry 3202 includes aprocessing unit 3214, which may comprise one or more general-purpose or special-purpose processors or one or more processing cores.Processing unit 3214 is connected to acommunication infrastructure 3212, such as a communication bus.Control circuitry 3202 may also include a primary or main memory (not shown inFIG. 32 ), such as random access memory (RAM), that is connected tocommunication infrastructure 3212. The main memory may have control logic stored thereon for execution byprocessing unit 3214 as well as data stored thereon that may be input to or output byprocessing unit 3214 during execution of such control logic. -
Control circuitry 3202 may also include one or more secondary storage devices (not shown inFIG. 32 ) that are connected tocommunication infrastructure 3212, including but not limited to a hard disk drive, a removable storage drive (such as an optical disk drive, a floppy disk drive, a magnetic tape drive, or the like), or an interface for communicating with a removable storage unit such as an interface for communicating with a memory card, memory stick or the like. Each of these secondary storage devices provide an additional means for storing control logic for execution byprocessing unit 3214 as well as data that may be input to or output byprocessing unit 3214 during execution of such control logic. -
Control circuitry 3202 further includes a user input interface 3216 and amedia interface 3218. User input interface 3216 is intended to generally represent any type of interface that may be used to receive user input, including but not limited to a remote control device, a traditional computer input device such as a keyboard or mouse, a touch screen, a gamepad or other type of gaming console input device, or one or more sensors including but not limited to video cameras, microphones and motion sensors.Media interface 3218 is intended to represent any type of interface that is capable of receiving media content such as video content or image content. In certain implementations,media interface 3218 may comprise an interface for receiving media content from a remote source such as a broadcast media server, an on-demand media server, or the like. In such implementations,media interface 3218 may comprise, for example and without limitation, a wired or wireless internet or intranet connection, a satellite interface, a fiber interface, a coaxial cable interface, or a fiber-coaxial cable interface.Media interface 3218 may also comprise an interface for receiving media content from a local source such as a DVD or Blu-Ray disc player, a personal computer, a personal media player, smart phone, or the like.Media content 3218 may be capable of retrieving video content from multiple sources. -
Control circuitry 3202 further includes a communication interface 3220. Communication interface 3220 enablescontrol circuitry 3202 to send control signals via acommunication medium 3262 to another communication interface 3240 withindriver circuitry 3204, thereby enablingcontrol circuitry 3202 to control the operation ofdriver circuitry 3204.Communication medium 3262 may comprise any kind of wired or wireless communication medium suitable for transmitting such control signals. - As shown in
FIG. 32 ,driver circuitry 3204 includes the aforementioned communication interface 3240 as well as pixel array driver circuitry 3242, adaptable lightmanipulator driver circuitry 3244 andbacklight driver circuitry 3246 all of which are connected thereto. Each of these driver circuitry elements is configured to receive control signals from control circuitry 3202 (via the link between communication interface 3220 and communication interface 3230) and, responsive thereto, to send selected drive signals to a corresponding hardware element withinscreen elements 3206, the drive signals causing the corresponding hardware element to operate in a particular manner. In particular, pixel array driver circuitry 3242 is configured to send selected drive signals to apixel array 3252 withinscreen elements 3206, adaptable lightmanipulator driver circuitry 3244 is configured to send selected drive signals to an adaptable light manipulator 3254 withinscreen elements 3206, andbacklight driver circuitry 3246 is configured to send selected drive signals to abacklight 3256 withinscreen elements 3206. - In one example mode of operation,
processing unit 3214 operates pursuant to control logic to receive video content viamedia interface 3218 and to generate control signals necessary to cause driver circuitry to render such video content to a screen comprised ofscreen elements 3206. The control logic that is executed byprocessing unit 3214 may be retrieved, for example, from a primary memory or a secondary storage device connected toprocessing unit 3214 viacommunication infrastructure 3212 as discussed above. The control logic may also be retrieved from some other local or remote source. Where the control logic is stored on a computer readable medium, that computer readable medium may be referred to herein as a computer program product. - Among other features,
driver circuitry 3204 may be controlled to send drive signals necessary for simultaneously displaying two-dimensional images, three-dimensional images and multi-view three-dimensional content via different display regions of the screen. The manner in whichpixel array 3252, adaptable light manipulator 3254 (e.g., an adaptable parallax barrier), andbacklight 3256 may be manipulated in a coordinated fashion to perform this function was described previously herein. Note that in accordance with certain implementations (e.g., implementations in which pixel array comprises a OLED/PLED pixel array),screen elements 3206 need not include abacklight 3256. - Driver circuitry 3205 may also be controlled to cause
screen elements 3206 to perform certain functions described elsewhere herein for regulating a perceived brightness across various regional screen configurations, wherein each region has differing light blocking characteristics, and to minimize backlighting dispersion effects that may occur between adjacent regions. For example, in accordance with an embodiment described above,backlight 3256 may comprise an array of light sources (e.g., LEDs) that may be individually driven to vary the backlighting luminosity provided topixel array 3252 on a region-by-region basis, wherein each region has differing light blocking characteristics as determined by the configuration of adaptable light manipulator 3254. As another example, in accordance with a further embodiment described above, the intensity of pixels inpixel array 3252 associated with a particular display region can also be increased or reduced in response to drive signals from pixel array driver circuitry 3242 in order to control brightness on a region-by-region or pixel-by-pixel basis. In certain embodiments,driver circuitry 3204 is controlled bycontrol circuitry 3202 to implement a combined backlight array and pixel intensity control scheme to provide desired brightness on a region-by-region basis. For example, in accordance with such embodiments, pixel array driver circuitry 3242 may be controlled to cause the intensity of pixels near a boundary of a region to be increased or reduced to correct disparities caused by the luminosity contribution (or lack thereof) from backlight sources associated with adjacent regions. In still further embodiments, a grating system is also included withinscreen elements 3206 to prevent the spilling over of light from adjacent regions. - In a still further embodiment described above, adaptable light manipulator 3254 includes both a parallax barrier and a brightness regulation overlay. In accordance with such an embodiment, adaptable light
manipulator driver circuitry 3244 may be controlled bycontrol circuitry 3202 to implement different parallax barrier configurations for different display regions and to also configure the brightness regulation overlay to achieve a standard perceived brightness across such display regions and/or to minimize dispersion effects between adjacent regions. Various ways in which adaptable light manipulator 3254 could be driven to perform these functions were described elsewhere herein. - In certain implementations,
control circuitry 3202,driver circuitry 3204 andscreen elements 3206 are all included within a single housing. For example and without limitation, all these elements may exist within a laptop computer, a tablet computer, or a telephone. In accordance with such an implementation, thelink 3260 formed between communication interfaces 3220 and 3240 may be replaced by a direction connection betweendriver circuitry 3204 andcommunication infrastructure 3212. In an alternate implementation,control circuitry 3202 is disposed within a first housing, such as set top box or personal computer, anddriver circuitry 3204 andscreen elements 3206 are disposed within a second housing, such as a television or computer monitor. The set top box may be any type of set top box including but not limited to fiber, Internet, cable, satellite, or terrestrial digital. - While various embodiments of the present invention have been described above, it should be understood that they have been presented by way of example only, and not limitation. It will be apparent to persons skilled in the relevant art that various changes in form and detail can be made therein without departing from the spirit and scope of the invention. Thus, the breadth and scope of the present invention should not be limited by any of the above-described exemplary embodiments, but should be defined only in accordance with the following claims and their equivalents.
Claims (23)
Priority Applications (3)
Application Number | Priority Date | Filing Date | Title |
---|---|---|---|
US12/982,020 US20110157257A1 (en) | 2009-12-31 | 2010-12-30 | Backlighting array supporting adaptable parallax barrier |
US14/504,095 US20150015668A1 (en) | 2009-12-31 | 2014-10-01 | Three-dimensional display system with adaptation based on viewing reference of viewer(s) |
US14/723,922 US20150264341A1 (en) | 2009-12-31 | 2015-05-28 | Communication infrastructure including simultaneous video pathways for multi-viewer support |
Applications Claiming Priority (3)
Application Number | Priority Date | Filing Date | Title |
---|---|---|---|
US29181809P | 2009-12-31 | 2009-12-31 | |
US30311910P | 2010-02-10 | 2010-02-10 | |
US12/982,020 US20110157257A1 (en) | 2009-12-31 | 2010-12-30 | Backlighting array supporting adaptable parallax barrier |
Publications (1)
Publication Number | Publication Date |
---|---|
US20110157257A1 true US20110157257A1 (en) | 2011-06-30 |
Family
ID=43797724
Family Applications (27)
Application Number | Title | Priority Date | Filing Date |
---|---|---|---|
US12/774,307 Active 2032-01-14 US8964013B2 (en) | 2009-12-31 | 2010-05-05 | Display with elastic light manipulator |
US12/774,225 Abandoned US20110157322A1 (en) | 2009-12-31 | 2010-05-05 | Controlling a pixel array to support an adaptable light manipulator |
US12/845,440 Abandoned US20110157697A1 (en) | 2009-12-31 | 2010-07-28 | Adaptable parallax barrier supporting mixed 2d and stereoscopic 3d display regions |
US12/845,409 Abandoned US20110157696A1 (en) | 2009-12-31 | 2010-07-28 | Display with adaptable parallax barrier |
US12/845,461 Active 2031-10-30 US8767050B2 (en) | 2009-12-31 | 2010-07-28 | Display supporting multiple simultaneous 3D views |
US12/982,330 Abandoned US20110157326A1 (en) | 2009-12-31 | 2010-12-30 | Multi-path and multi-source 3d content storage, retrieval, and delivery |
US12/982,362 Active 2031-02-05 US9049440B2 (en) | 2009-12-31 | 2010-12-30 | Independent viewer tailoring of same media source content via a common 2D-3D display |
US12/982,377 Abandoned US20110157327A1 (en) | 2009-12-31 | 2010-12-30 | 3d audio delivery accompanying 3d display supported by viewer/listener position and orientation tracking |
US12/982,088 Active 2032-01-06 US9066092B2 (en) | 2009-12-31 | 2010-12-30 | Communication infrastructure including simultaneous video pathways for multi-viewer support |
US12/982,031 Active 2032-12-14 US9019263B2 (en) | 2009-12-31 | 2010-12-30 | Coordinated driving of adaptable light manipulator, backlighting and pixel array in support of adaptable 2D and 3D displays |
US12/982,156 Active 2035-11-09 US9654767B2 (en) | 2009-12-31 | 2010-12-30 | Programming architecture supporting mixed two and three dimensional displays |
US12/982,069 Active 2033-05-07 US8922545B2 (en) | 2009-12-31 | 2010-12-30 | Three-dimensional display system with adaptation based on viewing reference of viewer(s) |
US12/982,140 Abandoned US20110161843A1 (en) | 2009-12-31 | 2010-12-30 | Internet browser and associated content definition supporting mixed two and three dimensional displays |
US12/982,053 Abandoned US20110157309A1 (en) | 2009-12-31 | 2010-12-30 | Hierarchical video compression supporting selective delivery of two-dimensional and three-dimensional video content |
US12/982,248 Abandoned US20110157315A1 (en) | 2009-12-31 | 2010-12-30 | Interpolation of three-dimensional video content |
US12/982,020 Abandoned US20110157257A1 (en) | 2009-12-31 | 2010-12-30 | Backlighting array supporting adaptable parallax barrier |
US12/982,273 Active 2032-08-13 US9979954B2 (en) | 2009-12-31 | 2010-12-30 | Eyewear with time shared viewing supporting delivery of differing content to multiple viewers |
US12/982,062 Active 2032-06-13 US8687042B2 (en) | 2009-12-31 | 2010-12-30 | Set-top box circuitry supporting 2D and 3D content reductions to accommodate viewing environment constraints |
US12/982,173 Active 2033-08-22 US9143770B2 (en) | 2009-12-31 | 2010-12-30 | Application programming interface supporting mixed two and three dimensional displays |
US12/982,124 Active 2033-02-08 US9124885B2 (en) | 2009-12-31 | 2010-12-30 | Operating system supporting mixed 2D, stereoscopic 3D and multi-view 3D displays |
US12/982,309 Active 2033-05-02 US9204138B2 (en) | 2009-12-31 | 2010-12-30 | User controlled regional display of mixed two and three dimensional content |
US12/982,047 Abandoned US20110157330A1 (en) | 2009-12-31 | 2010-12-30 | 2d/3d projection system |
US12/982,199 Active 2032-09-27 US8988506B2 (en) | 2009-12-31 | 2010-12-30 | Transcoder supporting selective delivery of 2D, stereoscopic 3D, and multi-view 3D content from source video |
US12/982,212 Active 2032-04-05 US9013546B2 (en) | 2009-12-31 | 2010-12-30 | Adaptable media stream servicing two and three dimensional content |
US14/504,095 Abandoned US20150015668A1 (en) | 2009-12-31 | 2014-10-01 | Three-dimensional display system with adaptation based on viewing reference of viewer(s) |
US14/616,130 Abandoned US20150156473A1 (en) | 2009-12-31 | 2015-02-06 | Transcoder supporting selective delivery of 2d, stereoscopic 3d, and multi-view 3d content from source video |
US14/723,922 Abandoned US20150264341A1 (en) | 2009-12-31 | 2015-05-28 | Communication infrastructure including simultaneous video pathways for multi-viewer support |
Family Applications Before (15)
Application Number | Title | Priority Date | Filing Date |
---|---|---|---|
US12/774,307 Active 2032-01-14 US8964013B2 (en) | 2009-12-31 | 2010-05-05 | Display with elastic light manipulator |
US12/774,225 Abandoned US20110157322A1 (en) | 2009-12-31 | 2010-05-05 | Controlling a pixel array to support an adaptable light manipulator |
US12/845,440 Abandoned US20110157697A1 (en) | 2009-12-31 | 2010-07-28 | Adaptable parallax barrier supporting mixed 2d and stereoscopic 3d display regions |
US12/845,409 Abandoned US20110157696A1 (en) | 2009-12-31 | 2010-07-28 | Display with adaptable parallax barrier |
US12/845,461 Active 2031-10-30 US8767050B2 (en) | 2009-12-31 | 2010-07-28 | Display supporting multiple simultaneous 3D views |
US12/982,330 Abandoned US20110157326A1 (en) | 2009-12-31 | 2010-12-30 | Multi-path and multi-source 3d content storage, retrieval, and delivery |
US12/982,362 Active 2031-02-05 US9049440B2 (en) | 2009-12-31 | 2010-12-30 | Independent viewer tailoring of same media source content via a common 2D-3D display |
US12/982,377 Abandoned US20110157327A1 (en) | 2009-12-31 | 2010-12-30 | 3d audio delivery accompanying 3d display supported by viewer/listener position and orientation tracking |
US12/982,088 Active 2032-01-06 US9066092B2 (en) | 2009-12-31 | 2010-12-30 | Communication infrastructure including simultaneous video pathways for multi-viewer support |
US12/982,031 Active 2032-12-14 US9019263B2 (en) | 2009-12-31 | 2010-12-30 | Coordinated driving of adaptable light manipulator, backlighting and pixel array in support of adaptable 2D and 3D displays |
US12/982,156 Active 2035-11-09 US9654767B2 (en) | 2009-12-31 | 2010-12-30 | Programming architecture supporting mixed two and three dimensional displays |
US12/982,069 Active 2033-05-07 US8922545B2 (en) | 2009-12-31 | 2010-12-30 | Three-dimensional display system with adaptation based on viewing reference of viewer(s) |
US12/982,140 Abandoned US20110161843A1 (en) | 2009-12-31 | 2010-12-30 | Internet browser and associated content definition supporting mixed two and three dimensional displays |
US12/982,053 Abandoned US20110157309A1 (en) | 2009-12-31 | 2010-12-30 | Hierarchical video compression supporting selective delivery of two-dimensional and three-dimensional video content |
US12/982,248 Abandoned US20110157315A1 (en) | 2009-12-31 | 2010-12-30 | Interpolation of three-dimensional video content |
Family Applications After (11)
Application Number | Title | Priority Date | Filing Date |
---|---|---|---|
US12/982,273 Active 2032-08-13 US9979954B2 (en) | 2009-12-31 | 2010-12-30 | Eyewear with time shared viewing supporting delivery of differing content to multiple viewers |
US12/982,062 Active 2032-06-13 US8687042B2 (en) | 2009-12-31 | 2010-12-30 | Set-top box circuitry supporting 2D and 3D content reductions to accommodate viewing environment constraints |
US12/982,173 Active 2033-08-22 US9143770B2 (en) | 2009-12-31 | 2010-12-30 | Application programming interface supporting mixed two and three dimensional displays |
US12/982,124 Active 2033-02-08 US9124885B2 (en) | 2009-12-31 | 2010-12-30 | Operating system supporting mixed 2D, stereoscopic 3D and multi-view 3D displays |
US12/982,309 Active 2033-05-02 US9204138B2 (en) | 2009-12-31 | 2010-12-30 | User controlled regional display of mixed two and three dimensional content |
US12/982,047 Abandoned US20110157330A1 (en) | 2009-12-31 | 2010-12-30 | 2d/3d projection system |
US12/982,199 Active 2032-09-27 US8988506B2 (en) | 2009-12-31 | 2010-12-30 | Transcoder supporting selective delivery of 2D, stereoscopic 3D, and multi-view 3D content from source video |
US12/982,212 Active 2032-04-05 US9013546B2 (en) | 2009-12-31 | 2010-12-30 | Adaptable media stream servicing two and three dimensional content |
US14/504,095 Abandoned US20150015668A1 (en) | 2009-12-31 | 2014-10-01 | Three-dimensional display system with adaptation based on viewing reference of viewer(s) |
US14/616,130 Abandoned US20150156473A1 (en) | 2009-12-31 | 2015-02-06 | Transcoder supporting selective delivery of 2d, stereoscopic 3d, and multi-view 3d content from source video |
US14/723,922 Abandoned US20150264341A1 (en) | 2009-12-31 | 2015-05-28 | Communication infrastructure including simultaneous video pathways for multi-viewer support |
Country Status (5)
Country | Link |
---|---|
US (27) | US8964013B2 (en) |
EP (4) | EP2357508A1 (en) |
CN (3) | CN102183840A (en) |
HK (1) | HK1161754A1 (en) |
TW (3) | TWI467234B (en) |
Cited By (37)
Publication number | Priority date | Publication date | Assignee | Title |
---|---|---|---|---|
US20110157696A1 (en) * | 2009-12-31 | 2011-06-30 | Broadcom Corporation | Display with adaptable parallax barrier |
US20110164188A1 (en) * | 2009-12-31 | 2011-07-07 | Broadcom Corporation | Remote control with integrated position, viewer identification and optical and audio test |
US20120001956A1 (en) * | 2010-07-01 | 2012-01-05 | Sony Corporation | Stereoscopic display device and display drive circuit |
US20120091918A1 (en) * | 2009-05-29 | 2012-04-19 | Koninklijke Philips Electronics N.V. | Picture selection method for modular lighting system |
US20120243084A1 (en) * | 2011-03-25 | 2012-09-27 | Sony Corporation | Display panel, display device, and electronic apparatus |
US20130033583A1 (en) * | 2011-06-28 | 2013-02-07 | Lg Electronics Inc. | Image display device and controlling method thereof |
US20130050283A1 (en) * | 2011-08-30 | 2013-02-28 | Sony Corporation | Display device and electronic unit |
US20130088526A1 (en) * | 2011-10-06 | 2013-04-11 | Japan Display West, Inc. | Display apparatus and electronic device |
US20130201091A1 (en) * | 2012-02-06 | 2013-08-08 | Innolux Corporation | Three-dimensional display |
US20140184758A1 (en) * | 2012-12-31 | 2014-07-03 | Lg Display Co., Ltd. | Image processing method of transparent display apparatus and apparatus thereof |
US8854531B2 (en) | 2009-12-31 | 2014-10-07 | Broadcom Corporation | Multiple remote controllers that each simultaneously controls a different visual presentation of a 2D/3D display |
US20140327708A1 (en) * | 2011-11-15 | 2014-11-06 | Sharp Kabushiki Kaisha | Display device |
US20150062315A1 (en) * | 2012-04-18 | 2015-03-05 | The Regents Of The University Of California | Simultaneous 2d and 3d images on a display |
US20150255041A1 (en) * | 2014-03-07 | 2015-09-10 | Boe Technology Group Co., Ltd. | Driving method and driving system for display panel |
US9247286B2 (en) | 2009-12-31 | 2016-01-26 | Broadcom Corporation | Frame formatting supporting mixed two and three dimensional video data communication |
US20160033706A1 (en) * | 2012-06-01 | 2016-02-04 | Leia Inc. | Directional backlight with a modulation layer |
US9279989B2 (en) * | 2010-03-31 | 2016-03-08 | Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd. | Backlight unit, 3D display having the same, and method of forming 3D image |
US20160111057A1 (en) * | 2014-10-15 | 2016-04-21 | Samsung Display Co., Ltd. | Method of driving display panel, display panel driving apparatus for performing the method and display apparatus having the display panel driving apparatus |
US20160212415A1 (en) * | 2015-01-19 | 2016-07-21 | Samsung Display Co., Ltd. | Display device |
US20170212358A1 (en) * | 2015-06-12 | 2017-07-27 | Boe Technology Group Co., Ltd. | Display panel and display device |
CN107209393A (en) * | 2015-01-28 | 2017-09-26 | 镭亚股份有限公司 | It is three-dimensional(3D)Electronic console |
US10003789B2 (en) | 2013-06-24 | 2018-06-19 | The Regents Of The University Of California | Practical two-frame 3D+2D TV |
US10373544B1 (en) | 2016-01-29 | 2019-08-06 | Leia, Inc. | Transformation from tiled to composite images |
US10403212B2 (en) * | 2017-06-26 | 2019-09-03 | Shanghai Tianma AM-OLED Co., Ltd. | Display panel, method for displaying on the same, and display device |
US10578793B2 (en) | 2015-05-09 | 2020-03-03 | Leia Inc. | Color-scanning grating-based backlight and electronic display using same |
US10670920B2 (en) | 2015-03-16 | 2020-06-02 | Leia Inc. | Unidirectional grating-based backlighting employing an angularly selective reflective layer |
US10684404B2 (en) | 2015-01-10 | 2020-06-16 | Leia Inc. | Diffraction grating-based backlighting having controlled diffractive coupling efficiency |
US10703375B2 (en) | 2015-05-30 | 2020-07-07 | Leia Inc. | Vehicle monitoring system |
US10768357B2 (en) | 2015-01-10 | 2020-09-08 | Leia Inc. | Polarization-mixing light guide and multibeam grating-based backlighting using same |
US10788619B2 (en) | 2015-04-23 | 2020-09-29 | Leia Inc. | Dual light guide grating-based backlight and electronic display using same |
US10802324B2 (en) | 2017-03-14 | 2020-10-13 | Boe Technology Group Co., Ltd. | Double vision display method and device |
US10852560B2 (en) | 2015-01-10 | 2020-12-01 | Leia Inc. | Two-dimensional/three-dimensional (2D/3D) switchable display backlight and electronic display |
CN112505942A (en) * | 2021-02-03 | 2021-03-16 | 成都工业学院 | Multi-resolution stereoscopic display device based on rear projection light source |
US10948647B2 (en) | 2015-01-19 | 2021-03-16 | Leia Inc. | Unidirectional grating-based backlighting employing a reflective island |
US10964275B2 (en) | 2019-04-18 | 2021-03-30 | Apple Inc. | Displays with adjustable direct-lit backlight units and adaptive processing |
US20220321870A1 (en) * | 2018-04-25 | 2022-10-06 | Raxium, Inc. | Partial light field display architecture |
US20230090936A1 (en) * | 2020-04-28 | 2023-03-23 | Tcl China Star Optoelectronics Technology Co., Ltd. | Display device driving method and display device |
Families Citing this family (478)
Publication number | Priority date | Publication date | Assignee | Title |
---|---|---|---|---|
US8416217B1 (en) | 2002-11-04 | 2013-04-09 | Neonode Inc. | Light-based finger gesture user interface |
US9015736B2 (en) * | 2005-12-29 | 2015-04-21 | Rovi Guides, Inc. | Systems and methods for episode tracking in an interactive media environment |
ES2569411T3 (en) | 2006-05-19 | 2016-05-10 | The Queen's Medical Center | Motion tracking system for adaptive real-time imaging and spectroscopy |
FR2906899B1 (en) * | 2006-10-05 | 2009-01-16 | Essilor Int | DISPLAY DEVICE FOR STEREOSCOPIC VISUALIZATION. |
JP2008106185A (en) * | 2006-10-27 | 2008-05-08 | Shin Etsu Chem Co Ltd | Method for adhering thermally conductive silicone composition, primer for adhesion of thermally conductive silicone composition and method for production of adhesion composite of thermally conductive silicone composition |
US8570423B2 (en) * | 2009-01-28 | 2013-10-29 | Hewlett-Packard Development Company, L.P. | Systems for performing visual collaboration between remotely situated participants |
US8775023B2 (en) | 2009-02-15 | 2014-07-08 | Neanode Inc. | Light-based touch controls on a steering wheel and dashboard |
US8125418B2 (en) * | 2009-06-26 | 2012-02-28 | Global Oled Technology Llc | Passive-matrix chiplet drivers for displays |
WO2011021894A2 (en) * | 2009-08-20 | 2011-02-24 | Lg Electronics Inc. | Image display apparatus and method for operating the same |
JP5187639B2 (en) * | 2009-08-28 | 2013-04-24 | 独立行政法人情報通信研究機構 | 3D display |
US20110080472A1 (en) * | 2009-10-02 | 2011-04-07 | Eric Gagneraud | Autostereoscopic status display |
WO2011041904A1 (en) * | 2009-10-07 | 2011-04-14 | Telewatch Inc. | Video analytics method and system |
WO2011072016A1 (en) * | 2009-12-08 | 2011-06-16 | Broadcom Corporation | Method and system for handling multiple 3-d video formats |
US20110143769A1 (en) * | 2009-12-16 | 2011-06-16 | Microsoft Corporation | Dual display mobile communication device |
WO2011075825A1 (en) | 2009-12-21 | 2011-06-30 | Kik Interactive, Inc. | Systems and methods for accessing and controlling media stored remotely |
US8684531B2 (en) * | 2009-12-28 | 2014-04-01 | Vision3D Technologies, Llc | Stereoscopic display device projecting parallax image and adjusting amount of parallax |
US20110187839A1 (en) * | 2010-02-01 | 2011-08-04 | VIZIO Inc. | Frame based three-dimensional encoding method |
US20110191328A1 (en) * | 2010-02-03 | 2011-08-04 | Vernon Todd H | System and method for extracting representative media content from an online document |
US20110202845A1 (en) * | 2010-02-17 | 2011-08-18 | Anthony Jon Mountjoy | System and method for generating and distributing three dimensional interactive content |
US20110205336A1 (en) * | 2010-02-23 | 2011-08-25 | Panasonic Corporation | Three-dimensional image reproducing apparatus |
DE102010009737A1 (en) * | 2010-03-01 | 2011-09-01 | Institut für Rundfunktechnik GmbH | Method and arrangement for reproducing 3D image content |
JP5462672B2 (en) * | 2010-03-16 | 2014-04-02 | 株式会社ジャパンディスプレイ | Display device and electronic device |
US8634873B2 (en) * | 2010-03-17 | 2014-01-21 | Microsoft Corporation | Mobile communication device having multiple, interchangeable second devices |
KR101289269B1 (en) * | 2010-03-23 | 2013-07-24 | 한국전자통신연구원 | An apparatus and method for displaying image data in image system |
US10448083B2 (en) * | 2010-04-06 | 2019-10-15 | Comcast Cable Communications, Llc | Streaming and rendering of 3-dimensional video |
KR20110115806A (en) * | 2010-04-16 | 2011-10-24 | 삼성전자주식회사 | Display apparatus and 3d glasses, and display system including the same |
CN102449534B (en) * | 2010-04-21 | 2014-07-02 | 松下电器产业株式会社 | Three-dimensional video display device and three-dimensional video display method |
US8667533B2 (en) * | 2010-04-22 | 2014-03-04 | Microsoft Corporation | Customizing streaming content presentation |
US9271052B2 (en) * | 2010-05-10 | 2016-02-23 | Comcast Cable Communications, Llc | Grid encoded media asset data |
US9030536B2 (en) | 2010-06-04 | 2015-05-12 | At&T Intellectual Property I, Lp | Apparatus and method for presenting media content |
JP5510097B2 (en) * | 2010-06-16 | 2014-06-04 | ソニー株式会社 | Signal transmission method, signal transmission device, and signal reception device |
US10089937B2 (en) * | 2010-06-21 | 2018-10-02 | Microsoft Technology Licensing, Llc | Spatial and temporal multiplexing display |
US9225975B2 (en) | 2010-06-21 | 2015-12-29 | Microsoft Technology Licensing, Llc | Optimization of a multi-view display |
KR20110139497A (en) * | 2010-06-23 | 2011-12-29 | 삼성전자주식회사 | Display apparatus and method for displaying thereof |
US9049426B2 (en) * | 2010-07-07 | 2015-06-02 | At&T Intellectual Property I, Lp | Apparatus and method for distributing three dimensional media content |
US8670070B2 (en) * | 2010-07-15 | 2014-03-11 | Broadcom Corporation | Method and system for achieving better picture quality in various zoom modes |
US9232274B2 (en) | 2010-07-20 | 2016-01-05 | At&T Intellectual Property I, L.P. | Apparatus for adapting a presentation of media content to a requesting device |
US9032470B2 (en) | 2010-07-20 | 2015-05-12 | At&T Intellectual Property I, Lp | Apparatus for adapting a presentation of media content according to a position of a viewing apparatus |
JP2012034138A (en) * | 2010-07-29 | 2012-02-16 | Toshiba Corp | Signal processing apparatus and signal processing method |
KR20120020627A (en) * | 2010-08-30 | 2012-03-08 | 삼성전자주식회사 | Apparatus and method for image processing using 3d image format |
KR101978522B1 (en) * | 2010-09-01 | 2019-05-14 | 시리얼 테크놀로지즈 에스.에이. | Backplane device |
US20120057007A1 (en) * | 2010-09-03 | 2012-03-08 | Satoshi Ishiguro | Simplified Visual Screening Check on Television |
JP5058316B2 (en) * | 2010-09-03 | 2012-10-24 | 株式会社東芝 | Electronic device, image processing method, and image processing program |
JP5364666B2 (en) * | 2010-09-13 | 2013-12-11 | 株式会社東芝 | Stereoscopic image display apparatus, method and program |
JP5368399B2 (en) * | 2010-09-17 | 2013-12-18 | 富士フイルム株式会社 | Electronic album generating apparatus, stereoscopic image pasting apparatus, operation control method thereof, and program thereof |
EP2432218B1 (en) * | 2010-09-20 | 2016-04-20 | EchoStar Technologies L.L.C. | Methods of displaying an electronic program guide |
EP2619329B1 (en) | 2010-09-24 | 2019-05-22 | The Board of Trustees of The Leland Stanford Junior University | Direct capture, amplification and sequencing of target dna using immobilized primers |
JP5493007B2 (en) * | 2010-10-13 | 2014-05-14 | シャープ株式会社 | Display device |
KR20120046937A (en) * | 2010-11-03 | 2012-05-11 | 삼성전자주식회사 | Method and apparatus for providing 3d effect in video device |
US9860490B2 (en) | 2010-11-05 | 2018-01-02 | Tom Galvin | Network video recorder system |
US10157526B2 (en) | 2010-11-05 | 2018-12-18 | Razberi Technologies, Inc. | System and method for a security system |
US11082665B2 (en) | 2010-11-05 | 2021-08-03 | Razberi Secure Technologies, Llc | System and method for a security system |
US10477158B2 (en) | 2010-11-05 | 2019-11-12 | Razberi Technologies, Inc. | System and method for a security system |
KR101670927B1 (en) * | 2010-11-05 | 2016-11-01 | 삼성전자주식회사 | Display apparatus and method |
US8922658B2 (en) * | 2010-11-05 | 2014-12-30 | Tom Galvin | Network video recorder system |
EP2461238B1 (en) | 2010-12-02 | 2017-06-28 | LG Electronics Inc. | Image display apparatus including an input device |
US9172943B2 (en) * | 2010-12-07 | 2015-10-27 | At&T Intellectual Property I, L.P. | Dynamic modification of video content at a set-top box device |
KR20120065774A (en) * | 2010-12-13 | 2012-06-21 | 삼성전자주식회사 | Audio providing apparatus, audio receiver and method for providing audio |
KR101734285B1 (en) * | 2010-12-14 | 2017-05-11 | 엘지전자 주식회사 | Video processing apparatus of mobile terminal and method thereof |
US8963694B2 (en) * | 2010-12-17 | 2015-02-24 | Sony Corporation | System and method for remote controlled device selection based on device position data and orientation data of a user |
US20120154559A1 (en) * | 2010-12-21 | 2012-06-21 | Voss Shane D | Generate Media |
US9386294B2 (en) * | 2011-01-05 | 2016-07-05 | Google Technology Holdings LLC | Method and apparatus for 3DTV image adjustment |
US8983555B2 (en) * | 2011-01-07 | 2015-03-17 | Microsoft Technology Licensing, Llc | Wireless communication techniques |
US8643684B2 (en) * | 2011-01-18 | 2014-02-04 | Disney Enterprises, Inc. | Multi-layer plenoptic displays that combine multiple emissive and light modulating planes |
TW201232280A (en) * | 2011-01-20 | 2012-08-01 | Hon Hai Prec Ind Co Ltd | System and method for sharing desktop information |
KR20120088467A (en) * | 2011-01-31 | 2012-08-08 | 삼성전자주식회사 | Method and apparatus for displaying partial 3d image in 2d image disaply area |
JP5632764B2 (en) * | 2011-02-02 | 2014-11-26 | セイコーインスツル株式会社 | Stereoscopic image display device |
US20120202187A1 (en) * | 2011-02-03 | 2012-08-09 | Shadowbox Comics, Llc | Method for distribution and display of sequential graphic art |
US8724467B2 (en) | 2011-02-04 | 2014-05-13 | Cisco Technology, Inc. | System and method for managing congestion in a network environment |
US10083639B2 (en) * | 2011-02-04 | 2018-09-25 | Seiko Epson Corporation | Control device for controlling image display device, head-mounted display device, image display system, control method for the image display device, and control method for the head-mounted display device |
TWI569041B (en) | 2011-02-14 | 2017-02-01 | 半導體能源研究所股份有限公司 | Display device |
US8630247B2 (en) * | 2011-02-15 | 2014-01-14 | Cisco Technology, Inc. | System and method for managing tracking area identity lists in a mobile network environment |
US9035860B2 (en) | 2011-02-16 | 2015-05-19 | Semiconductor Energy Laboratory Co., Ltd. | Display device |
KR101899178B1 (en) | 2011-02-16 | 2018-09-14 | 가부시키가이샤 한도오따이 에네루기 켄큐쇼 | Display device |
US9443455B2 (en) | 2011-02-25 | 2016-09-13 | Semiconductor Energy Laboratory Co., Ltd. | Display device having a plurality of pixels |
KR101852428B1 (en) * | 2011-03-09 | 2018-04-26 | 엘지전자 주식회사 | Mobile twrminal and 3d object control method thereof |
JP5912680B2 (en) | 2011-03-11 | 2016-04-27 | 株式会社半導体エネルギー研究所 | Display device and driving method of display device |
US9578299B2 (en) * | 2011-03-14 | 2017-02-21 | Qualcomm Incorporated | Stereoscopic conversion for shader based graphics content |
JP5766479B2 (en) * | 2011-03-25 | 2015-08-19 | 京セラ株式会社 | Electronic device, control method, and control program |
JP2012205285A (en) * | 2011-03-28 | 2012-10-22 | Sony Corp | Video signal processing apparatus and video signal processing method |
JP5092033B2 (en) * | 2011-03-28 | 2012-12-05 | 株式会社東芝 | Electronic device, display control method, and display control program |
WO2012138539A2 (en) * | 2011-04-08 | 2012-10-11 | The Regents Of The University Of California | Interactive system for collecting, displaying, and ranking items based on quantitative and textual input from multiple participants |
US8988512B2 (en) * | 2011-04-14 | 2015-03-24 | Mediatek Inc. | Method for adjusting playback of multimedia content according to detection result of user status and related apparatus thereof |
JP5162000B2 (en) * | 2011-04-19 | 2013-03-13 | 株式会社東芝 | Information processing apparatus, information processing method, and program |
JP5161999B2 (en) * | 2011-04-19 | 2013-03-13 | 株式会社東芝 | Electronic device, display control method, and display control program |
JP5161998B2 (en) * | 2011-04-19 | 2013-03-13 | 株式会社東芝 | Information processing apparatus, information processing method, and program |
US9491445B2 (en) * | 2011-05-05 | 2016-11-08 | Empire Technology Development Llc | Lenticular directional display |
US20120287115A1 (en) * | 2011-05-10 | 2012-11-15 | Ding Junjie | Method for generating image frames |
KR20120126458A (en) * | 2011-05-11 | 2012-11-21 | 엘지전자 주식회사 | Method for processing broadcasting signal and display device thereof |
WO2012156778A1 (en) * | 2011-05-13 | 2012-11-22 | Sony Ericsson Mobile Communications Ab | Adjusting parallax barriers |
US9420259B2 (en) * | 2011-05-24 | 2016-08-16 | Comcast Cable Communications, Llc | Dynamic distribution of three-dimensional content |
US8913104B2 (en) * | 2011-05-24 | 2014-12-16 | Bose Corporation | Audio synchronization for two dimensional and three dimensional video signals |
JP6050941B2 (en) * | 2011-05-26 | 2016-12-21 | サターン ライセンシング エルエルシーSaturn Licensing LLC | Display device and method, and program |
US9442562B2 (en) * | 2011-05-27 | 2016-09-13 | Dolby Laboratories Licensing Corporation | Systems and methods of image processing that adjust for viewer position, screen size and viewing distance |
US9084068B2 (en) * | 2011-05-30 | 2015-07-14 | Sony Corporation | Sensor-based placement of sound in video recording |
CN103262551B (en) * | 2011-06-01 | 2015-12-09 | 松下电器产业株式会社 | Image processor, dispensing device, image processing system, image treatment method, sending method and integrated circuit |
JP2012253543A (en) * | 2011-06-02 | 2012-12-20 | Seiko Epson Corp | Display device, control method of display device, and program |
JP5770018B2 (en) * | 2011-06-03 | 2015-08-26 | 任天堂株式会社 | Display control program, display control apparatus, display control method, and display control system |
US9420268B2 (en) | 2011-06-23 | 2016-08-16 | Lg Electronics Inc. | Apparatus and method for displaying 3-dimensional image |
US9445046B2 (en) | 2011-06-24 | 2016-09-13 | At&T Intellectual Property I, L.P. | Apparatus and method for presenting media content with telepresence |
CN103621073B (en) * | 2011-06-24 | 2016-06-22 | 汤姆逊许可公司 | Transmit the method and apparatus of three-dimensional content |
US9602766B2 (en) | 2011-06-24 | 2017-03-21 | At&T Intellectual Property I, L.P. | Apparatus and method for presenting three dimensional objects with telepresence |
US9030522B2 (en) | 2011-06-24 | 2015-05-12 | At&T Intellectual Property I, Lp | Apparatus and method for providing media content |
US20130265300A1 (en) * | 2011-07-03 | 2013-10-10 | Neorai Vardi | Computer device in form of wearable glasses and user interface thereof |
JP2013015779A (en) * | 2011-07-06 | 2013-01-24 | Sony Corp | Display control device, display control method, and computer program |
US8988411B2 (en) | 2011-07-08 | 2015-03-24 | Semiconductor Energy Laboratory Co., Ltd. | Display device |
US9137522B2 (en) * | 2011-07-11 | 2015-09-15 | Realtek Semiconductor Corp. | Device and method for 3-D display control |
US9294752B2 (en) * | 2011-07-13 | 2016-03-22 | Google Technology Holdings LLC | Dual mode user interface system and method for 3D video |
JP6178050B2 (en) | 2011-07-15 | 2017-08-09 | 株式会社半導体エネルギー研究所 | Display device |
US8587635B2 (en) | 2011-07-15 | 2013-11-19 | At&T Intellectual Property I, L.P. | Apparatus and method for providing media services with telepresence |
KR101926477B1 (en) * | 2011-07-18 | 2018-12-11 | 삼성전자 주식회사 | Contents play method and apparatus |
KR20130010834A (en) * | 2011-07-19 | 2013-01-29 | 가부시키가이샤 한도오따이 에네루기 켄큐쇼 | Display device |
JP2013038454A (en) * | 2011-08-03 | 2013-02-21 | Sony Corp | Image processor, method, and program |
JP2013038504A (en) | 2011-08-04 | 2013-02-21 | Sony Corp | Imaging device, image processing method and program |
JP5815326B2 (en) * | 2011-08-12 | 2015-11-17 | ルネサスエレクトロニクス株式会社 | Video decoding device and image display device |
EP3925676A1 (en) * | 2011-08-18 | 2021-12-22 | Pfaqutruma Research LLC | Systems and methods of virtual world interaction |
US10659724B2 (en) * | 2011-08-24 | 2020-05-19 | Ati Technologies Ulc | Method and apparatus for providing dropped picture image processing |
US9606209B2 (en) | 2011-08-26 | 2017-03-28 | Kineticor, Inc. | Methods, systems, and devices for intra-scan motion correction |
JP2013050537A (en) * | 2011-08-30 | 2013-03-14 | Sony Corp | Display device and electronic apparatus |
JP2013050538A (en) | 2011-08-30 | 2013-03-14 | Sony Corp | Display device and electronic apparatus |
US20130050596A1 (en) * | 2011-08-30 | 2013-02-28 | Industrial Technology Research Institute | Auto-stereoscopic display and method for fabricating the same |
WO2013032221A1 (en) * | 2011-08-31 | 2013-03-07 | 엘지전자 주식회사 | Digital broadcast signal processing method and device |
US8872813B2 (en) | 2011-09-02 | 2014-10-28 | Adobe Systems Incorporated | Parallax image authoring and viewing in digital media |
CN102368244B (en) * | 2011-09-08 | 2013-05-15 | 广州市动景计算机科技有限公司 | Page content alignment method, device and mobile terminal browser |
DE112012003931T5 (en) | 2011-09-21 | 2014-07-10 | Magna Electronics, Inc. | Image processing system for a motor vehicle with image data transmission and power supply via a coaxial cable |
CN102510503B (en) * | 2011-09-30 | 2015-06-03 | 深圳超多维光电子有限公司 | Stereoscopic display method and stereoscopic display equipment |
KR20130037861A (en) * | 2011-10-07 | 2013-04-17 | 삼성디스플레이 주식회사 | Display apparatus and method of displaying three dimensional image using the same |
KR101813035B1 (en) * | 2011-10-10 | 2017-12-28 | 엘지전자 주식회사 | Mobile terminal and method for controlling the same |
US20140237536A1 (en) * | 2011-10-13 | 2014-08-21 | Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd. | Method of displaying contents, method of synchronizing contents, and method and device for displaying broadcast contents |
GB2495725B (en) * | 2011-10-18 | 2014-10-01 | Sony Comp Entertainment Europe | Image transfer apparatus and method |
JP5149435B1 (en) * | 2011-11-04 | 2013-02-20 | 株式会社東芝 | Video processing apparatus and video processing method |
US8933935B2 (en) | 2011-11-10 | 2015-01-13 | 7D Surgical Inc. | Method of rendering and manipulating anatomical images on mobile computing device |
KR101887058B1 (en) * | 2011-11-11 | 2018-08-09 | 엘지전자 주식회사 | A process for processing a three-dimensional image and a method for controlling electric power of the same |
US20130127841A1 (en) * | 2011-11-18 | 2013-05-23 | Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd. | Three-dimensional (3d) image display method and apparatus for 3d imaging and displaying contents according to start or end of operation |
US9942580B2 (en) * | 2011-11-18 | 2018-04-10 | At&T Intellecutal Property I, L.P. | System and method for automatically selecting encoding/decoding for streaming media |
US8660362B2 (en) * | 2011-11-21 | 2014-02-25 | Microsoft Corporation | Combined depth filtering and super resolution |
US10099614B2 (en) | 2011-11-28 | 2018-10-16 | Magna Electronics Inc. | Vision system for vehicle |
DE102011055967B4 (en) * | 2011-12-02 | 2016-03-10 | Seereal Technologies S.A. | Measuring method and device for carrying out the measuring method |
US9626798B2 (en) | 2011-12-05 | 2017-04-18 | At&T Intellectual Property I, L.P. | System and method to digitally replace objects in images or video |
CN103163650A (en) * | 2011-12-08 | 2013-06-19 | 武汉天马微电子有限公司 | Naked eye three-dimensional (3D) grating structure |
US20130156090A1 (en) * | 2011-12-14 | 2013-06-20 | Ati Technologies Ulc | Method and apparatus for enabling multiuser use |
US9042266B2 (en) * | 2011-12-21 | 2015-05-26 | Kik Interactive, Inc. | Methods and apparatus for initializing a network connection for an output device |
US20140317537A1 (en) * | 2011-12-22 | 2014-10-23 | Tencent Technology (Shenzhen) Company Limited | Browser based application program extension method and device |
US9392251B2 (en) | 2011-12-29 | 2016-07-12 | Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd. | Display apparatus, glasses apparatus and method for controlling depth |
CN202995143U (en) * | 2011-12-29 | 2013-06-12 | 三星电子株式会社 | Glasses device and display device |
EP2611176A3 (en) * | 2011-12-29 | 2015-11-18 | Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd. | Display apparatus and controlling method thereof |
CN103294453B (en) * | 2012-02-24 | 2017-02-22 | 华为技术有限公司 | Image processing method and image processing device |
US11263823B2 (en) | 2012-02-24 | 2022-03-01 | Matterport, Inc. | Employing three-dimensional (3D) data predicted from two-dimensional (2D) images using neural networks for 3D modeling applications and other applications |
US9324190B2 (en) | 2012-02-24 | 2016-04-26 | Matterport, Inc. | Capturing and aligning three-dimensional scenes |
US10848731B2 (en) | 2012-02-24 | 2020-11-24 | Matterport, Inc. | Capturing and aligning panoramic image and depth data |
KR20130098023A (en) * | 2012-02-27 | 2013-09-04 | 한국전자통신연구원 | Apparatus and method for displaying an image on 3-dimentional display based on multi-layer parallax barrier |
JP5942477B2 (en) * | 2012-02-29 | 2016-06-29 | 富士ゼロックス株式会社 | Setting device and program |
EP2637416A1 (en) * | 2012-03-06 | 2013-09-11 | Alcatel Lucent | A system and method for optimized streaming of variable multi-viewpoint media |
JP5762998B2 (en) * | 2012-03-07 | 2015-08-12 | 株式会社ジャパンディスプレイ | Display device and electronic device |
WO2013132886A1 (en) * | 2012-03-07 | 2013-09-12 | ソニー株式会社 | Information processing device, information processing method, and program |
JP5779124B2 (en) * | 2012-03-13 | 2015-09-16 | 株式会社ジャパンディスプレイ | Display device and electronic device |
JP5806150B2 (en) * | 2012-03-13 | 2015-11-10 | 株式会社ジャパンディスプレイ | Display device |
CN102650741B (en) * | 2012-03-16 | 2014-06-11 | 京东方科技集团股份有限公司 | Light splitting device, manufacturing method thereof and 3D (Three-Dimensional) display device |
WO2013135203A1 (en) | 2012-03-16 | 2013-09-19 | Tencent Technology (Shenzhen) Company Limited | Offline download method and system |
US9280042B2 (en) * | 2012-03-16 | 2016-03-08 | City University Of Hong Kong | Automatic switching of a multi-mode projector display screen for displaying three-dimensional and two-dimensional images |
US9733707B2 (en) | 2012-03-22 | 2017-08-15 | Honeywell International Inc. | Touch screen display user interface and method for improving touch interface utility on the same employing a rules-based masking system |
US20130265297A1 (en) * | 2012-04-06 | 2013-10-10 | Motorola Mobility, Inc. | Display of a Corrected Browser Projection of a Visual Guide for Placing a Three Dimensional Object in a Browser |
US9308439B2 (en) * | 2012-04-10 | 2016-04-12 | Bally Gaming, Inc. | Controlling three-dimensional presentation of wagering game content |
CN104205823B (en) | 2012-04-12 | 2017-03-08 | 索尼移动通讯有限公司 | Improved 3D rendering display system |
KR101923150B1 (en) * | 2012-04-16 | 2018-11-29 | 삼성디스플레이 주식회사 | Display apparatus and method of displaying three dimensional image using the same |
CN102645959A (en) * | 2012-04-16 | 2012-08-22 | 上海颖杰计算机系统设备有限公司 | 3D (Three Dimensional) integrated computer |
EP2653906B1 (en) | 2012-04-20 | 2022-08-24 | Dolby Laboratories Licensing Corporation | A system for delivering stereoscopic images |
CN103379362B (en) * | 2012-04-24 | 2017-07-07 | 腾讯科技(深圳)有限公司 | VOD method and system |
US9201495B2 (en) * | 2012-04-24 | 2015-12-01 | Mobitv, Inc. | Control of perspective in multi-dimensional media |
US9707892B2 (en) * | 2012-04-25 | 2017-07-18 | Gentex Corporation | Multi-focus optical system |
US20130290867A1 (en) * | 2012-04-27 | 2013-10-31 | Litera Technologies, LLC | Systems and Methods For Providing Dynamic and Interactive Viewing and Control of Applications |
KR20130123599A (en) * | 2012-05-03 | 2013-11-13 | 한국과학기술원 | Speed dependent automatic dimming technique |
CN103457960B (en) | 2012-05-15 | 2018-03-09 | 腾讯科技(深圳)有限公司 | The method and system of load document in web game |
US10089537B2 (en) | 2012-05-18 | 2018-10-02 | Magna Electronics Inc. | Vehicle vision system with front and rear camera integration |
BR112014029472A2 (en) * | 2012-06-01 | 2017-06-27 | Koninklijke Philips Nv | auto stereoscopic visualization device and method of operation of a auto stereoscopic visualization device |
US8570651B1 (en) * | 2012-06-04 | 2013-10-29 | Hae-Yong Choi | Both side screen for combined use of 2D/3D images |
US10176633B2 (en) | 2012-06-05 | 2019-01-08 | Apple Inc. | Integrated mapping and navigation application |
US9159153B2 (en) | 2012-06-05 | 2015-10-13 | Apple Inc. | Method, system and apparatus for providing visual feedback of a map view change |
US9997069B2 (en) | 2012-06-05 | 2018-06-12 | Apple Inc. | Context-aware voice guidance |
US9367959B2 (en) * | 2012-06-05 | 2016-06-14 | Apple Inc. | Mapping application with 3D presentation |
US9418672B2 (en) | 2012-06-05 | 2016-08-16 | Apple Inc. | Navigation application with adaptive instruction text |
US8965696B2 (en) | 2012-06-05 | 2015-02-24 | Apple Inc. | Providing navigation instructions while operating navigation application in background |
US9111380B2 (en) | 2012-06-05 | 2015-08-18 | Apple Inc. | Rendering maps |
US9482296B2 (en) | 2012-06-05 | 2016-11-01 | Apple Inc. | Rendering road signs during navigation |
US10156455B2 (en) | 2012-06-05 | 2018-12-18 | Apple Inc. | Context-aware voice guidance |
US9886794B2 (en) | 2012-06-05 | 2018-02-06 | Apple Inc. | Problem reporting in maps |
JP6046923B2 (en) * | 2012-06-07 | 2016-12-21 | キヤノン株式会社 | Image coding apparatus, image coding method, and program |
WO2013183801A1 (en) * | 2012-06-08 | 2013-12-12 | Lg Electronics Inc. | Rendering method of 3d web-page and terminal using the same |
US9800862B2 (en) * | 2012-06-12 | 2017-10-24 | The Board Of Trustees Of The University Of Illinois | System and methods for visualizing information |
US9829996B2 (en) * | 2012-06-25 | 2017-11-28 | Zspace, Inc. | Operations in a three dimensional display system |
US20140195983A1 (en) * | 2012-06-30 | 2014-07-10 | Yangzhou Du | 3d graphical user interface |
WO2014007414A1 (en) * | 2012-07-06 | 2014-01-09 | Lg Electronics Inc. | Terminal for increasing visual comfort sensation of 3d object and control method thereof |
US20140022241A1 (en) * | 2012-07-18 | 2014-01-23 | Electronics And Telecommunications Research Institute | Display apparatus and method based on symmetrically spb |
US10353718B2 (en) * | 2012-07-23 | 2019-07-16 | Vmware, Inc. | Providing access to a remote application via a web client |
US9491784B2 (en) * | 2012-07-31 | 2016-11-08 | Apple Inc. | Streaming common media content to multiple devices |
US8959176B2 (en) | 2012-07-31 | 2015-02-17 | Apple Inc. | Streaming common media content to multiple devices |
CA2822217A1 (en) | 2012-08-02 | 2014-02-02 | Iwatchlife Inc. | Method and system for anonymous video analytics processing |
US9786281B1 (en) * | 2012-08-02 | 2017-10-10 | Amazon Technologies, Inc. | Household agent learning |
KR101310941B1 (en) * | 2012-08-03 | 2013-09-23 | 삼성전자주식회사 | Display apparatus for displaying a plurality of content views, shutter glasses device for syncronizing with one of the content views and methods thereof |
US9423871B2 (en) * | 2012-08-07 | 2016-08-23 | Honeywell International Inc. | System and method for reducing the effects of inadvertent touch on a touch screen controller |
KR101994295B1 (en) * | 2012-08-08 | 2019-06-28 | 삼성전자주식회사 | Terminal and method for generating live image in terminal |
US9225972B2 (en) | 2012-08-10 | 2015-12-29 | Pixtronix, Inc. | Three dimensional (3D) image generation using electromechanical display elements |
US9198209B2 (en) | 2012-08-21 | 2015-11-24 | Cisco Technology, Inc. | Providing integrated end-to-end architecture that includes quality of service transport for tunneled traffic |
CN103631021B (en) * | 2012-08-27 | 2016-06-15 | 群康科技(深圳)有限公司 | 3 d display device and image display method thereof |
TWI509289B (en) * | 2012-08-27 | 2015-11-21 | Innocom Tech Shenzhen Co Ltd | Stereoscopic display apparatus and image display method thereof |
KR20140028780A (en) * | 2012-08-30 | 2014-03-10 | 삼성디스플레이 주식회사 | Display apparatus and method of displaying three dimensional image using the same |
US9811878B1 (en) * | 2012-09-04 | 2017-11-07 | Amazon Technologies, Inc. | Dynamic processing of image borders |
US10171540B2 (en) * | 2012-09-07 | 2019-01-01 | High Sec Labs Ltd | Method and apparatus for streaming video security |
CN104412610A (en) * | 2012-09-14 | 2015-03-11 | 日立麦克赛尔株式会社 | Video display device and terminal device |
US9179232B2 (en) * | 2012-09-17 | 2015-11-03 | Nokia Technologies Oy | Method and apparatus for associating audio objects with content and geo-location |
JP5837009B2 (en) * | 2012-09-26 | 2015-12-24 | キヤノン株式会社 | Display device and control method thereof |
CN104104934B (en) * | 2012-10-04 | 2019-02-19 | 陈笛 | The component and method of the more spectators' Three-dimensional Displays of glasses-free |
JP5928286B2 (en) * | 2012-10-05 | 2016-06-01 | 富士ゼロックス株式会社 | Information processing apparatus and program |
WO2014163665A1 (en) * | 2012-10-10 | 2014-10-09 | Kassouf Sidney | System for distributing auto-stereoscopic images |
US20140104242A1 (en) * | 2012-10-12 | 2014-04-17 | Nvidia Corporation | System and method for concurrent display of a video signal on a plurality of display devices |
CN102917265A (en) * | 2012-10-25 | 2013-02-06 | 深圳创维-Rgb电子有限公司 | Information browsing method and system based on network television |
US9235103B2 (en) * | 2012-10-25 | 2016-01-12 | Au Optronics Corporation | 3D liquid crystal display comprising four electrodes alternately arrange between a first and second substrate |
TWI452345B (en) * | 2012-10-26 | 2014-09-11 | Au Optronics Corp | Three dimensions display device and displaying method thereof |
US9161018B2 (en) * | 2012-10-26 | 2015-10-13 | Christopher L. UHL | Methods and systems for synthesizing stereoscopic images |
JP2014092744A (en) * | 2012-11-06 | 2014-05-19 | Japan Display Inc | Stereoscopic display device |
US9674510B2 (en) * | 2012-11-21 | 2017-06-06 | Elwha Llc | Pulsed projection system for 3D video |
CN104516168B (en) * | 2012-11-21 | 2018-05-08 | 京东方科技集团股份有限公司 | Convertible lens and preparation method thereof, 2 d-3 d display base plate and display device |
CN102981343B (en) * | 2012-11-21 | 2015-01-07 | 京东方科技集团股份有限公司 | Convertible lens and preparation method thereof, as well as two-dimensional and three-dimensional display surface substrate and display device |
US9547937B2 (en) * | 2012-11-30 | 2017-01-17 | Legend3D, Inc. | Three-dimensional annotation system and method |
US10009644B2 (en) | 2012-12-04 | 2018-06-26 | Interaxon Inc | System and method for enhancing content using brain-state data |
US9265458B2 (en) | 2012-12-04 | 2016-02-23 | Sync-Think, Inc. | Application of smooth pursuit cognitive testing paradigms to clinical drug development |
US9128580B2 (en) | 2012-12-07 | 2015-09-08 | Honeywell International Inc. | System and method for interacting with a touch screen interface utilizing an intelligent stencil mask |
US20140165209A1 (en) * | 2012-12-11 | 2014-06-12 | Verizon Patent And Licensing Inc. | Digital content delivery platform for multiple retailers |
US9047054B1 (en) * | 2012-12-20 | 2015-06-02 | Audible, Inc. | User location-based management of content presentation |
TWI531213B (en) * | 2013-01-18 | 2016-04-21 | 國立成功大學 | Image conversion method and module for naked-eye 3d display |
US9717461B2 (en) | 2013-01-24 | 2017-08-01 | Kineticor, Inc. | Systems, devices, and methods for tracking and compensating for patient motion during a medical imaging scan |
US9305365B2 (en) | 2013-01-24 | 2016-04-05 | Kineticor, Inc. | Systems, devices, and methods for tracking moving targets |
US10327708B2 (en) | 2013-01-24 | 2019-06-25 | Kineticor, Inc. | Systems, devices, and methods for tracking and compensating for patient motion during a medical imaging scan |
WO2014120734A1 (en) | 2013-02-01 | 2014-08-07 | Kineticor, Inc. | Motion tracking system for real time adaptive motion compensation in biomedical imaging |
WO2014129134A1 (en) * | 2013-02-19 | 2014-08-28 | パナソニック株式会社 | Image display device |
TWI502247B (en) * | 2013-02-26 | 2015-10-01 | Chunghwa Picture Tubes Ltd | Autostereoscopic display device and display method thereof |
US8712217B1 (en) | 2013-03-01 | 2014-04-29 | Comcast Cable Communications, Llc | Methods and systems for time-shifting content |
US9380976B2 (en) | 2013-03-11 | 2016-07-05 | Sync-Think, Inc. | Optical neuroinformatics |
US20140267601A1 (en) * | 2013-03-14 | 2014-09-18 | Corel Corporation | System and method for efficient editing of 3d video |
US20140268324A1 (en) * | 2013-03-18 | 2014-09-18 | 3-D Virtual Lens Technologies, Llc | Method of displaying 3d images from 2d source images using a barrier grid |
CN103236074B (en) * | 2013-03-25 | 2015-12-23 | 深圳超多维光电子有限公司 | A kind of 2D/3D image processing method and device |
US10110647B2 (en) * | 2013-03-28 | 2018-10-23 | Qualcomm Incorporated | Method and apparatus for altering bandwidth consumption |
KR101981530B1 (en) | 2013-03-29 | 2019-05-23 | 엘지디스플레이 주식회사 | Stereoscopic image display device and method for driving the same |
CN103235415B (en) * | 2013-04-01 | 2015-12-23 | 昆山龙腾光电有限公司 | Based on the multi-view free stereoscopic displayer of grating |
KR101970577B1 (en) * | 2013-04-09 | 2019-04-19 | 엘지디스플레이 주식회사 | Stereoscopic display device and eye-tracking method thereof |
US20140316907A1 (en) * | 2013-04-17 | 2014-10-23 | Asaf NAIM | Multilayered user interface for internet browser |
US20140328505A1 (en) * | 2013-05-02 | 2014-11-06 | Microsoft Corporation | Sound field adaptation based upon user tracking |
CN103293689B (en) * | 2013-05-31 | 2015-05-13 | 京东方科技集团股份有限公司 | Method capable of switching between different display modes and display device |
KR20140142863A (en) * | 2013-06-05 | 2014-12-15 | 한국전자통신연구원 | Apparatus and method for providing graphic editors |
TWI510813B (en) * | 2013-06-18 | 2015-12-01 | Zhangjiagang Kangde Xin Optronics Material Co Ltd | A liquid crystal parallax barrier device that displays three-dimensional images in both directions |
CN104238185B (en) * | 2013-06-19 | 2017-04-12 | 扬升照明股份有限公司 | Light source module, display device and light source module drive method |
CN103309639A (en) * | 2013-06-21 | 2013-09-18 | 广东威创视讯科技股份有限公司 | Method and device based on split screen display of three-dimensional scene |
CN103365657B (en) * | 2013-06-28 | 2019-03-15 | 北京智谷睿拓技术服务有限公司 | Display control method, device and the display equipment including the device |
TWI495904B (en) * | 2013-07-12 | 2015-08-11 | Vision Technology Co Ltd C | Field sequential color lcd and method for generating 3d images by matching a software optical grating |
US9418469B1 (en) | 2013-07-19 | 2016-08-16 | Outward, Inc. | Generating video content |
JP2015025968A (en) * | 2013-07-26 | 2015-02-05 | ソニー株式会社 | Presentation medium and display device |
US9678929B2 (en) * | 2013-08-01 | 2017-06-13 | Equldo Limited | Stereoscopic online web content creation and rendering |
TWI489148B (en) * | 2013-08-23 | 2015-06-21 | Au Optronics Corp | Stereoscopic display and the driving method |
TWI505243B (en) * | 2013-09-10 | 2015-10-21 | Zhangjiagang Kangde Xin Optronics Material Co Ltd | A device that can display 2D and 3D images at the same time |
KR101856568B1 (en) * | 2013-09-16 | 2018-06-19 | 삼성전자주식회사 | Multi view image display apparatus and controlling method thereof |
US10067634B2 (en) | 2013-09-17 | 2018-09-04 | Amazon Technologies, Inc. | Approaches for three-dimensional object display |
US10592064B2 (en) * | 2013-09-17 | 2020-03-17 | Amazon Technologies, Inc. | Approaches for three-dimensional object display used in content navigation |
US9392355B1 (en) * | 2013-09-19 | 2016-07-12 | Voyetra Turtle Beach, Inc. | Gaming headset with voice scrambling for private in-game conversations |
US9591295B2 (en) * | 2013-09-24 | 2017-03-07 | Amazon Technologies, Inc. | Approaches for simulating three-dimensional views |
EP3055763A1 (en) * | 2013-10-07 | 2016-08-17 | VID SCALE, Inc. | User adaptive 3d video rendering and delivery |
CN103508999B (en) * | 2013-10-12 | 2015-05-13 | 浙江海正药业股份有限公司 | Maxacalcitol synthesizing intermediate and preparation method and application thereof |
US10116914B2 (en) * | 2013-10-31 | 2018-10-30 | 3Di Llc | Stereoscopic display |
US9986228B2 (en) | 2016-03-24 | 2018-05-29 | 3Di Llc | Trackable glasses system that provides multiple views of a shared display |
US9883173B2 (en) | 2013-12-25 | 2018-01-30 | 3Di Llc | Stereoscopic display |
US11343487B2 (en) | 2013-10-31 | 2022-05-24 | David Woods | Trackable glasses system for perspective views of a display |
US10652525B2 (en) | 2013-10-31 | 2020-05-12 | 3Di Llc | Quad view display system |
JP6411862B2 (en) | 2013-11-15 | 2018-10-24 | パナソニック株式会社 | File generation method and file generation apparatus |
KR20150057064A (en) * | 2013-11-18 | 2015-05-28 | 엘지전자 주식회사 | Electronic device and control method thereof |
US20150138184A1 (en) * | 2013-11-20 | 2015-05-21 | Apple Inc. | Spatially interactive computing device |
TWI511112B (en) * | 2013-11-27 | 2015-12-01 | Acer Inc | Image display method and display system |
CN103605211B (en) * | 2013-11-27 | 2016-04-20 | 南京大学 | Tablet non-auxiliary stereo display device and method |
KR20150065056A (en) * | 2013-12-04 | 2015-06-12 | 삼성디스플레이 주식회사 | Image display apparatus |
US9988047B2 (en) | 2013-12-12 | 2018-06-05 | Magna Electronics Inc. | Vehicle control system with traffic driving control |
US20150189256A1 (en) * | 2013-12-16 | 2015-07-02 | Christian Stroetmann | Autostereoscopic multi-layer display and control approaches |
CN103676302B (en) * | 2013-12-31 | 2016-04-06 | 京东方科技集团股份有限公司 | Realize array base palte, display device and method that 2D/3D display switches |
US10409079B2 (en) | 2014-01-06 | 2019-09-10 | Avegant Corp. | Apparatus, system, and method for displaying an image using a plate |
US10303242B2 (en) | 2014-01-06 | 2019-05-28 | Avegant Corp. | Media chair apparatus, system, and method |
JP6467680B2 (en) * | 2014-01-10 | 2019-02-13 | パナソニックIpマネジメント株式会社 | File generation method and file generation apparatus |
US20150205884A1 (en) * | 2014-01-22 | 2015-07-23 | AI Squared | Emphasizing a portion of the visible content elements of a markup language document |
US10291907B2 (en) | 2014-01-23 | 2019-05-14 | Telefonaktiebolaget Lm Ericsson (Publ) | Multi-view display control for channel selection |
US9182605B2 (en) * | 2014-01-29 | 2015-11-10 | Emine Goulanian | Front-projection autostereoscopic 3D display system |
US10565925B2 (en) | 2014-02-07 | 2020-02-18 | Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd. | Full color display with intrinsic transparency |
US10453371B2 (en) | 2014-02-07 | 2019-10-22 | Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd. | Multi-layer display with color and contrast enhancement |
US10554962B2 (en) | 2014-02-07 | 2020-02-04 | Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd. | Multi-layer high transparency display for light field generation |
US10375365B2 (en) | 2014-02-07 | 2019-08-06 | Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd. | Projection system with enhanced color and contrast |
CN103792672B (en) * | 2014-02-14 | 2016-03-23 | 成都京东方光电科技有限公司 | Stereo display assembly, liquid crystal panel and display device |
CN104853008B (en) * | 2014-02-17 | 2020-05-19 | 北京三星通信技术研究有限公司 | Portable device and method capable of switching between two-dimensional display and three-dimensional display |
KR101678389B1 (en) * | 2014-02-28 | 2016-11-22 | 엔트릭스 주식회사 | Method for providing media data based on cloud computing, apparatus and system |
US9348495B2 (en) | 2014-03-07 | 2016-05-24 | Sony Corporation | Control of large screen display using wireless portable computer and facilitating selection of audio on a headphone |
CN106572810A (en) | 2014-03-24 | 2017-04-19 | 凯内蒂科尔股份有限公司 | Systems, methods, and devices for removing prospective motion correction from medical imaging scans |
US9373306B2 (en) * | 2014-03-25 | 2016-06-21 | Intel Coporation | Direct viewer projection |
KR102175813B1 (en) * | 2014-04-18 | 2020-11-09 | 삼성디스플레이 주식회사 | Three dimensional image display device and method of processing image |
US20150334367A1 (en) * | 2014-05-13 | 2015-11-19 | Nagravision S.A. | Techniques for displaying three dimensional objects |
US9838756B2 (en) * | 2014-05-20 | 2017-12-05 | Electronics And Telecommunications Research Institute | Method and apparatus for providing three-dimensional territorial broadcasting based on non real time service |
KR102204830B1 (en) * | 2014-05-20 | 2021-01-19 | 한국전자통신연구원 | Method and apparatus for providing three-dimensional territorial brordcasting based on non real time service |
CN104023223B (en) * | 2014-05-29 | 2016-03-02 | 京东方科技集团股份有限公司 | Display control method, Apparatus and system |
CN104090365A (en) * | 2014-06-18 | 2014-10-08 | 京东方科技集团股份有限公司 | Shutter glasses, display device, display system and display method |
US10613585B2 (en) * | 2014-06-19 | 2020-04-07 | Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd. | Transparent display apparatus, group play system using transparent display apparatus and performance methods thereof |
GB2527548A (en) * | 2014-06-25 | 2015-12-30 | Sharp Kk | Variable barrier pitch correction |
KR102221676B1 (en) * | 2014-07-02 | 2021-03-02 | 삼성전자주식회사 | Method, User terminal and Audio System for the speaker location and level control using the magnetic field |
CN104155769A (en) * | 2014-07-15 | 2014-11-19 | 深圳市亿思达显示科技有限公司 | 2D/3D co-fusion display device and advertizing device |
CN104090818A (en) * | 2014-07-16 | 2014-10-08 | 北京智谷睿拓技术服务有限公司 | Information processing method, device and system |
TWI556624B (en) * | 2014-07-18 | 2016-11-01 | 友達光電股份有限公司 | Image displaying method and image dispaly device |
CN104252058B (en) * | 2014-07-18 | 2017-06-20 | 京东方科技集团股份有限公司 | Grating control method and device, grating, display panel and 3D display devices |
WO2016014718A1 (en) | 2014-07-23 | 2016-01-28 | Kineticor, Inc. | Systems, devices, and methods for tracking and compensating for patient motion during a medical imaging scan |
EP3175773A4 (en) * | 2014-07-30 | 2018-10-10 | Olympus Corporation | Image processing device |
WO2016021861A1 (en) * | 2014-08-02 | 2016-02-11 | Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd. | Electronic device and user interaction method thereof |
KR102366677B1 (en) * | 2014-08-02 | 2022-02-23 | 삼성전자주식회사 | Apparatus and Method for User Interaction thereof |
CN105323654B (en) * | 2014-08-05 | 2019-02-15 | 优视科技有限公司 | The method and apparatus for carrying out the content-data of automatic network is presented |
JP6327062B2 (en) * | 2014-08-25 | 2018-05-23 | オムロン株式会社 | Display device |
US9925980B2 (en) | 2014-09-17 | 2018-03-27 | Magna Electronics Inc. | Vehicle collision avoidance system with enhanced pedestrian avoidance |
US11205305B2 (en) | 2014-09-22 | 2021-12-21 | Samsung Electronics Company, Ltd. | Presentation of three-dimensional video |
US10313656B2 (en) | 2014-09-22 | 2019-06-04 | Samsung Electronics Company Ltd. | Image stitching for three-dimensional video |
US10393943B2 (en) | 2014-09-25 | 2019-08-27 | Koninklijke Philips N.V. | Display device with directional control of the output, and a back light for such a display device |
FR3026589A1 (en) * | 2014-09-30 | 2016-04-01 | Orange | METHOD AND DEVICE FOR ADAPTING THE DISPLAY OF A VIDEO STREAM BY A CLIENT |
FR3026852B1 (en) * | 2014-10-03 | 2016-12-02 | Thales Sa | SEMI-TRANSPARENT SCREEN DISPLAY SYSTEM SHARED BY TWO OBSERVERS |
US10506295B2 (en) * | 2014-10-09 | 2019-12-10 | Disney Enterprises, Inc. | Systems and methods for delivering secondary content to viewers |
US20160119685A1 (en) * | 2014-10-21 | 2016-04-28 | Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd. | Display method and display device |
CN104361622B (en) * | 2014-10-31 | 2018-06-19 | 福建星网视易信息系统有限公司 | A kind of interface method for drafting and device |
DE102014225796A1 (en) * | 2014-12-15 | 2016-06-16 | Bayerische Motoren Werke Aktiengesellschaft | Method for controlling a vehicle system |
CN104461440B (en) * | 2014-12-31 | 2018-01-02 | 上海天马有机发光显示技术有限公司 | Rendering intent, rendering device and display device |
US9690110B2 (en) * | 2015-01-21 | 2017-06-27 | Apple Inc. | Fine-coarse autostereoscopic display |
US20160227156A1 (en) * | 2015-02-02 | 2016-08-04 | Hisense Hiview Tech Co., Ltd. | Modular television system |
JP6359990B2 (en) * | 2015-02-24 | 2018-07-18 | 株式会社ジャパンディスプレイ | Display device and display method |
JP6359989B2 (en) * | 2015-02-24 | 2018-07-18 | 株式会社ジャパンディスプレイ | Display device and display method |
TWI554788B (en) * | 2015-03-04 | 2016-10-21 | 友達光電股份有限公司 | Display device |
KR102321364B1 (en) * | 2015-03-05 | 2021-11-03 | 삼성전자주식회사 | Method for synthesizing a 3d backgroud content and device thereof |
JP6411257B2 (en) * | 2015-03-19 | 2018-10-24 | 株式会社ジャパンディスプレイ | Display device and control method thereof |
US9823474B2 (en) | 2015-04-02 | 2017-11-21 | Avegant Corp. | System, apparatus, and method for displaying an image with a wider field of view |
US9995857B2 (en) | 2015-04-03 | 2018-06-12 | Avegant Corp. | System, apparatus, and method for displaying an image using focal modulation |
US9846309B2 (en) * | 2015-04-17 | 2017-12-19 | Dongseo University Technology Headquarters | Depth-priority integral imaging display method using nonuniform dynamic mask array |
US10360617B2 (en) | 2015-04-24 | 2019-07-23 | Walmart Apollo, Llc | Automated shopping apparatus and method in response to consumption |
US9705936B2 (en) | 2015-04-24 | 2017-07-11 | Mersive Technologies, Inc. | System and method for interactive and real-time visualization of distributed media |
CN104834104B (en) * | 2015-05-25 | 2017-05-24 | 京东方科技集团股份有限公司 | 2D/3D switchable display panel, and display method and display device thereof |
US10904091B2 (en) * | 2015-06-03 | 2021-01-26 | Avago Technologies International Sales Pte. Limited | System for network-based reallocation of functions |
CN104883559A (en) * | 2015-06-06 | 2015-09-02 | 深圳市虚拟现实科技有限公司 | Video playing method and video playing device |
CN104851394B (en) * | 2015-06-10 | 2017-11-28 | 京东方科技集团股份有限公司 | A kind of display device and display methods |
WO2016204490A1 (en) * | 2015-06-16 | 2016-12-22 | 엘지전자 주식회사 | Broadcast signal transmission device, broadcast signal reception device, broadcast signal transmission method, and broadcast signal reception method |
US9846310B2 (en) * | 2015-06-22 | 2017-12-19 | Innolux Corporation | 3D image display device with improved depth ranges |
GB2540376A (en) * | 2015-07-14 | 2017-01-18 | Sharp Kk | Parallax barrier with independently controllable regions |
GB2540377A (en) | 2015-07-14 | 2017-01-18 | Sharp Kk | Parallax barrier with independently controllable regions |
FR3038995B1 (en) * | 2015-07-15 | 2018-05-11 | F4 | INTERACTIVE DEVICE WITH CUSTOMIZABLE DISPLAY |
US20170018215A1 (en) * | 2015-07-17 | 2017-01-19 | Abl Ip Holding Llc | Arrangements for a software configurable lighting device |
US10349488B2 (en) | 2015-07-17 | 2019-07-09 | Abl Ip Holding Llc | Software configurable lighting device |
KR20180030876A (en) | 2015-07-17 | 2018-03-26 | 에이비엘 아이피 홀딩, 엘엘씨 | Systems and methods for providing configuration data to a software configurable lighting device |
US9943247B2 (en) | 2015-07-28 | 2018-04-17 | The University Of Hawai'i | Systems, devices, and methods for detecting false movements for motion correction during a medical imaging scan |
US10079000B2 (en) | 2015-08-12 | 2018-09-18 | Microsoft Technology Licensing, Llc | Reducing display degradation |
CN105100783B (en) | 2015-08-19 | 2018-03-23 | 京东方科技集团股份有限公司 | 3D display device and 3D display method |
US10186188B2 (en) * | 2015-09-23 | 2019-01-22 | Motorola Solutions, Inc. | Multi-angle simultaneous view light-emitting diode display |
EP3148188A1 (en) * | 2015-09-24 | 2017-03-29 | Airbus Operations GmbH | Virtual windows for airborne verhicles |
FR3042620B1 (en) | 2015-10-16 | 2017-12-08 | F4 | INTERACTIVE WEB DEVICE WITH CUSTOMIZABLE DISPLAY |
CN107566822B (en) * | 2015-10-20 | 2019-03-26 | 深圳超多维科技有限公司 | A kind of method, apparatus and electronic equipment of bore hole stereoscopic display |
CN105306866A (en) * | 2015-10-27 | 2016-02-03 | 青岛海信电器股份有限公司 | Frame rate conversion method and device |
KR102642700B1 (en) * | 2015-11-10 | 2024-03-04 | 레이아 인코포레이티드 | Display device and display control method |
US11079931B2 (en) | 2015-11-13 | 2021-08-03 | Harman International Industries, Incorporated | User interface for in-vehicle system |
US20170148488A1 (en) * | 2015-11-20 | 2017-05-25 | Mediatek Inc. | Video data processing system and associated method for analyzing and summarizing recorded video data |
WO2017091479A1 (en) | 2015-11-23 | 2017-06-01 | Kineticor, Inc. | Systems, devices, and methods for tracking and compensating for patient motion during a medical imaging scan |
US10144419B2 (en) | 2015-11-23 | 2018-12-04 | Magna Electronics Inc. | Vehicle dynamic control system for emergency handling |
US9711128B2 (en) * | 2015-12-04 | 2017-07-18 | Opentv, Inc. | Combined audio for multiple content presentation |
MX2018008789A (en) | 2016-01-19 | 2019-03-28 | Walmart Apollo Llc | Consumable item ordering system. |
NZ744813A (en) * | 2016-01-29 | 2019-10-25 | Magic Leap Inc | Display for three-dimensional image |
WO2017156622A1 (en) * | 2016-03-13 | 2017-09-21 | Rising Sun Productions Limited | Head-mounted audiovisual capture device |
US10063917B2 (en) * | 2016-03-16 | 2018-08-28 | Sorenson Media Inc. | Fingerprint layouts for content fingerprinting |
US10691880B2 (en) * | 2016-03-29 | 2020-06-23 | Microsoft Technology Licensing, Llc | Ink in an electronic document |
US10200428B1 (en) * | 2016-03-30 | 2019-02-05 | Amazon Technologies, Inc. | Unicast routing of a media stream to subscribers |
US10185787B1 (en) * | 2016-04-06 | 2019-01-22 | Bentley Systems, Incorporated | Tool for accurate onsite model visualization that facilitates environment interaction |
US10256277B2 (en) * | 2016-04-11 | 2019-04-09 | Abl Ip Holding Llc | Luminaire utilizing a transparent organic light emitting device display |
WO2017188955A1 (en) * | 2016-04-28 | 2017-11-02 | Hewlett-Packard Development Company, L.P. | Digital display devices |
US10579238B2 (en) | 2016-05-13 | 2020-03-03 | Sap Se | Flexible screen layout across multiple platforms |
US10353534B2 (en) | 2016-05-13 | 2019-07-16 | Sap Se | Overview page in multi application user interface |
TWI626475B (en) * | 2016-06-08 | 2018-06-11 | 國立交通大學 | Stereoscopic display screen and stereoscopic display system |
US10231073B2 (en) | 2016-06-17 | 2019-03-12 | Dts, Inc. | Ambisonic audio rendering with depth decoding |
CN105842865B (en) * | 2016-06-21 | 2018-01-30 | 成都工业学院 | A kind of slim grating 3D display device based on slit grating |
CN106257321B (en) * | 2016-06-28 | 2021-11-30 | 京东方科技集团股份有限公司 | 3D head-up display system and method |
US20180035236A1 (en) * | 2016-07-28 | 2018-02-01 | Leonardo Basterra | Audio System with Binaural Elements and Method of Use with Perspective Switching |
US10235010B2 (en) | 2016-07-28 | 2019-03-19 | Canon Kabushiki Kaisha | Information processing apparatus configured to generate an audio signal corresponding to a virtual viewpoint image, information processing system, information processing method, and non-transitory computer-readable storage medium |
US10089063B2 (en) * | 2016-08-10 | 2018-10-02 | Qualcomm Incorporated | Multimedia device for processing spatialized audio based on movement |
US10154253B2 (en) * | 2016-08-29 | 2018-12-11 | Disney Enterprises, Inc. | Multi-view displays using images encoded with orbital angular momentum (OAM) on a pixel or image basis |
WO2018044711A1 (en) * | 2016-08-31 | 2018-03-08 | Wal-Mart Stores, Inc. | Systems and methods of enabling retail shopping while disabling components based on location |
US10271043B2 (en) * | 2016-11-18 | 2019-04-23 | Zspace, Inc. | 3D user interface—360-degree visualization of 2D webpage content |
US10127715B2 (en) * | 2016-11-18 | 2018-11-13 | Zspace, Inc. | 3D user interface—non-native stereoscopic image conversion |
US11003305B2 (en) * | 2016-11-18 | 2021-05-11 | Zspace, Inc. | 3D user interface |
US10621898B2 (en) * | 2016-11-23 | 2020-04-14 | Pure Depth Limited | Multi-layer display system for vehicle dash or the like |
GB2556910A (en) * | 2016-11-25 | 2018-06-13 | Nokia Technologies Oy | Virtual reality display |
US10170060B2 (en) * | 2016-12-27 | 2019-01-01 | Facebook Technologies, Llc | Interlaced liquid crystal display panel and backlight used in a head mounted display |
US10425700B2 (en) | 2016-12-31 | 2019-09-24 | Turner Broadcasting System, Inc. | Dynamic scheduling and channel creation based on real-time or near-real-time content context analysis |
US11038932B2 (en) | 2016-12-31 | 2021-06-15 | Turner Broadcasting System, Inc. | System for establishing a shared media session for one or more client devices |
US10694231B2 (en) | 2016-12-31 | 2020-06-23 | Turner Broadcasting System, Inc. | Dynamic channel versioning in a broadcast air chain based on user preferences |
US10965967B2 (en) | 2016-12-31 | 2021-03-30 | Turner Broadcasting System, Inc. | Publishing a disparate per-client live media output stream based on dynamic insertion of targeted non-programming content and customized programming content |
US11134309B2 (en) | 2016-12-31 | 2021-09-28 | Turner Broadcasting System, Inc. | Creation of channels using pre-encoded media assets |
US11051074B2 (en) | 2016-12-31 | 2021-06-29 | Turner Broadcasting System, Inc. | Publishing disparate live media output streams using live input streams |
US10645462B2 (en) | 2016-12-31 | 2020-05-05 | Turner Broadcasting System, Inc. | Dynamic channel versioning in a broadcast air chain |
US10075753B2 (en) | 2016-12-31 | 2018-09-11 | Turner Broadcasting System, Inc. | Dynamic scheduling and channel creation based on user selection |
US11109086B2 (en) | 2016-12-31 | 2021-08-31 | Turner Broadcasting System, Inc. | Publishing disparate live media output streams in mixed mode |
US11051061B2 (en) | 2016-12-31 | 2021-06-29 | Turner Broadcasting System, Inc. | Publishing a disparate live media output stream using pre-encoded media assets |
US11503352B2 (en) | 2016-12-31 | 2022-11-15 | Turner Broadcasting System, Inc. | Dynamic scheduling and channel creation based on external data |
US10992973B2 (en) | 2016-12-31 | 2021-04-27 | Turner Broadcasting System, Inc. | Publishing a plurality of disparate live media output stream manifests using live input streams and pre-encoded media assets |
US10856016B2 (en) | 2016-12-31 | 2020-12-01 | Turner Broadcasting System, Inc. | Publishing disparate live media output streams in mixed mode based on user selection |
CN108287679A (en) * | 2017-01-10 | 2018-07-17 | 中兴通讯股份有限公司 | A kind of display characteristic parameter adjusting method and terminal |
CN106710531B (en) * | 2017-01-19 | 2019-11-05 | 深圳市华星光电技术有限公司 | Backlight control circuit and electronic device |
US11044464B2 (en) * | 2017-02-09 | 2021-06-22 | Fyusion, Inc. | Dynamic content modification of image and video based multi-view interactive digital media representations |
US10650416B1 (en) * | 2017-02-17 | 2020-05-12 | Sprint Communications Company L.P. | Live production interface and response testing |
US10210833B2 (en) * | 2017-03-31 | 2019-02-19 | Panasonic Liquid Crystal Display Co., Ltd. | Display device |
US10078135B1 (en) * | 2017-04-25 | 2018-09-18 | Intel Corporation | Identifying a physical distance using audio channels |
CA3060437C (en) | 2017-05-14 | 2021-12-21 | Leia Inc. | Multiview backlight, display, and method employing active emitters |
US10375375B2 (en) * | 2017-05-15 | 2019-08-06 | Lg Electronics Inc. | Method of providing fixed region information or offset region information for subtitle in virtual reality system and device for controlling the same |
FR3066672B1 (en) * | 2017-05-19 | 2020-05-22 | Sagemcom Broadband Sas | METHOD FOR COMMUNICATING AN IMMERSIVE VIDEO |
US11095942B2 (en) | 2017-05-25 | 2021-08-17 | Turner Broadcasting System, Inc. | Rules-based delivery and presentation of non-programming media items at client device |
IL270856B2 (en) | 2017-05-30 | 2023-12-01 | Magic Leap Inc | Power supply assembly with fan assembly for electronic device |
WO2018231258A1 (en) * | 2017-06-16 | 2018-12-20 | Microsoft Technology Licensing, Llc | Generating user interface containers |
EP3422151A1 (en) * | 2017-06-30 | 2019-01-02 | Nokia Technologies Oy | Methods, apparatus, systems, computer programs for enabling consumption of virtual content for mediated reality |
US20190026004A1 (en) * | 2017-07-18 | 2019-01-24 | Chicago Labs, LLC | Three Dimensional Icons for Computer Applications |
WO2019023489A1 (en) | 2017-07-28 | 2019-01-31 | Magic Leap, Inc. | Fan assembly for displaying an image |
CN107396087B (en) * | 2017-07-31 | 2019-03-12 | 京东方科技集团股份有限公司 | Naked eye three-dimensional display device and its control method |
US10692279B2 (en) * | 2017-07-31 | 2020-06-23 | Quantum Spatial, Inc. | Systems and methods for facilitating making partial selections of multidimensional information while maintaining a multidimensional structure |
US11049218B2 (en) | 2017-08-11 | 2021-06-29 | Samsung Electronics Company, Ltd. | Seamless image stitching |
US10515397B2 (en) * | 2017-09-08 | 2019-12-24 | Uptown Network LLC | System and method for facilitating virtual gift giving |
CN107707901B (en) * | 2017-09-30 | 2019-10-25 | 深圳超多维科技有限公司 | It is a kind of for the display methods of naked eye 3D display screen, device and equipment |
CN108205411A (en) * | 2017-09-30 | 2018-06-26 | 中兴通讯股份有限公司 | Display changeover method and device, terminal |
US10777057B1 (en) * | 2017-11-30 | 2020-09-15 | Amazon Technologies, Inc. | Premises security system with audio simulating occupancy |
US10212532B1 (en) | 2017-12-13 | 2019-02-19 | At&T Intellectual Property I, L.P. | Immersive media with media device |
EP3503579B1 (en) * | 2017-12-20 | 2022-03-23 | Nokia Technologies Oy | Multi-camera device |
US11132842B2 (en) * | 2017-12-22 | 2021-09-28 | Unity IPR ApS | Method and system for synchronizing a plurality of augmented reality devices to a virtual reality device |
JP2019154008A (en) * | 2018-03-06 | 2019-09-12 | シャープ株式会社 | Stereoscopic image display device, method for displaying liquid crystal display, and program for liquid crystal display |
CN108469682A (en) * | 2018-03-30 | 2018-08-31 | 京东方科技集团股份有限公司 | A kind of three-dimensional display apparatus and its 3 D displaying method |
CN108490703B (en) * | 2018-04-03 | 2021-10-15 | 京东方科技集团股份有限公司 | Display system and display control method thereof |
US11025892B1 (en) | 2018-04-04 | 2021-06-01 | James Andrew Aman | System and method for simultaneously providing public and private images |
US10523922B2 (en) | 2018-04-06 | 2019-12-31 | Zspace, Inc. | Identifying replacement 3D images for 2D images via ranking criteria |
US10523921B2 (en) | 2018-04-06 | 2019-12-31 | Zspace, Inc. | Replacing 2D images with 3D images |
US10609503B2 (en) | 2018-04-08 | 2020-03-31 | Dts, Inc. | Ambisonic depth extraction |
JP7174941B2 (en) * | 2018-04-11 | 2022-11-18 | アルカクルーズ インク | digital media system |
CN112005289B (en) | 2018-04-26 | 2023-07-18 | 株式会社半导体能源研究所 | Display device and electronic apparatus |
EP3579584A1 (en) | 2018-06-07 | 2019-12-11 | Nokia Technologies Oy | Controlling rendering of a spatial audio scene |
US10600246B2 (en) * | 2018-06-15 | 2020-03-24 | Microsoft Technology Licensing, Llc | Pinning virtual reality passthrough regions to real-world locations |
KR102506873B1 (en) * | 2018-07-18 | 2023-03-08 | 현대자동차주식회사 | Vehicle cluster having a three-dimensional effect, system having the same and method providing a three-dimensional scene thereof |
US11276360B2 (en) * | 2018-07-27 | 2022-03-15 | Kyocera Corporation | Display device and mobile body |
US10893299B2 (en) | 2018-07-31 | 2021-01-12 | Intel Corporation | Surface normal vector processing mechanism |
US11212506B2 (en) | 2018-07-31 | 2021-12-28 | Intel Corporation | Reduced rendering of six-degree of freedom video |
US10887574B2 (en) | 2018-07-31 | 2021-01-05 | Intel Corporation | Selective packing of patches for immersive video |
US10762394B2 (en) | 2018-07-31 | 2020-09-01 | Intel Corporation | System and method for 3D blob classification and transmission |
US11178373B2 (en) | 2018-07-31 | 2021-11-16 | Intel Corporation | Adaptive resolution of point cloud and viewpoint prediction for video streaming in computing environments |
US10757324B2 (en) | 2018-08-03 | 2020-08-25 | Semiconductor Components Industries, Llc | Transform processors for gradually switching between image transforms |
US11057631B2 (en) | 2018-10-10 | 2021-07-06 | Intel Corporation | Point cloud coding standard conformance definition in computing environments |
US11727859B2 (en) | 2018-10-25 | 2023-08-15 | Boe Technology Group Co., Ltd. | Display panel and display device |
CN109192136B (en) * | 2018-10-25 | 2020-12-22 | 京东方科技集团股份有限公司 | Display substrate, light field display device and driving method thereof |
US10880534B2 (en) * | 2018-11-09 | 2020-12-29 | Korea Electronics Technology Institute | Electronic device and method for tiled video multi-channel playback |
KR102023905B1 (en) * | 2018-11-09 | 2019-11-04 | 전자부품연구원 | Electronic device and method for multi-channel reproduction of tiled image |
US10699673B2 (en) * | 2018-11-19 | 2020-06-30 | Facebook Technologies, Llc | Apparatus, systems, and methods for local dimming in brightness-controlled environments |
CN109598254B (en) * | 2018-12-17 | 2019-11-26 | 海南大学 | The space representation combined optimization method of Group-oriented |
US10880606B2 (en) | 2018-12-21 | 2020-12-29 | Turner Broadcasting System, Inc. | Disparate live media output stream playout and broadcast distribution |
US11082734B2 (en) | 2018-12-21 | 2021-08-03 | Turner Broadcasting System, Inc. | Publishing a disparate live media output stream that complies with distribution format regulations |
US10873774B2 (en) | 2018-12-22 | 2020-12-22 | Turner Broadcasting System, Inc. | Publishing a disparate live media output stream manifest that includes one or more media segments corresponding to key events |
CN109725819B (en) * | 2018-12-25 | 2022-12-13 | 浙江玖炫智能信息技术有限公司 | Interface display method and device, double-screen double-system terminal and readable storage medium |
US10854171B2 (en) | 2018-12-31 | 2020-12-01 | Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd. | Multi-user personal display system and applications thereof |
EP3687166A1 (en) * | 2019-01-23 | 2020-07-29 | Ultra-D Coöperatief U.A. | Interoperable 3d image content handling |
CN109686303B (en) * | 2019-01-28 | 2021-09-17 | 厦门天马微电子有限公司 | Organic light-emitting display panel, organic light-emitting display device and compensation method |
JP7317517B2 (en) * | 2019-02-12 | 2023-07-31 | 株式会社ジャパンディスプレイ | Display device |
US10932080B2 (en) | 2019-02-14 | 2021-02-23 | Microsoft Technology Licensing, Llc | Multi-sensor object tracking for modifying audio |
CN110007475A (en) * | 2019-04-17 | 2019-07-12 | 万维云视(上海)数码科技有限公司 | Utilize the method and apparatus of virtual depth compensation eyesight |
US10571744B1 (en) | 2019-04-18 | 2020-02-25 | Apple Inc. | Displays with adjustable direct-lit backlight units and power consumption compensation |
US10504453B1 (en) | 2019-04-18 | 2019-12-10 | Apple Inc. | Displays with adjustable direct-lit backlight units |
CN113826066A (en) * | 2019-04-29 | 2021-12-21 | 惠普发展公司, 有限责任合伙企业 | Wireless configuration of display attributes |
CN110262051B (en) * | 2019-07-26 | 2023-12-29 | 成都工业学院 | Retroreflective stereoscopic display device based on directional light source |
EP3779612A1 (en) * | 2019-08-16 | 2021-02-17 | The Swatch Group Research and Development Ltd | Method for broadcasting a message to the wearer of a watch |
CN112394845B (en) * | 2019-08-19 | 2024-03-01 | 北京小米移动软件有限公司 | Distance sensor module, display device, electronic equipment and distance detection method |
US11335095B1 (en) * | 2019-08-27 | 2022-05-17 | Gopro, Inc. | Systems and methods for characterizing visual content |
WO2021045733A1 (en) * | 2019-09-03 | 2021-03-11 | Light Field Lab, Inc. | Light field display system for gaming environments |
US11750795B2 (en) | 2020-05-12 | 2023-09-05 | Apple Inc. | Displays with viewer tracking |
US11936844B1 (en) | 2020-08-11 | 2024-03-19 | Apple Inc. | Pre-processing in a display pipeline |
CN113992885B (en) * | 2021-09-22 | 2023-03-21 | 联想(北京)有限公司 | Data synchronization method and device |
NL2030325B1 (en) * | 2021-12-28 | 2023-07-03 | Dimenco Holding B V | Scaling of three-dimensional content for an autostereoscopic display device |
KR20230112485A (en) * | 2022-01-20 | 2023-07-27 | 엘지전자 주식회사 | Display device and operating method thereof |
CN114936002A (en) * | 2022-06-10 | 2022-08-23 | 斑马网络技术有限公司 | Interface display method and device and vehicle |
Citations (104)
Publication number | Priority date | Publication date | Assignee | Title |
---|---|---|---|---|
US4829365A (en) * | 1986-03-07 | 1989-05-09 | Dimension Technologies, Inc. | Autostereoscopic display with illuminating lines, light valve and mask |
US5493427A (en) * | 1993-05-25 | 1996-02-20 | Sharp Kabushiki Kaisha | Three-dimensional display unit with a variable lens |
US5615046A (en) * | 1995-01-23 | 1997-03-25 | Cyber Scientific Inc. | Stereoscopic viewing system |
US5855425A (en) * | 1996-07-19 | 1999-01-05 | Sanyo Electric Co., Ltd. | Stereoscopic display |
US5945965A (en) * | 1995-06-29 | 1999-08-31 | Canon Kabushiki Kaisha | Stereoscopic image display method |
US5959597A (en) * | 1995-09-28 | 1999-09-28 | Sony Corporation | Image/audio reproducing system |
US5969850A (en) * | 1996-09-27 | 1999-10-19 | Sharp Kabushiki Kaisha | Spatial light modulator, directional display and directional light source |
US5990975A (en) * | 1996-11-22 | 1999-11-23 | Acer Peripherals, Inc. | Dual screen displaying device |
US6023277A (en) * | 1996-07-03 | 2000-02-08 | Canon Kabushiki Kaisha | Display control apparatus and method |
US6049424A (en) * | 1995-11-15 | 2000-04-11 | Sanyo Electric Co., Ltd. | Three dimensional display device |
US6094216A (en) * | 1995-05-22 | 2000-07-25 | Canon Kabushiki Kaisha | Stereoscopic image display method, and stereoscopic image display apparatus using the method |
US6144375A (en) * | 1998-08-14 | 2000-11-07 | Praja Inc. | Multi-perspective viewer for content-based interactivity |
US6188442B1 (en) * | 1997-08-01 | 2001-02-13 | International Business Machines Corporation | Multiviewer display system for television monitors |
US6285368B1 (en) * | 1997-02-10 | 2001-09-04 | Canon Kabushiki Kaisha | Image display system and image display apparatus and information processing apparatus in the system |
US20020010798A1 (en) * | 2000-04-20 | 2002-01-24 | Israel Ben-Shaul | Differentiated content and application delivery via internet |
US20020037037A1 (en) * | 2000-09-22 | 2002-03-28 | Philips Electronics North America Corporation | Preferred transmission/streaming order of fine-granular scalability |
US20020167862A1 (en) * | 2001-04-03 | 2002-11-14 | Carlo Tomasi | Method and apparatus for approximating a source position of a sound-causing event for determining an input used in operating an electronic device |
US20020171666A1 (en) * | 1999-02-19 | 2002-11-21 | Takaaki Endo | Image processing apparatus for interpolating and generating images from an arbitrary view point |
US20030012425A1 (en) * | 1998-11-12 | 2003-01-16 | Canon Kabushiki Kaisha | Viewpoint position detection apparatus and method, and stereoscopic image display system |
US20030103165A1 (en) * | 2000-05-19 | 2003-06-05 | Werner Bullinger | System for operating a consumer electronics appaliance |
US20030137506A1 (en) * | 2001-11-30 | 2003-07-24 | Daniel Efran | Image-based rendering for 3D viewing |
US20030154261A1 (en) * | 1994-10-17 | 2003-08-14 | The Regents Of The University Of California, A Corporation Of The State Of California | Distributed hypermedia method and system for automatically invoking external application providing interaction and display of embedded objects within a hypermedia document |
US20030223499A1 (en) * | 2002-04-09 | 2003-12-04 | Nicholas Routhier | Process and system for encoding and playback of stereoscopic video sequences |
US20040027452A1 (en) * | 2002-08-07 | 2004-02-12 | Yun Kug Jin | Method and apparatus for multiplexing multi-view three-dimensional moving picture |
US6697687B1 (en) * | 1998-11-09 | 2004-02-24 | Hitachi, Ltd. | Image display apparatus having audio output control means in accordance with image signal type |
US20040036763A1 (en) * | 1994-11-14 | 2004-02-26 | Swift David C. | Intelligent method and system for producing and displaying stereoscopically-multiplexed images of three-dimensional objects for use in realistic stereoscopic viewing thereof in interactive virtual reality display environments |
US20040041747A1 (en) * | 2002-08-27 | 2004-03-04 | Nec Corporation | 3D image/2D image switching display apparatus and portable terminal device |
US6710920B1 (en) * | 1998-03-27 | 2004-03-23 | Sanyo Electric Co., Ltd | Stereoscopic display |
US20040109093A1 (en) * | 2002-12-05 | 2004-06-10 | Small-Stryker Aaron Tug | Method and apparatus for simultaneous television video presentation and separate viewing of different broadcasts |
US20040141237A1 (en) * | 1995-06-07 | 2004-07-22 | Wohlstadter Jacob N. | Three dimensional imaging system |
US20040164292A1 (en) * | 2003-02-21 | 2004-08-26 | Yeh-Jiun Tung | Transflective display having an OLED backlight |
US20040239231A1 (en) * | 2002-10-30 | 2004-12-02 | Keisuke Miyagawa | Display device and electronic equipment |
US20040252187A1 (en) * | 2001-09-10 | 2004-12-16 | Alden Ray M. | Processes and apparatuses for efficient multiple program and 3D display |
US20050073472A1 (en) * | 2003-07-26 | 2005-04-07 | Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd. | Method of removing Moire pattern in 3D image display apparatus using complete parallax |
US20050128353A1 (en) * | 2003-12-16 | 2005-06-16 | Young Bruce A. | System and method for using second remote control device for sub-picture control in television receiver |
US20050237487A1 (en) * | 2004-04-23 | 2005-10-27 | Chang Nelson L A | Color wheel assembly for stereoscopic imaging |
US20050248561A1 (en) * | 2002-04-25 | 2005-11-10 | Norio Ito | Multimedia information generation method and multimedia information reproduction device |
US20050259147A1 (en) * | 2002-07-16 | 2005-11-24 | Nam Jeho | Apparatus and method for adapting 2d and 3d stereoscopic video signal |
US20060050785A1 (en) * | 2004-09-09 | 2006-03-09 | Nucore Technology Inc. | Inserting a high resolution still image into a lower resolution video stream |
US7030903B2 (en) * | 1997-02-20 | 2006-04-18 | Canon Kabushiki Kaisha | Image display system, information processing apparatus, and method of controlling the same |
US20060087556A1 (en) * | 2004-10-21 | 2006-04-27 | Kazunari Era | Stereoscopic image display device |
US7038698B1 (en) * | 1996-02-08 | 2006-05-02 | Palm Charles S | 3D stereo browser for the internet |
US20060109242A1 (en) * | 2004-11-19 | 2006-05-25 | Simpkins Daniel S | User interface for impaired users |
US20060118514A1 (en) * | 2004-11-30 | 2006-06-08 | Agoura Technologies, Inc. | Applications and fabrication techniques for large scale wire grid polarizers |
US20060139448A1 (en) * | 2004-12-29 | 2006-06-29 | Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd. | 3D displays with flexible switching capability of 2D/3D viewing modes |
US20060139490A1 (en) * | 2004-12-15 | 2006-06-29 | Fekkes Wilhelmus F | Synchronizing audio with delayed video |
US7091471B2 (en) * | 2004-03-15 | 2006-08-15 | Agilent Technologies, Inc. | Using eye detection for providing control and power management of electronic devices |
US7123213B2 (en) * | 1995-10-05 | 2006-10-17 | Semiconductor Energy Laboratory Co., Ltd. | Three dimensional display unit and display method |
US20060244918A1 (en) * | 2005-04-27 | 2006-11-02 | Actuality Systems, Inc. | Minimized-thickness angular scanner of electromagnetic radiation |
US20060256260A1 (en) * | 2005-05-16 | 2006-11-16 | Lg Electronics Inc. | Display device with polarizer sheet and method for manufacturing polarizer sheet |
US20060256136A1 (en) * | 2001-10-01 | 2006-11-16 | Adobe Systems Incorporated, A Delaware Corporation | Compositing two-dimensional and three-dimensional image layers |
US20060256302A1 (en) * | 2005-05-13 | 2006-11-16 | Microsoft Corporation | Three-dimensional (3D) image projection |
US20060271791A1 (en) * | 2005-05-27 | 2006-11-30 | Sbc Knowledge Ventures, L.P. | Method and system for biometric based access control of media content presentation devices |
US20070002041A1 (en) * | 2005-07-02 | 2007-01-04 | Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd. | Method and apparatus for encoding/decoding video data to implement local three-dimensional video |
US20070008620A1 (en) * | 2005-07-11 | 2007-01-11 | Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd. | Switchable autostereoscopic display |
US20070008406A1 (en) * | 2005-07-08 | 2007-01-11 | Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd. | High resolution 2D-3D switchable autostereoscopic display apparatus |
US20070052807A1 (en) * | 2005-09-07 | 2007-03-08 | Fuji Xerox Co., Ltd. | System and method for user monitoring interface of 3-D video streams from multiple cameras |
US7190518B1 (en) * | 1996-01-22 | 2007-03-13 | 3Ality, Inc. | Systems for and methods of three dimensional viewing |
US20070072674A1 (en) * | 2005-09-12 | 2007-03-29 | Nintendo Co., Ltd. | Information processing program |
US20070085814A1 (en) * | 2003-09-20 | 2007-04-19 | Koninklijke Philips Electronics N.V. | Image display device |
US20070097208A1 (en) * | 2003-05-28 | 2007-05-03 | Satoshi Takemoto | Stereoscopic image display apparatus, text data processing apparatus, program, and storing medium |
US20070096125A1 (en) * | 2005-06-24 | 2007-05-03 | Uwe Vogel | Illumination device |
US20070097103A1 (en) * | 2003-09-11 | 2007-05-03 | Shoji Yoshioka | Portable display device |
US20070139371A1 (en) * | 2005-04-04 | 2007-06-21 | Harsham Bret A | Control system and method for differentiating multiple users utilizing multi-view display devices |
US20070146267A1 (en) * | 2005-12-22 | 2007-06-28 | Lg.Philips Lcd Co., Ltd. | Display device and method of driving the same |
US20070147827A1 (en) * | 2005-12-28 | 2007-06-28 | Arnold Sheynman | Methods and apparatus for wireless stereo video streaming |
US20070153916A1 (en) * | 2005-12-30 | 2007-07-05 | Sharp Laboratories Of America, Inc. | Wireless video transmission system |
US20070162392A1 (en) * | 2006-01-12 | 2007-07-12 | Microsoft Corporation | Management of Streaming Content |
US20070242068A1 (en) * | 2006-04-17 | 2007-10-18 | Seong-Cheol Han | 2d/3d image display device, electronic imaging display device, and driving method thereof |
US20070258140A1 (en) * | 2006-05-04 | 2007-11-08 | Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd. | Multiview autostereoscopic display |
US20070270218A1 (en) * | 2006-05-08 | 2007-11-22 | Nintendo Co., Ltd. | Storage medium having game program stored thereon and game apparatus |
US20070296874A1 (en) * | 2004-10-20 | 2007-12-27 | Fujitsu Ten Limited | Display Device,Method of Adjusting the Image Quality of the Display Device, Device for Adjusting the Image Quality and Device for Adjusting the Contrast |
US20080025390A1 (en) * | 2006-07-25 | 2008-01-31 | Fang Shi | Adaptive video frame interpolation |
US20080037120A1 (en) * | 2006-08-08 | 2008-02-14 | Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd | High resolution 2d/3d switchable display apparatus |
US20080043096A1 (en) * | 2006-04-04 | 2008-02-21 | Anthony Vetro | Method and System for Decoding and Displaying 3D Light Fields |
US20080043644A1 (en) * | 2006-08-18 | 2008-02-21 | Microsoft Corporation | Techniques to perform rate matching for multimedia conference calls |
US20080068329A1 (en) * | 2006-09-15 | 2008-03-20 | Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd. | Multi-view autostereoscopic display with improved resolution |
US7359105B2 (en) * | 2006-02-07 | 2008-04-15 | Sharp Kabushiki Kaisha | Spatial light modulator and a display device |
US20080126557A1 (en) * | 2006-09-08 | 2008-05-29 | Tetsuro Motoyama | System, method, and computer program product using an SNMP implementation to obtain vendor information from remote devices |
US20080133122A1 (en) * | 2006-03-29 | 2008-06-05 | Sanyo Electric Co., Ltd. | Multiple visual display device and vehicle-mounted navigation system |
US20080150853A1 (en) * | 2006-12-22 | 2008-06-26 | Hong Kong Applied Science and Technology Research Institute Company Limited | Backlight device and liquid crystal display incorporating the backlight device |
US20080165176A1 (en) * | 2006-09-28 | 2008-07-10 | Charles Jens Archer | Method of Video Display and Multiplayer Gaming |
US20080168129A1 (en) * | 2007-01-08 | 2008-07-10 | Jeffrey Robbin | Pairing a Media Server and a Media Client |
US20080184301A1 (en) * | 1999-10-29 | 2008-07-31 | Boylan Peter C | Interactive television system with programming-related links |
US20080191964A1 (en) * | 2005-04-22 | 2008-08-14 | Koninklijke Philips Electronics, N.V. | Auto-Stereoscopic Display With Mixed Mode For Concurrent Display of Two- and Three-Dimensional Images |
US20080192112A1 (en) * | 2005-03-18 | 2008-08-14 | Ntt Data Sanyo System Corporation | Stereoscopic Image Display Apparatus, Stereoscopic Image Displaying Method And Computer Program Product |
US20080204550A1 (en) * | 2005-04-29 | 2008-08-28 | Koninklijke Philips Electronics, N.V. | Stereoscopic Display Apparatus |
US20080246757A1 (en) * | 2005-04-25 | 2008-10-09 | Masahiro Ito | 3D Image Generation and Display System |
US7440193B2 (en) * | 2004-04-30 | 2008-10-21 | Gunasekaran R Alfred | Wide-angle variable focal length lens system |
US20080259233A1 (en) * | 2005-12-20 | 2008-10-23 | Koninklijke Philips Electronics, N.V. | Autostereoscopic Display Device |
US20080273242A1 (en) * | 2003-09-30 | 2008-11-06 | Graham John Woodgate | Directional Display Apparatus |
US20080284844A1 (en) * | 2003-02-05 | 2008-11-20 | Graham John Woodgate | Switchable Lens |
US20080303832A1 (en) * | 2007-06-11 | 2008-12-11 | Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd. | Method of generating two-dimensional/three-dimensional convertible stereoscopic image bitstream and method and apparatus for displaying the same |
US20090002178A1 (en) * | 2007-06-29 | 2009-01-01 | Microsoft Corporation | Dynamic mood sensing |
US20090002564A1 (en) * | 2007-06-26 | 2009-01-01 | Apple Inc. | Technique for adjusting a backlight during a brightness discontinuity |
US20090010264A1 (en) * | 2006-03-21 | 2009-01-08 | Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. | Method and System for Ensuring QoS and SLA Server |
US20090052164A1 (en) * | 2007-08-24 | 2009-02-26 | Masako Kashiwagi | Directional backlight, display apparatus, and stereoscopic display apparatus |
US20090051759A1 (en) * | 2005-05-27 | 2009-02-26 | Adkins Sean M | Equipment and methods for the synchronization of stereoscopic projection displays |
US20090058845A1 (en) * | 2004-10-20 | 2009-03-05 | Yasuhiro Fukuda | Display device |
US7511774B2 (en) * | 2005-11-30 | 2009-03-31 | Samsung Mobile Display Co., Ltd. | Three-dimensional display device |
US20090091579A1 (en) * | 2005-11-28 | 2009-04-09 | Yasuyuki Teranishi | Image Display Apparatus, Electronic Device, Portable Terminal Device, and Method of Displaying Image |
US20090102915A1 (en) * | 2005-04-25 | 2009-04-23 | Svyatoslav Ivanovich Arsenich | Stereoprojection system |
US7557876B2 (en) * | 2003-07-25 | 2009-07-07 | Nitto Denko Corporation | Anisotropic fluorescent thin crystal film and backlight system and liquid crystal display incorporating the same |
US20090174700A1 (en) * | 2005-03-31 | 2009-07-09 | Casio Computer Co., Ltd. | Illuminator for emitting at least two lights having directivity and display apparatus using same |
Family Cites Families (159)
Publication number | Priority date | Publication date | Assignee | Title |
---|---|---|---|---|
JPS56109649A (en) | 1980-02-05 | 1981-08-31 | Matsushita Electric Ind Co Ltd | Ultrasonic diagnosing device |
JPH05122733A (en) * | 1991-10-28 | 1993-05-18 | Nippon Hoso Kyokai <Nhk> | Three-dimensional picture display device |
JPH10232626A (en) * | 1997-02-20 | 1998-09-02 | Canon Inc | Stereoscopic image display device |
US6590605B1 (en) | 1998-10-14 | 2003-07-08 | Dimension Technologies, Inc. | Autostereoscopic display |
US6533420B1 (en) | 1999-01-22 | 2003-03-18 | Dimension Technologies, Inc. | Apparatus and method for generating and projecting autostereoscopic images |
US6591306B1 (en) * | 1999-04-01 | 2003-07-08 | Nec Corporation | IP network access for portable devices |
US8271336B2 (en) | 1999-11-22 | 2012-09-18 | Accenture Global Services Gmbh | Increased visibility during order management in a network-based supply chain environment |
US7389214B1 (en) | 2000-05-01 | 2008-06-17 | Accenture, Llp | Category analysis in a market management |
WO2001097531A2 (en) | 2000-06-12 | 2001-12-20 | Vrex, Inc. | Electronic stereoscopic media delivery system |
US6856581B1 (en) | 2000-10-31 | 2005-02-15 | International Business Machines Corporation | Batteryless, oscillatorless, binary time cell usable as an horological device with associated programming methods and devices |
US7478047B2 (en) | 2000-11-03 | 2009-01-13 | Zoesis, Inc. | Interactive character system |
DE10103922A1 (en) | 2001-01-30 | 2002-08-01 | Physoptics Opto Electronic Gmb | Interactive data viewing and operating system |
US20020194604A1 (en) | 2001-06-19 | 2002-12-19 | Sanchez Elizabeth C. | Interactive television virtual shopping cart |
JP2003322824A (en) * | 2002-02-26 | 2003-11-14 | Namco Ltd | Stereoscopic video display device and electronic apparatus |
JP3738843B2 (en) | 2002-06-11 | 2006-01-25 | ソニー株式会社 | Image detection apparatus, image detection method, and image detection program |
JP2004072202A (en) | 2002-08-01 | 2004-03-04 | Ktfreetel Co Ltd | Separate billing method of communication utility charge and apparatus therefor |
US20080008202A1 (en) | 2002-10-31 | 2008-01-10 | Terrell William C | Router with routing processors and methods for virtualization |
US7769668B2 (en) | 2002-12-09 | 2010-08-03 | Sam Balabon | System and method for facilitating trading of financial instruments |
US8270810B2 (en) | 2002-12-11 | 2012-09-18 | Broadcom Corporation | Method and system for advertisement insertion and playback for STB with PVR functionality |
US8799366B2 (en) | 2002-12-11 | 2014-08-05 | Broadcom Corporation | Migration of stored media through a media exchange network |
CA2457602A1 (en) | 2003-02-19 | 2004-08-19 | Impatica Inc. | Method of synchronizing streams of real time data |
US8438601B2 (en) | 2003-07-02 | 2013-05-07 | Rovi Solutions Corporation | Resource management for a networked personal video recording system |
GB0326005D0 (en) | 2003-11-07 | 2003-12-10 | Koninkl Philips Electronics Nv | Waveguide for autostereoscopic display |
US7488072B2 (en) | 2003-12-04 | 2009-02-10 | New York University | Eye tracked foveal display by controlled illumination |
JP4845893B2 (en) | 2004-01-20 | 2011-12-28 | シャープ株式会社 | Directional backlight and multi-view display devices |
KR100786862B1 (en) | 2004-11-30 | 2007-12-20 | 삼성에스디아이 주식회사 | Barrier device, three dimensional image display using the same and method thereof |
JP2008523689A (en) | 2004-12-10 | 2008-07-03 | コーニンクレッカ フィリップス エレクトロニクス エヌ ヴィ | Wireless video streaming and prioritized streaming using single layer coding |
JP2008527456A (en) | 2005-01-18 | 2008-07-24 | コーニンクレッカ フィリップス エレクトロニクス エヌ ヴィ | Multi-view display device |
KR100732961B1 (en) | 2005-04-01 | 2007-06-27 | 경희대학교 산학협력단 | Multiview scalable image encoding, decoding method and its apparatus |
GB2426351A (en) | 2005-05-19 | 2006-11-22 | Sharp Kk | A dual view display |
KR100813961B1 (en) * | 2005-06-14 | 2008-03-14 | 삼성전자주식회사 | Method and apparatus for transmitting and receiving of video, and transport stream structure thereof |
JP5091857B2 (en) | 2005-06-30 | 2012-12-05 | コーニンクレッカ フィリップス エレクトロニクス エヌ ヴィ | System control method |
KR100647517B1 (en) | 2005-08-26 | 2006-11-23 | (주)마스터이미지 | Cell type parallax-barrier and stereoscopic image display apparatus using the same |
EP1946180B1 (en) | 2005-11-02 | 2012-12-12 | Koninklijke Philips Electronics N.V. | Optical system for 3-dimensional display |
US20070110035A1 (en) | 2005-11-14 | 2007-05-17 | Broadcom Corporation, A California Corporation | Network nodes cooperatively routing traffic flow amongst wired and wireless networks |
KR100739067B1 (en) | 2005-11-30 | 2007-07-12 | 삼성에스디아이 주식회사 | Three-dimensional display device |
EP1967017B1 (en) * | 2005-12-20 | 2019-12-04 | Koninklijke Philips N.V. | Autostereoscopic display device |
US20070153122A1 (en) | 2005-12-30 | 2007-07-05 | Ayite Nii A | Apparatus and method for simultaneous multiple video channel viewing |
US8233034B2 (en) | 2006-02-10 | 2012-07-31 | Reald Inc. | Multi-functional active matrix liquid crystal displays |
US20070225994A1 (en) | 2006-03-17 | 2007-09-27 | Moore Barrett H | Method for Providing Private Civil Security Services Bundled with Second Party Products |
US8368749B2 (en) | 2006-03-27 | 2013-02-05 | Ge Inspection Technologies Lp | Article inspection apparatus |
WO2007117485A2 (en) | 2006-04-03 | 2007-10-18 | Sony Computer Entertainment Inc. | Screen sharing method and apparatus |
US20110090413A1 (en) | 2006-08-18 | 2011-04-21 | Industrial Technology Research Institute | 3-dimensional image display |
TWI378747B (en) * | 2006-08-18 | 2012-12-01 | Ind Tech Res Inst | Flexible electronic assembly |
US7844547B2 (en) | 2006-08-21 | 2010-11-30 | Carl Raymond Amos | Uncle gem IV, universal automatic instant money, data and precious metal and stone transfer machine |
US8587638B2 (en) | 2006-09-25 | 2013-11-19 | Nokia Corporation | Supporting a 3D presentation |
JP4669482B2 (en) * | 2006-09-29 | 2011-04-13 | セイコーエプソン株式会社 | Display device, image processing method, and electronic apparatus |
US8645176B2 (en) | 2006-10-05 | 2014-02-04 | Trimble Navigation Limited | Utilizing historical data in an asset management environment |
US20080086685A1 (en) * | 2006-10-05 | 2008-04-10 | James Janky | Method for delivering tailored asset information to a device |
US20080086391A1 (en) | 2006-10-05 | 2008-04-10 | Kurt Maynard | Impromptu asset tracking |
US7640223B2 (en) | 2006-11-16 | 2009-12-29 | University Of Tennessee Research Foundation | Method of organizing and presenting data in a table using stutter peak rule |
US7586681B2 (en) * | 2006-11-29 | 2009-09-08 | Honeywell International Inc. | Directional display |
WO2008067509A1 (en) | 2006-11-30 | 2008-06-05 | Westar Display Technologies, Inc. | Motion artifact measurement for display devices |
JP4285532B2 (en) | 2006-12-01 | 2009-06-24 | ソニー株式会社 | Backlight control device, backlight control method, and liquid crystal display device |
US8248462B2 (en) * | 2006-12-15 | 2012-08-21 | The Board Of Trustees Of The University Of Illinois | Dynamic parallax barrier autosteroscopic display system and method |
JP4686795B2 (en) * | 2006-12-27 | 2011-05-25 | 富士フイルム株式会社 | Image generating apparatus and image reproducing apparatus |
US7924456B1 (en) | 2007-01-12 | 2011-04-12 | Broadbus Technologies, Inc. | Data distribution and buffering |
CN101013559A (en) | 2007-01-30 | 2007-08-08 | 京东方科技集团股份有限公司 | LED brightness control circuit and backlight of LCD |
JP4255032B2 (en) | 2007-03-15 | 2009-04-15 | 富士通テン株式会社 | Display device and display method |
US7917853B2 (en) | 2007-03-21 | 2011-03-29 | At&T Intellectual Property I, L.P. | System and method of presenting media content |
US8269822B2 (en) | 2007-04-03 | 2012-09-18 | Sony Computer Entertainment America, LLC | Display viewing system and methods for optimizing display view based on active tracking |
US8600932B2 (en) | 2007-05-07 | 2013-12-03 | Trimble Navigation Limited | Telematic asset microfluidic analysis |
GB0709134D0 (en) * | 2007-05-11 | 2007-06-20 | Surman Philip | Multi-user autostereoscopic Display |
GB0709411D0 (en) | 2007-05-16 | 2007-06-27 | Barco Nv | Methods and systems for stereoscopic imaging |
KR101400285B1 (en) * | 2007-08-03 | 2014-05-30 | 삼성전자주식회사 | Front light unit and flat display apparatus employing the same |
US7911442B2 (en) | 2007-08-27 | 2011-03-22 | Au Optronics Corporation | Dynamic color gamut of LED backlight |
KR101362647B1 (en) | 2007-09-07 | 2014-02-12 | 삼성전자주식회사 | System and method for generating and palying three dimensional image file including two dimensional image |
US7881976B2 (en) | 2007-09-27 | 2011-02-01 | Virgin Mobile Usa, L.P. | Apparatus, methods and systems for discounted referral and recommendation of electronic content |
GB2453323A (en) | 2007-10-01 | 2009-04-08 | Sharp Kk | Flexible backlight arrangement and display |
TWI354115B (en) * | 2007-10-05 | 2011-12-11 | Ind Tech Res Inst | Three-dimensional display apparatus |
US8416247B2 (en) * | 2007-10-09 | 2013-04-09 | Sony Computer Entertaiment America Inc. | Increasing the number of advertising impressions in an interactive environment |
US8031175B2 (en) | 2008-04-21 | 2011-10-04 | Panasonic Corporation | Touch sensitive remote control system that detects hand size characteristics of user and adapts mapping to screen display |
US8355019B2 (en) * | 2007-11-02 | 2013-01-15 | Dimension Technologies, Inc. | 3D optical illusions from off-axis displays |
US8121191B1 (en) | 2007-11-13 | 2012-02-21 | Harmonic Inc. | AVC to SVC transcoder |
JP4956520B2 (en) | 2007-11-13 | 2012-06-20 | ミツミ電機株式会社 | Backlight device and liquid crystal display device using the same |
KR101439845B1 (en) | 2007-11-16 | 2014-09-12 | 삼성전자주식회사 | Digital image processing apparatus |
WO2009067670A1 (en) | 2007-11-21 | 2009-05-28 | Gesturetek, Inc. | Media preferences |
JP5844044B2 (en) | 2007-11-21 | 2016-01-13 | クアルコム,インコーポレイテッド | Device access control |
US20090138280A1 (en) | 2007-11-26 | 2009-05-28 | The General Electric Company | Multi-stepped default display protocols |
JP5236938B2 (en) | 2007-12-03 | 2013-07-17 | パナソニック株式会社 | Digital broadcast receiving apparatus, semiconductor integrated circuit, and digital broadcast receiving method |
TWI365302B (en) * | 2007-12-31 | 2012-06-01 | Ind Tech Res Inst | Stereo image display with switch function between horizontal display and vertical display |
US8339333B2 (en) | 2008-01-02 | 2012-12-25 | 3M Innovative Properties Company | Methods of reducing perceived image crosstalk in a multiview display |
CN101939998A (en) | 2008-02-08 | 2011-01-05 | 皇家飞利浦电子股份有限公司 | Autostereoscopic display device |
KR101451565B1 (en) | 2008-02-13 | 2014-10-16 | 삼성전자 주식회사 | Autostereoscopic display system |
JP5642347B2 (en) | 2008-03-07 | 2014-12-17 | ミツミ電機株式会社 | LCD backlight device |
KR101488199B1 (en) * | 2008-03-12 | 2015-01-30 | 삼성전자주식회사 | Method and apparatus for processing and reproducing image, and computer readable medium thereof |
US20090238378A1 (en) | 2008-03-18 | 2009-09-24 | Invism, Inc. | Enhanced Immersive Soundscapes Production |
US20090244266A1 (en) | 2008-03-26 | 2009-10-01 | Thomas Carl Brigham | Enhanced Three Dimensional Television |
JP4925354B2 (en) | 2008-03-31 | 2012-04-25 | 富士フイルム株式会社 | Image processing apparatus, image display apparatus, imaging apparatus, and image processing method |
GB0806183D0 (en) | 2008-04-04 | 2008-05-14 | Picsel Res Ltd | Presentation of objects in 3D displays |
US20090282429A1 (en) * | 2008-05-07 | 2009-11-12 | Sony Ericsson Mobile Communications Ab | Viewer tracking for displaying three dimensional views |
DE102008001644B4 (en) * | 2008-05-08 | 2010-03-04 | Seereal Technologies S.A. | Device for displaying three-dimensional images |
US20090295791A1 (en) | 2008-05-29 | 2009-12-03 | Microsoft Corporation | Three-dimensional environment created from video |
CN101291415B (en) | 2008-05-30 | 2010-07-21 | 华为终端有限公司 | Method, apparatus and system for three-dimensional video communication |
US20090319625A1 (en) | 2008-06-20 | 2009-12-24 | Alcatel Lucent | Interactivity in a digital public signage network architecture |
TWI401658B (en) | 2008-07-18 | 2013-07-11 | Hannstar Display Corp | Gate line driving circuit of lcd panel |
JP5127633B2 (en) * | 2008-08-25 | 2013-01-23 | 三菱電機株式会社 | Content playback apparatus and method |
US20100070987A1 (en) | 2008-09-12 | 2010-03-18 | At&T Intellectual Property I, L.P. | Mining viewer responses to multimedia content |
EP2326092A4 (en) | 2008-09-18 | 2012-11-21 | Panasonic Corp | Image decoding device, image coding device, image decoding method, image coding method, and program |
JP2010074557A (en) | 2008-09-18 | 2010-04-02 | Toshiba Corp | Television receiver |
KR101497511B1 (en) | 2008-09-19 | 2015-03-02 | 삼성전자주식회사 | APPARATUS FOR MULTIPLEXING 2 DIMENSIONAL and 3 DIMENSIONAL IMAGE AND VIDEO |
KR20100033067A (en) | 2008-09-19 | 2010-03-29 | 삼성전자주식회사 | Image display apparatus and method for both 2d and 3d image |
BRPI0904620A2 (en) | 2008-09-30 | 2020-08-18 | Panasonic Corporation | recording medium, playback device, lsi system, playback method, glasses, and display device for 3d images |
US20100107184A1 (en) | 2008-10-23 | 2010-04-29 | Peter Rae Shintani | TV with eye detection |
US8752087B2 (en) | 2008-11-07 | 2014-06-10 | At&T Intellectual Property I, L.P. | System and method for dynamically constructing personalized contextual video programs |
JP5859309B2 (en) | 2008-11-24 | 2016-02-10 | コーニンクレッカ フィリップス エヌ ヴェKoninklijke Philips N.V. | Combination of 3D video and auxiliary data |
US8103608B2 (en) | 2008-11-26 | 2012-01-24 | Microsoft Corporation | Reference model for data-driven analytics |
US20100128112A1 (en) | 2008-11-26 | 2010-05-27 | Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd | Immersive display system for interacting with three-dimensional content |
US20100135640A1 (en) | 2008-12-03 | 2010-06-03 | Dell Products L.P. | System and Method for Storing and Displaying 3-D Video Content |
US8209396B1 (en) | 2008-12-10 | 2012-06-26 | Howcast Media, Inc. | Video player |
US8913105B2 (en) | 2009-01-07 | 2014-12-16 | Thomson Licensing | Joint depth estimation |
WO2010095381A1 (en) | 2009-02-20 | 2010-08-26 | パナソニック株式会社 | Recording medium, reproduction device, and integrated circuit |
WO2010095440A1 (en) | 2009-02-20 | 2010-08-26 | パナソニック株式会社 | Recording medium, reproduction device, and integrated circuit |
US9565397B2 (en) | 2009-02-26 | 2017-02-07 | Akamai Technologies, Inc. | Deterministically skewing transmission of content streams |
US20100225576A1 (en) | 2009-03-03 | 2010-09-09 | Horizon Semiconductors Ltd. | Three-dimensional interactive system and method |
US8477175B2 (en) | 2009-03-09 | 2013-07-02 | Cisco Technology, Inc. | System and method for providing three dimensional imaging in a network environment |
US20100231511A1 (en) | 2009-03-10 | 2010-09-16 | David L. Henty | Interactive media system with multi-directional remote control and dual mode camera |
EP2409495A4 (en) | 2009-03-16 | 2013-02-06 | Lg Electronics Inc | A method of displaying three-dimensional image data and an apparatus of processing three-dimensional image data |
US20100247080A1 (en) * | 2009-03-27 | 2010-09-30 | Kug-Jin Yun | Method and apparatus for creating and consuming multiview image media file |
JP5695819B2 (en) | 2009-03-30 | 2015-04-08 | 日立マクセル株式会社 | TV operation method |
WO2010117315A1 (en) | 2009-04-09 | 2010-10-14 | Telefonaktiebolaget Lm Ericsson (Publ) | Media container file management |
WO2010126825A1 (en) | 2009-04-26 | 2010-11-04 | Nike International, Ltd. | Athletic watch |
US8315405B2 (en) | 2009-04-28 | 2012-11-20 | Bose Corporation | Coordinated ANR reference sound compression |
US8532310B2 (en) | 2010-03-30 | 2013-09-10 | Bose Corporation | Frequency-dependent ANR reference sound compression |
US20100280959A1 (en) | 2009-05-01 | 2010-11-04 | Darrel Stone | Real-time sourcing of service providers |
WO2010131359A1 (en) | 2009-05-15 | 2010-11-18 | 株式会社 東芝 | Image display device |
US8788676B2 (en) | 2009-05-22 | 2014-07-22 | Motorola Mobility Llc | Method and system for controlling data transmission to or from a mobile device |
US8704958B2 (en) | 2009-06-01 | 2014-04-22 | Lg Electronics Inc. | Image display device and operation method thereof |
US9237296B2 (en) | 2009-06-01 | 2016-01-12 | Lg Electronics Inc. | Image display apparatus and operating method thereof |
US9185328B2 (en) | 2009-06-08 | 2015-11-10 | Lg Electronics Inc. | Device and method for displaying a three-dimensional PIP image |
US20100309290A1 (en) | 2009-06-08 | 2010-12-09 | Stephen Brooks Myers | System for capture and display of stereoscopic content |
US8411746B2 (en) | 2009-06-12 | 2013-04-02 | Qualcomm Incorporated | Multiview video coding over MPEG-2 systems |
US20100321465A1 (en) | 2009-06-19 | 2010-12-23 | Dominique A Behrens Pa | Method, System and Computer Program Product for Mobile Telepresence Interactions |
CN102713738B (en) | 2009-08-07 | 2016-01-27 | 瑞尔D股份有限公司 | There is the stereoscopic flat panel display of continuous illumination backlight |
US8976871B2 (en) | 2009-09-16 | 2015-03-10 | Qualcomm Incorporated | Media extractor tracks for file format track selection |
US8446462B2 (en) | 2009-10-15 | 2013-05-21 | At&T Intellectual Property I, L.P. | Method and system for time-multiplexed shared display |
US20110093882A1 (en) | 2009-10-21 | 2011-04-21 | Candelore Brant L | Parental control through the HDMI interface |
KR101600818B1 (en) * | 2009-11-06 | 2016-03-09 | 삼성디스플레이 주식회사 | 3 three dimensional optical module and display device including the same |
US8705624B2 (en) | 2009-11-24 | 2014-04-22 | STMicroelectronics International N. V. | Parallel decoding for scalable video coding |
US8335763B2 (en) | 2009-12-04 | 2012-12-18 | Microsoft Corporation | Concurrently presented data subfeeds |
US8462197B2 (en) | 2009-12-17 | 2013-06-11 | Motorola Mobility Llc | 3D video transforming device |
US20110153362A1 (en) | 2009-12-17 | 2011-06-23 | Valin David A | Method and mechanism for identifying protecting, requesting, assisting and managing information |
US8964013B2 (en) | 2009-12-31 | 2015-02-24 | Broadcom Corporation | Display with elastic light manipulator |
US8854531B2 (en) | 2009-12-31 | 2014-10-07 | Broadcom Corporation | Multiple remote controllers that each simultaneously controls a different visual presentation of a 2D/3D display |
US8823782B2 (en) | 2009-12-31 | 2014-09-02 | Broadcom Corporation | Remote control with integrated position, viewer identification and optical and audio test |
US9247286B2 (en) | 2009-12-31 | 2016-01-26 | Broadcom Corporation | Frame formatting supporting mixed two and three dimensional video data communication |
US20110199469A1 (en) | 2010-02-15 | 2011-08-18 | Gallagher Andrew C | Detection and display of stereo images |
US8384774B2 (en) | 2010-02-15 | 2013-02-26 | Eastman Kodak Company | Glasses for viewing stereo images |
KR101356248B1 (en) | 2010-02-19 | 2014-01-29 | 엘지디스플레이 주식회사 | Image display device |
US9285589B2 (en) | 2010-02-28 | 2016-03-15 | Microsoft Technology Licensing, Llc | AR glasses with event and sensor triggered control of AR eyepiece applications |
US9129295B2 (en) | 2010-02-28 | 2015-09-08 | Microsoft Technology Licensing, Llc | See-through near-eye display glasses with a fast response photochromic film system for quick transition from dark to clear |
US8964298B2 (en) | 2010-02-28 | 2015-02-24 | Microsoft Corporation | Video display modification based on sensor input for a see-through near-to-eye display |
KR101324412B1 (en) | 2010-05-06 | 2013-11-01 | 엘지디스플레이 주식회사 | Stereoscopic image display and driving method thereof |
WO2011142141A1 (en) | 2010-05-13 | 2011-11-17 | パナソニック株式会社 | Display device and image viewing system |
KR101255711B1 (en) | 2010-07-02 | 2013-04-17 | 엘지디스플레이 주식회사 | 3d image display device and driving method thereof |
US8605136B2 (en) | 2010-08-10 | 2013-12-10 | Sony Corporation | 2D to 3D user interface content data conversion |
US8363928B1 (en) | 2010-12-24 | 2013-01-29 | Trimble Navigation Ltd. | General orientation positioning system |
WO2012132797A1 (en) | 2011-03-31 | 2012-10-04 | 富士フイルム株式会社 | Image capturing device and image capturing method |
WO2013078317A1 (en) * | 2011-11-21 | 2013-05-30 | Schlumberger Technology Corporation | Interface for controlling and improving drilling operations |
-
2010
- 2010-05-05 US US12/774,307 patent/US8964013B2/en active Active
- 2010-05-05 US US12/774,225 patent/US20110157322A1/en not_active Abandoned
- 2010-07-28 US US12/845,440 patent/US20110157697A1/en not_active Abandoned
- 2010-07-28 US US12/845,409 patent/US20110157696A1/en not_active Abandoned
- 2010-07-28 US US12/845,461 patent/US8767050B2/en active Active
- 2010-12-22 EP EP20100015980 patent/EP2357508A1/en not_active Withdrawn
- 2010-12-22 EP EP20100015984 patent/EP2357630A1/en not_active Ceased
- 2010-12-23 EP EP20100016055 patent/EP2357631A1/en not_active Ceased
- 2010-12-30 US US12/982,330 patent/US20110157326A1/en not_active Abandoned
- 2010-12-30 US US12/982,362 patent/US9049440B2/en active Active
- 2010-12-30 EP EP20100016190 patent/EP2346021B1/en active Active
- 2010-12-30 TW TW99146892A patent/TWI467234B/en not_active IP Right Cessation
- 2010-12-30 US US12/982,377 patent/US20110157327A1/en not_active Abandoned
- 2010-12-30 US US12/982,088 patent/US9066092B2/en active Active
- 2010-12-30 US US12/982,031 patent/US9019263B2/en active Active
- 2010-12-30 US US12/982,156 patent/US9654767B2/en active Active
- 2010-12-30 TW TW99146883A patent/TW201142356A/en unknown
- 2010-12-30 US US12/982,069 patent/US8922545B2/en active Active
- 2010-12-30 US US12/982,140 patent/US20110161843A1/en not_active Abandoned
- 2010-12-30 US US12/982,053 patent/US20110157309A1/en not_active Abandoned
- 2010-12-30 US US12/982,248 patent/US20110157315A1/en not_active Abandoned
- 2010-12-30 CN CN2010106160608A patent/CN102183840A/en active Pending
- 2010-12-30 US US12/982,020 patent/US20110157257A1/en not_active Abandoned
- 2010-12-30 US US12/982,273 patent/US9979954B2/en active Active
- 2010-12-30 US US12/982,062 patent/US8687042B2/en active Active
- 2010-12-30 US US12/982,173 patent/US9143770B2/en active Active
- 2010-12-30 US US12/982,124 patent/US9124885B2/en active Active
- 2010-12-30 US US12/982,309 patent/US9204138B2/en active Active
- 2010-12-30 US US12/982,047 patent/US20110157330A1/en not_active Abandoned
- 2010-12-30 US US12/982,199 patent/US8988506B2/en active Active
- 2010-12-30 US US12/982,212 patent/US9013546B2/en active Active
- 2010-12-31 CN CN201010616920.8A patent/CN102183841B/en active Active
- 2010-12-31 TW TW99147124A patent/TW201142357A/en unknown
- 2010-12-31 CN CN201010619646XA patent/CN102215408A/en active Pending
-
2012
- 2012-03-02 HK HK12102171A patent/HK1161754A1/en not_active IP Right Cessation
-
2014
- 2014-10-01 US US14/504,095 patent/US20150015668A1/en not_active Abandoned
-
2015
- 2015-02-06 US US14/616,130 patent/US20150156473A1/en not_active Abandoned
- 2015-05-28 US US14/723,922 patent/US20150264341A1/en not_active Abandoned
Patent Citations (105)
Publication number | Priority date | Publication date | Assignee | Title |
---|---|---|---|---|
US4829365A (en) * | 1986-03-07 | 1989-05-09 | Dimension Technologies, Inc. | Autostereoscopic display with illuminating lines, light valve and mask |
US5493427A (en) * | 1993-05-25 | 1996-02-20 | Sharp Kabushiki Kaisha | Three-dimensional display unit with a variable lens |
US20030154261A1 (en) * | 1994-10-17 | 2003-08-14 | The Regents Of The University Of California, A Corporation Of The State Of California | Distributed hypermedia method and system for automatically invoking external application providing interaction and display of embedded objects within a hypermedia document |
US20040036763A1 (en) * | 1994-11-14 | 2004-02-26 | Swift David C. | Intelligent method and system for producing and displaying stereoscopically-multiplexed images of three-dimensional objects for use in realistic stereoscopic viewing thereof in interactive virtual reality display environments |
US5615046A (en) * | 1995-01-23 | 1997-03-25 | Cyber Scientific Inc. | Stereoscopic viewing system |
US6094216A (en) * | 1995-05-22 | 2000-07-25 | Canon Kabushiki Kaisha | Stereoscopic image display method, and stereoscopic image display apparatus using the method |
US20040141237A1 (en) * | 1995-06-07 | 2004-07-22 | Wohlstadter Jacob N. | Three dimensional imaging system |
US6909555B2 (en) * | 1995-06-07 | 2005-06-21 | Jacob N. Wohlstadter | Three dimensional imaging system |
US5945965A (en) * | 1995-06-29 | 1999-08-31 | Canon Kabushiki Kaisha | Stereoscopic image display method |
US5959597A (en) * | 1995-09-28 | 1999-09-28 | Sony Corporation | Image/audio reproducing system |
US7123213B2 (en) * | 1995-10-05 | 2006-10-17 | Semiconductor Energy Laboratory Co., Ltd. | Three dimensional display unit and display method |
US6049424A (en) * | 1995-11-15 | 2000-04-11 | Sanyo Electric Co., Ltd. | Three dimensional display device |
US7190518B1 (en) * | 1996-01-22 | 2007-03-13 | 3Ality, Inc. | Systems for and methods of three dimensional viewing |
US7038698B1 (en) * | 1996-02-08 | 2006-05-02 | Palm Charles S | 3D stereo browser for the internet |
US6023277A (en) * | 1996-07-03 | 2000-02-08 | Canon Kabushiki Kaisha | Display control apparatus and method |
US5855425A (en) * | 1996-07-19 | 1999-01-05 | Sanyo Electric Co., Ltd. | Stereoscopic display |
US5969850A (en) * | 1996-09-27 | 1999-10-19 | Sharp Kabushiki Kaisha | Spatial light modulator, directional display and directional light source |
US5990975A (en) * | 1996-11-22 | 1999-11-23 | Acer Peripherals, Inc. | Dual screen displaying device |
US6285368B1 (en) * | 1997-02-10 | 2001-09-04 | Canon Kabushiki Kaisha | Image display system and image display apparatus and information processing apparatus in the system |
US7030903B2 (en) * | 1997-02-20 | 2006-04-18 | Canon Kabushiki Kaisha | Image display system, information processing apparatus, and method of controlling the same |
US6188442B1 (en) * | 1997-08-01 | 2001-02-13 | International Business Machines Corporation | Multiviewer display system for television monitors |
US6710920B1 (en) * | 1998-03-27 | 2004-03-23 | Sanyo Electric Co., Ltd | Stereoscopic display |
US6144375A (en) * | 1998-08-14 | 2000-11-07 | Praja Inc. | Multi-perspective viewer for content-based interactivity |
US6697687B1 (en) * | 1998-11-09 | 2004-02-24 | Hitachi, Ltd. | Image display apparatus having audio output control means in accordance with image signal type |
US20030012425A1 (en) * | 1998-11-12 | 2003-01-16 | Canon Kabushiki Kaisha | Viewpoint position detection apparatus and method, and stereoscopic image display system |
US20020171666A1 (en) * | 1999-02-19 | 2002-11-21 | Takaaki Endo | Image processing apparatus for interpolating and generating images from an arbitrary view point |
US20080184301A1 (en) * | 1999-10-29 | 2008-07-31 | Boylan Peter C | Interactive television system with programming-related links |
US20020010798A1 (en) * | 2000-04-20 | 2002-01-24 | Israel Ben-Shaul | Differentiated content and application delivery via internet |
US20030103165A1 (en) * | 2000-05-19 | 2003-06-05 | Werner Bullinger | System for operating a consumer electronics appaliance |
US20020037037A1 (en) * | 2000-09-22 | 2002-03-28 | Philips Electronics North America Corporation | Preferred transmission/streaming order of fine-granular scalability |
US20020167862A1 (en) * | 2001-04-03 | 2002-11-14 | Carlo Tomasi | Method and apparatus for approximating a source position of a sound-causing event for determining an input used in operating an electronic device |
US20040252187A1 (en) * | 2001-09-10 | 2004-12-16 | Alden Ray M. | Processes and apparatuses for efficient multiple program and 3D display |
US20060256136A1 (en) * | 2001-10-01 | 2006-11-16 | Adobe Systems Incorporated, A Delaware Corporation | Compositing two-dimensional and three-dimensional image layers |
US20030137506A1 (en) * | 2001-11-30 | 2003-07-24 | Daniel Efran | Image-based rendering for 3D viewing |
US20030223499A1 (en) * | 2002-04-09 | 2003-12-04 | Nicholas Routhier | Process and system for encoding and playback of stereoscopic video sequences |
US20050248561A1 (en) * | 2002-04-25 | 2005-11-10 | Norio Ito | Multimedia information generation method and multimedia information reproduction device |
US20050259147A1 (en) * | 2002-07-16 | 2005-11-24 | Nam Jeho | Apparatus and method for adapting 2d and 3d stereoscopic video signal |
US20040027452A1 (en) * | 2002-08-07 | 2004-02-12 | Yun Kug Jin | Method and apparatus for multiplexing multi-view three-dimensional moving picture |
US20040041747A1 (en) * | 2002-08-27 | 2004-03-04 | Nec Corporation | 3D image/2D image switching display apparatus and portable terminal device |
US20040239231A1 (en) * | 2002-10-30 | 2004-12-02 | Keisuke Miyagawa | Display device and electronic equipment |
US20040109093A1 (en) * | 2002-12-05 | 2004-06-10 | Small-Stryker Aaron Tug | Method and apparatus for simultaneous television video presentation and separate viewing of different broadcasts |
US20080284844A1 (en) * | 2003-02-05 | 2008-11-20 | Graham John Woodgate | Switchable Lens |
US20040164292A1 (en) * | 2003-02-21 | 2004-08-26 | Yeh-Jiun Tung | Transflective display having an OLED backlight |
US20070097208A1 (en) * | 2003-05-28 | 2007-05-03 | Satoshi Takemoto | Stereoscopic image display apparatus, text data processing apparatus, program, and storing medium |
US7557876B2 (en) * | 2003-07-25 | 2009-07-07 | Nitto Denko Corporation | Anisotropic fluorescent thin crystal film and backlight system and liquid crystal display incorporating the same |
US20050073472A1 (en) * | 2003-07-26 | 2005-04-07 | Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd. | Method of removing Moire pattern in 3D image display apparatus using complete parallax |
US20070097103A1 (en) * | 2003-09-11 | 2007-05-03 | Shoji Yoshioka | Portable display device |
US20070085814A1 (en) * | 2003-09-20 | 2007-04-19 | Koninklijke Philips Electronics N.V. | Image display device |
US20080273242A1 (en) * | 2003-09-30 | 2008-11-06 | Graham John Woodgate | Directional Display Apparatus |
US20050128353A1 (en) * | 2003-12-16 | 2005-06-16 | Young Bruce A. | System and method for using second remote control device for sub-picture control in television receiver |
US7091471B2 (en) * | 2004-03-15 | 2006-08-15 | Agilent Technologies, Inc. | Using eye detection for providing control and power management of electronic devices |
US20050237487A1 (en) * | 2004-04-23 | 2005-10-27 | Chang Nelson L A | Color wheel assembly for stereoscopic imaging |
US7440193B2 (en) * | 2004-04-30 | 2008-10-21 | Gunasekaran R Alfred | Wide-angle variable focal length lens system |
US20060050785A1 (en) * | 2004-09-09 | 2006-03-09 | Nucore Technology Inc. | Inserting a high resolution still image into a lower resolution video stream |
US20070296874A1 (en) * | 2004-10-20 | 2007-12-27 | Fujitsu Ten Limited | Display Device,Method of Adjusting the Image Quality of the Display Device, Device for Adjusting the Image Quality and Device for Adjusting the Contrast |
US20090058845A1 (en) * | 2004-10-20 | 2009-03-05 | Yasuhiro Fukuda | Display device |
US20060087556A1 (en) * | 2004-10-21 | 2006-04-27 | Kazunari Era | Stereoscopic image display device |
US20060109242A1 (en) * | 2004-11-19 | 2006-05-25 | Simpkins Daniel S | User interface for impaired users |
US20060118514A1 (en) * | 2004-11-30 | 2006-06-08 | Agoura Technologies, Inc. | Applications and fabrication techniques for large scale wire grid polarizers |
US20060139490A1 (en) * | 2004-12-15 | 2006-06-29 | Fekkes Wilhelmus F | Synchronizing audio with delayed video |
US20060139448A1 (en) * | 2004-12-29 | 2006-06-29 | Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd. | 3D displays with flexible switching capability of 2D/3D viewing modes |
US20080192112A1 (en) * | 2005-03-18 | 2008-08-14 | Ntt Data Sanyo System Corporation | Stereoscopic Image Display Apparatus, Stereoscopic Image Displaying Method And Computer Program Product |
US20090174700A1 (en) * | 2005-03-31 | 2009-07-09 | Casio Computer Co., Ltd. | Illuminator for emitting at least two lights having directivity and display apparatus using same |
US20070139371A1 (en) * | 2005-04-04 | 2007-06-21 | Harsham Bret A | Control system and method for differentiating multiple users utilizing multi-view display devices |
US20080191964A1 (en) * | 2005-04-22 | 2008-08-14 | Koninklijke Philips Electronics, N.V. | Auto-Stereoscopic Display With Mixed Mode For Concurrent Display of Two- and Three-Dimensional Images |
US20090102915A1 (en) * | 2005-04-25 | 2009-04-23 | Svyatoslav Ivanovich Arsenich | Stereoprojection system |
US20080246757A1 (en) * | 2005-04-25 | 2008-10-09 | Masahiro Ito | 3D Image Generation and Display System |
US20060244918A1 (en) * | 2005-04-27 | 2006-11-02 | Actuality Systems, Inc. | Minimized-thickness angular scanner of electromagnetic radiation |
US20080204550A1 (en) * | 2005-04-29 | 2008-08-28 | Koninklijke Philips Electronics, N.V. | Stereoscopic Display Apparatus |
US20060256302A1 (en) * | 2005-05-13 | 2006-11-16 | Microsoft Corporation | Three-dimensional (3D) image projection |
US20060256260A1 (en) * | 2005-05-16 | 2006-11-16 | Lg Electronics Inc. | Display device with polarizer sheet and method for manufacturing polarizer sheet |
US20090051759A1 (en) * | 2005-05-27 | 2009-02-26 | Adkins Sean M | Equipment and methods for the synchronization of stereoscopic projection displays |
US20060271791A1 (en) * | 2005-05-27 | 2006-11-30 | Sbc Knowledge Ventures, L.P. | Method and system for biometric based access control of media content presentation devices |
US20070096125A1 (en) * | 2005-06-24 | 2007-05-03 | Uwe Vogel | Illumination device |
US20070002041A1 (en) * | 2005-07-02 | 2007-01-04 | Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd. | Method and apparatus for encoding/decoding video data to implement local three-dimensional video |
US20070008406A1 (en) * | 2005-07-08 | 2007-01-11 | Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd. | High resolution 2D-3D switchable autostereoscopic display apparatus |
US20070008620A1 (en) * | 2005-07-11 | 2007-01-11 | Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd. | Switchable autostereoscopic display |
US20070052807A1 (en) * | 2005-09-07 | 2007-03-08 | Fuji Xerox Co., Ltd. | System and method for user monitoring interface of 3-D video streams from multiple cameras |
US20070072674A1 (en) * | 2005-09-12 | 2007-03-29 | Nintendo Co., Ltd. | Information processing program |
US20090091579A1 (en) * | 2005-11-28 | 2009-04-09 | Yasuyuki Teranishi | Image Display Apparatus, Electronic Device, Portable Terminal Device, and Method of Displaying Image |
US7511774B2 (en) * | 2005-11-30 | 2009-03-31 | Samsung Mobile Display Co., Ltd. | Three-dimensional display device |
US20080259233A1 (en) * | 2005-12-20 | 2008-10-23 | Koninklijke Philips Electronics, N.V. | Autostereoscopic Display Device |
US20070146267A1 (en) * | 2005-12-22 | 2007-06-28 | Lg.Philips Lcd Co., Ltd. | Display device and method of driving the same |
US20070147827A1 (en) * | 2005-12-28 | 2007-06-28 | Arnold Sheynman | Methods and apparatus for wireless stereo video streaming |
US20070153916A1 (en) * | 2005-12-30 | 2007-07-05 | Sharp Laboratories Of America, Inc. | Wireless video transmission system |
US20070162392A1 (en) * | 2006-01-12 | 2007-07-12 | Microsoft Corporation | Management of Streaming Content |
US7359105B2 (en) * | 2006-02-07 | 2008-04-15 | Sharp Kabushiki Kaisha | Spatial light modulator and a display device |
US20090010264A1 (en) * | 2006-03-21 | 2009-01-08 | Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. | Method and System for Ensuring QoS and SLA Server |
US20080133122A1 (en) * | 2006-03-29 | 2008-06-05 | Sanyo Electric Co., Ltd. | Multiple visual display device and vehicle-mounted navigation system |
US20080043096A1 (en) * | 2006-04-04 | 2008-02-21 | Anthony Vetro | Method and System for Decoding and Displaying 3D Light Fields |
US20070242068A1 (en) * | 2006-04-17 | 2007-10-18 | Seong-Cheol Han | 2d/3d image display device, electronic imaging display device, and driving method thereof |
US20070258140A1 (en) * | 2006-05-04 | 2007-11-08 | Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd. | Multiview autostereoscopic display |
US20070270218A1 (en) * | 2006-05-08 | 2007-11-22 | Nintendo Co., Ltd. | Storage medium having game program stored thereon and game apparatus |
US20080025390A1 (en) * | 2006-07-25 | 2008-01-31 | Fang Shi | Adaptive video frame interpolation |
US20080037120A1 (en) * | 2006-08-08 | 2008-02-14 | Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd | High resolution 2d/3d switchable display apparatus |
US20080043644A1 (en) * | 2006-08-18 | 2008-02-21 | Microsoft Corporation | Techniques to perform rate matching for multimedia conference calls |
US20080126557A1 (en) * | 2006-09-08 | 2008-05-29 | Tetsuro Motoyama | System, method, and computer program product using an SNMP implementation to obtain vendor information from remote devices |
US20080068329A1 (en) * | 2006-09-15 | 2008-03-20 | Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd. | Multi-view autostereoscopic display with improved resolution |
US20080165176A1 (en) * | 2006-09-28 | 2008-07-10 | Charles Jens Archer | Method of Video Display and Multiplayer Gaming |
US20080150853A1 (en) * | 2006-12-22 | 2008-06-26 | Hong Kong Applied Science and Technology Research Institute Company Limited | Backlight device and liquid crystal display incorporating the backlight device |
US20080168129A1 (en) * | 2007-01-08 | 2008-07-10 | Jeffrey Robbin | Pairing a Media Server and a Media Client |
US20080303832A1 (en) * | 2007-06-11 | 2008-12-11 | Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd. | Method of generating two-dimensional/three-dimensional convertible stereoscopic image bitstream and method and apparatus for displaying the same |
US20090002564A1 (en) * | 2007-06-26 | 2009-01-01 | Apple Inc. | Technique for adjusting a backlight during a brightness discontinuity |
US20090002178A1 (en) * | 2007-06-29 | 2009-01-01 | Microsoft Corporation | Dynamic mood sensing |
US20090052164A1 (en) * | 2007-08-24 | 2009-02-26 | Masako Kashiwagi | Directional backlight, display apparatus, and stereoscopic display apparatus |
Cited By (70)
Publication number | Priority date | Publication date | Assignee | Title |
---|---|---|---|---|
US20120091918A1 (en) * | 2009-05-29 | 2012-04-19 | Koninklijke Philips Electronics N.V. | Picture selection method for modular lighting system |
US8767050B2 (en) | 2009-12-31 | 2014-07-01 | Broadcom Corporation | Display supporting multiple simultaneous 3D views |
US8988506B2 (en) | 2009-12-31 | 2015-03-24 | Broadcom Corporation | Transcoder supporting selective delivery of 2D, stereoscopic 3D, and multi-view 3D content from source video |
US8687042B2 (en) | 2009-12-31 | 2014-04-01 | Broadcom Corporation | Set-top box circuitry supporting 2D and 3D content reductions to accommodate viewing environment constraints |
US9013546B2 (en) | 2009-12-31 | 2015-04-21 | Broadcom Corporation | Adaptable media stream servicing two and three dimensional content |
US20110157697A1 (en) * | 2009-12-31 | 2011-06-30 | Broadcom Corporation | Adaptable parallax barrier supporting mixed 2d and stereoscopic 3d display regions |
US9979954B2 (en) | 2009-12-31 | 2018-05-22 | Avago Technologies General Ip (Singapore) Pte. Ltd. | Eyewear with time shared viewing supporting delivery of differing content to multiple viewers |
US9654767B2 (en) | 2009-12-31 | 2017-05-16 | Avago Technologies General Ip (Singapore) Pte. Ltd. | Programming architecture supporting mixed two and three dimensional displays |
US9019263B2 (en) | 2009-12-31 | 2015-04-28 | Broadcom Corporation | Coordinated driving of adaptable light manipulator, backlighting and pixel array in support of adaptable 2D and 3D displays |
US9247286B2 (en) | 2009-12-31 | 2016-01-26 | Broadcom Corporation | Frame formatting supporting mixed two and three dimensional video data communication |
US9143770B2 (en) | 2009-12-31 | 2015-09-22 | Broadcom Corporation | Application programming interface supporting mixed two and three dimensional displays |
US20110164188A1 (en) * | 2009-12-31 | 2011-07-07 | Broadcom Corporation | Remote control with integrated position, viewer identification and optical and audio test |
US20110164115A1 (en) * | 2009-12-31 | 2011-07-07 | Broadcom Corporation | Transcoder supporting selective delivery of 2d, stereoscopic 3d, and multi-view 3d content from source video |
US9204138B2 (en) | 2009-12-31 | 2015-12-01 | Broadcom Corporation | User controlled regional display of mixed two and three dimensional content |
US9124885B2 (en) | 2009-12-31 | 2015-09-01 | Broadcom Corporation | Operating system supporting mixed 2D, stereoscopic 3D and multi-view 3D displays |
US8823782B2 (en) | 2009-12-31 | 2014-09-02 | Broadcom Corporation | Remote control with integrated position, viewer identification and optical and audio test |
US8854531B2 (en) | 2009-12-31 | 2014-10-07 | Broadcom Corporation | Multiple remote controllers that each simultaneously controls a different visual presentation of a 2D/3D display |
US20110157696A1 (en) * | 2009-12-31 | 2011-06-30 | Broadcom Corporation | Display with adaptable parallax barrier |
US9066092B2 (en) | 2009-12-31 | 2015-06-23 | Broadcom Corporation | Communication infrastructure including simultaneous video pathways for multi-viewer support |
US8922545B2 (en) | 2009-12-31 | 2014-12-30 | Broadcom Corporation | Three-dimensional display system with adaptation based on viewing reference of viewer(s) |
US9049440B2 (en) | 2009-12-31 | 2015-06-02 | Broadcom Corporation | Independent viewer tailoring of same media source content via a common 2D-3D display |
US8964013B2 (en) | 2009-12-31 | 2015-02-24 | Broadcom Corporation | Display with elastic light manipulator |
US9279989B2 (en) * | 2010-03-31 | 2016-03-08 | Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd. | Backlight unit, 3D display having the same, and method of forming 3D image |
US20120001956A1 (en) * | 2010-07-01 | 2012-01-05 | Sony Corporation | Stereoscopic display device and display drive circuit |
US8873142B2 (en) * | 2011-03-25 | 2014-10-28 | Japan Display West Inc. | Display panel, display device, and electronic apparatus capable of improved stereoscopic display |
US20120243084A1 (en) * | 2011-03-25 | 2012-09-27 | Sony Corporation | Display panel, display device, and electronic apparatus |
US20150009193A1 (en) * | 2011-03-25 | 2015-01-08 | Japan Display West Inc. | Display panel, display device, and electronic apparatus |
US9294760B2 (en) * | 2011-06-28 | 2016-03-22 | Lg Electronics Inc. | Image display device and controlling method thereof |
US20130033583A1 (en) * | 2011-06-28 | 2013-02-07 | Lg Electronics Inc. | Image display device and controlling method thereof |
US20130050283A1 (en) * | 2011-08-30 | 2013-02-28 | Sony Corporation | Display device and electronic unit |
US20130088526A1 (en) * | 2011-10-06 | 2013-04-11 | Japan Display West, Inc. | Display apparatus and electronic device |
US9019324B2 (en) * | 2011-10-06 | 2015-04-28 | Japan Display Inc. | Display apparatus and electronic device |
US20140327708A1 (en) * | 2011-11-15 | 2014-11-06 | Sharp Kabushiki Kaisha | Display device |
US20130201091A1 (en) * | 2012-02-06 | 2013-08-08 | Innolux Corporation | Three-dimensional display |
US20150062315A1 (en) * | 2012-04-18 | 2015-03-05 | The Regents Of The University Of California | Simultaneous 2d and 3d images on a display |
US10082613B2 (en) * | 2012-06-01 | 2018-09-25 | Leia Inc. | Directional backlight with a modulation layer |
US20160033706A1 (en) * | 2012-06-01 | 2016-02-04 | Leia Inc. | Directional backlight with a modulation layer |
US9497448B2 (en) * | 2012-12-31 | 2016-11-15 | Lg Display Co., Ltd. | Image processing method of transparent display apparatus and apparatus thereof |
CN104919357A (en) * | 2012-12-31 | 2015-09-16 | 乐金显示有限公司 | Image processing method of transparent display apparatus and apparatus thereof |
KR102263255B1 (en) | 2012-12-31 | 2021-06-10 | 엘지디스플레이 주식회사 | Image processing method and transparent display apparatus using the method thereof |
KR20140088029A (en) * | 2012-12-31 | 2014-07-09 | 엘지디스플레이 주식회사 | Image processing method and transparent display apparatus using the method thereof |
US20140184758A1 (en) * | 2012-12-31 | 2014-07-03 | Lg Display Co., Ltd. | Image processing method of transparent display apparatus and apparatus thereof |
US10003789B2 (en) | 2013-06-24 | 2018-06-19 | The Regents Of The University Of California | Practical two-frame 3D+2D TV |
US20150255041A1 (en) * | 2014-03-07 | 2015-09-10 | Boe Technology Group Co., Ltd. | Driving method and driving system for display panel |
US9626937B2 (en) * | 2014-03-07 | 2017-04-18 | Boe Technology Group Co., Ltd. | Driving method and driving system for display panel |
US20160111057A1 (en) * | 2014-10-15 | 2016-04-21 | Samsung Display Co., Ltd. | Method of driving display panel, display panel driving apparatus for performing the method and display apparatus having the display panel driving apparatus |
US9953602B2 (en) * | 2014-10-15 | 2018-04-24 | Samsung Display Co., Ltd. | Method of driving display panel, display panel driving apparatus for performing the method and display apparatus having the display panel driving apparatus |
US10852560B2 (en) | 2015-01-10 | 2020-12-01 | Leia Inc. | Two-dimensional/three-dimensional (2D/3D) switchable display backlight and electronic display |
US10768357B2 (en) | 2015-01-10 | 2020-09-08 | Leia Inc. | Polarization-mixing light guide and multibeam grating-based backlighting using same |
US10684404B2 (en) | 2015-01-10 | 2020-06-16 | Leia Inc. | Diffraction grating-based backlighting having controlled diffractive coupling efficiency |
US10948647B2 (en) | 2015-01-19 | 2021-03-16 | Leia Inc. | Unidirectional grating-based backlighting employing a reflective island |
US20160212415A1 (en) * | 2015-01-19 | 2016-07-21 | Samsung Display Co., Ltd. | Display device |
US9588352B2 (en) * | 2015-01-19 | 2017-03-07 | Samsung Display Co., Ltd. | Autostereoscopic image display device with a difference image map |
CN107209393A (en) * | 2015-01-28 | 2017-09-26 | 镭亚股份有限公司 | It is three-dimensional(3D)Electronic console |
US11194086B2 (en) * | 2015-01-28 | 2021-12-07 | Leia Inc. | Three-dimensional (3D) electronic display |
US10670920B2 (en) | 2015-03-16 | 2020-06-02 | Leia Inc. | Unidirectional grating-based backlighting employing an angularly selective reflective layer |
US10788619B2 (en) | 2015-04-23 | 2020-09-29 | Leia Inc. | Dual light guide grating-based backlight and electronic display using same |
US10578793B2 (en) | 2015-05-09 | 2020-03-03 | Leia Inc. | Color-scanning grating-based backlight and electronic display using same |
US10703375B2 (en) | 2015-05-30 | 2020-07-07 | Leia Inc. | Vehicle monitoring system |
US11203346B2 (en) | 2015-05-30 | 2021-12-21 | Leia Inc. | Vehicle monitoring system |
US10551631B2 (en) * | 2015-06-12 | 2020-02-04 | Boe Technology Group Co., Ltd. | Display panel and display device |
US20170212358A1 (en) * | 2015-06-12 | 2017-07-27 | Boe Technology Group Co., Ltd. | Display panel and display device |
US10373544B1 (en) | 2016-01-29 | 2019-08-06 | Leia, Inc. | Transformation from tiled to composite images |
US10802324B2 (en) | 2017-03-14 | 2020-10-13 | Boe Technology Group Co., Ltd. | Double vision display method and device |
US10403212B2 (en) * | 2017-06-26 | 2019-09-03 | Shanghai Tianma AM-OLED Co., Ltd. | Display panel, method for displaying on the same, and display device |
US20220321870A1 (en) * | 2018-04-25 | 2022-10-06 | Raxium, Inc. | Partial light field display architecture |
US10964275B2 (en) | 2019-04-18 | 2021-03-30 | Apple Inc. | Displays with adjustable direct-lit backlight units and adaptive processing |
US20230090936A1 (en) * | 2020-04-28 | 2023-03-23 | Tcl China Star Optoelectronics Technology Co., Ltd. | Display device driving method and display device |
US11699407B2 (en) * | 2020-04-28 | 2023-07-11 | Tcl China Star Optoelectronics Technology Co., Ltd. | Display device driving method and display device |
CN112505942A (en) * | 2021-02-03 | 2021-03-16 | 成都工业学院 | Multi-resolution stereoscopic display device based on rear projection light source |
Also Published As
Similar Documents
Publication | Publication Date | Title |
---|---|---|
US20110157257A1 (en) | Backlighting array supporting adaptable parallax barrier | |
US8854531B2 (en) | Multiple remote controllers that each simultaneously controls a different visual presentation of a 2D/3D display | |
CN102577405B (en) | Autostereoscopic display device | |
CN102598675B (en) | Stereoscopic dual modulator display device using full color anaglyph | |
US8154799B2 (en) | 2D/3D switchable autostereoscopic display apparatus and method | |
US9613559B2 (en) | Displays with sequential drive schemes | |
US8687051B2 (en) | Screen and method for representing picture information | |
CN105744253B (en) | Automatic stereo three-dimensional display apparatus | |
US8619206B2 (en) | Electronic imaging device and driving method therefor | |
TW200305126A (en) | Improvements to color flat panel display sub-pixel arrangements and layouts with reduced blue luminance well visibility | |
KR20150144439A (en) | Three dimensional image display device | |
WO2015198606A1 (en) | Image data redundancy for high quality 3D | |
CN105425408A (en) | Three-dimensional display apparatus and driving method thereof | |
WO2012060987A1 (en) | Methods of zero-d dimming and reducing perceived image crosstalk in a multiview display | |
TW201404118A (en) | Auto-stereoscopic display device and drive method | |
US9509984B2 (en) | Three dimensional image display method and device utilizing a two dimensional image signal at low-depth areas | |
CN103026717A (en) | Multi-view display system and method therefor | |
JP2004241962A (en) | Display device and method therefor | |
US10986329B2 (en) | Autostereoscopic 3-dimensional display | |
JP2004240090A (en) | Display device and its method | |
KR102232462B1 (en) | Autostereoscopic 3d display device | |
WO2015121067A1 (en) | Display panel having fewer data drivers |
Legal Events
Date | Code | Title | Description |
---|---|---|---|
AS | Assignment |
Owner name: BANK OF AMERICA, N.A., AS COLLATERAL AGENT, NORTH CAROLINA Free format text: PATENT SECURITY AGREEMENT;ASSIGNOR:BROADCOM CORPORATION;REEL/FRAME:037806/0001 Effective date: 20160201 Owner name: BANK OF AMERICA, N.A., AS COLLATERAL AGENT, NORTH Free format text: PATENT SECURITY AGREEMENT;ASSIGNOR:BROADCOM CORPORATION;REEL/FRAME:037806/0001 Effective date: 20160201 |
|
STCB | Information on status: application discontinuation |
Free format text: ABANDONED -- FAILURE TO RESPOND TO AN OFFICE ACTION |
|
AS | Assignment |
Owner name: AVAGO TECHNOLOGIES GENERAL IP (SINGAPORE) PTE. LTD., SINGAPORE Free format text: ASSIGNMENT OF ASSIGNORS INTEREST;ASSIGNOR:BROADCOM CORPORATION;REEL/FRAME:041706/0001 Effective date: 20170120 Owner name: AVAGO TECHNOLOGIES GENERAL IP (SINGAPORE) PTE. LTD Free format text: ASSIGNMENT OF ASSIGNORS INTEREST;ASSIGNOR:BROADCOM CORPORATION;REEL/FRAME:041706/0001 Effective date: 20170120 |
|
AS | Assignment |
Owner name: BROADCOM CORPORATION, CALIFORNIA Free format text: TERMINATION AND RELEASE OF SECURITY INTEREST IN PATENTS;ASSIGNOR:BANK OF AMERICA, N.A., AS COLLATERAL AGENT;REEL/FRAME:041712/0001 Effective date: 20170119 |